WJ-HD309A

Digital Disk Recorders

Operating Instructions

Model Nos.

WJ-HD309A

WJ-HD316A

ALARM

SUSPEND

TIMER

ERROR

ALARM

RESET

OPERATE

HDD 1

HDD 2

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SHIFT

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

SEQ

COPY

10/0

TEXT

OSD

MARK

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

STOP

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

PLAY

PAUSE

REC-

- REC STOP

LISTED

SETUP

/ESC

–

BUSY

SET

REV

FWD

PULL

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD

316

Before attempting to connect or operate this product, please read these instructions carefully and save this manual for future use.

We declare under our sole responsibility that the product to which this declaration relates is in conformity with the standards or other normative documents following the provisions of Directives EEC/73/23 and

EEC/89/336.

Wir erklären in alleiniger Verantwortung, daß das Produkt, auf das sich diese Erklärung bezieht, mit der folgenden Normen oder normativen

Dokumenten übereinstimmt. Gemäß den Bestimmungen der Richtlinie

73/23/EEC und 89/336/EEC.

Nous déclarons sous note seule responsabilité que le produit auquel se réfère la présente déclaration est conforme aux normes ou autres documents normatifs conformément aux dispositions des directives

CEE/73/23 et CEE/89/336.

Nosotros declaramos bajo nuestra única responsabilidad que el producto a que hace referencia esta declaración está conforme con las normas u otros documentos normativos siguiendo las estipulaciones de las directivas CEE/73/23 y CEE/89/336.

Noi dichiariamo sotto nostra esclusiva responsabilità che il prodotto a cui si riferisce la presente dichiarazione risulta conforme ai seguenti standard o altri documenti normativi conformi alle disposizioni delle direttive CEE/73/23 e CEE/89/336.

WARNING:

• To prevent fire or electric shock hazard, do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture. The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.

• All work related to the installation of this product should be made by qualified service personnel or system installers.

CAUTION:

•

Read the label on the top and bottom of the unit for identification of this product, and the power ratings.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.

REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated

"dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.

Power disconnection. Unit with or without

ON-OFF switches have power supplied to the unit whenever the power cord is inserted into the power source; however, the unit is operational only when the ON-OFF switch is in the ON position. The power cord is the main power disconnect for all units.

Wij verklaren als enige aansprakelijke, dat het product waarop deze verklaring betrekking heeft, voldoet aan de volgende normen of andere normatieve documenten, overeenkomstig de bepalingen van Richtlijnen

73/23/EEC en 89/336/EEC.

Vi erklærer os eneansvarlige for, at dette produkt, som denne deklaration omhandler, er i overensstemmelse med standarder eller andre normative dokumenter i følge bestemmelserne i direktivene

73/23/EEC og 89/336/EEC.

Vi deklarerar härmed värt fulla ansvar för att den produkt till vilken denna deklaration hänvisar är i överensstämmelse med standarddokument, eller andra normativa dokument som framställs i

EEC-direktiv nr. 73/23 och 89/336.

Ilmoitamme yksinomaisella vastuullamme, että tuote, jota tämä ilmoitus koskee, noudattaa seuraavia standardeja tai muita ohjeellisia asiakirjoja, jotka noudattavat direktiivien 73/23/EEC ja 89/336/EE. säädöksiä.

Vi erklærer oss alene ansvarlige for at produktet som denne erklæringen gjelder for, er i overensstemmelse med følgende normer eller andre normgivende dokumenter som følger bestemmelsene i direktivene

73/23/EEC og 89/336/EEC.

For U.K.

FOR YOUR SAFETY PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING TEXT CARE-

FULLY.

This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience.

A 5 amp fuse is fitted in this plug.

Should the fuse need to be replaced please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 5 amp and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to

BS1362.

Check for the ASTA mark

H or the BSI mark

G on the body of the fuse.

If the plug contains a removable fuse cover you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced.

If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained.

A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from your local Panasonic

Dealer.

IF THE FITTED MOULDED PLUG IS UNSUITABLE FOR THE SOCK-

ET OUTLET IN YOUR HOME THEN THE FUSE SHOULD BE

REMOVED AND THE PLUG CUT OFF AND DISPOSED OF SAFELY.

THERE IS A DANGER OF SEVERE ELECTRICAL SHOCK IF THE

CUT OFF PLUG IS INSERTED INTO ANY 13 AMP SOCKET.

If a new plug is to be fitted please observe the wiring code as shown below.

If in any doubt please consult a qualified electrician.

WARNING: This apparatus must be earthed.

IMPORTANT

The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code.

Green-and-yellow:

Blue:

Earth

Neutral

Brown: Live

As the colours of the wire in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows.

The wire which is coloured green-and-yellow must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter E or by the earth symbol

I or coloured green or green-and-yellow.

The wire which is coloured blue must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter N or coloured black.

The wire which is coloured brown must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter L or coloured red.

How to replace the fuse

Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse and fuse cover.

FUSE

The serial number of this product may be found on the top and bottom of the unit.

You should note the serial number of this unit in the space provided and retain this book as a permanent record of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft.

Model No.

Serial No.

LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

THIS PUBLICATION IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WAR-

RANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WAR-

RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR ANY PAR-

TICULAR PURPOSE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THE

THIRD PARTY’S RIGHT.

THIS PUBLICATION COULD INCLUDE TECHNICAL INAC-

CURACIES OR TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS. CHANGES

ARE ADDED TO THE INFORMATION HEREIN, AT ANY

TIME, FOR THE IMPROVEMENTS OF THIS PUBLICATION

AND/OR THE CORRESPONDING PRODUCT (S).

DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY

IN NO EVENT SHALL MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC INDUSTRI-

AL CO., LTD. BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY OR ANY PER-

SON, EXCEPT FOR REPLACEMENT OR REASONABLE

MAINTENANCE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR THE CASES,

INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO BELOW:

(1) ANY DAMAGE AND LOSS, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIM-

ITATION, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSE-

QUENTIAL OR EXEMPLARY, ARISING OUT OF OR

RELATING TO THE PRODUCT;

(2) PERSONAL INJURY OR ANY DAMAGE CAUSED BY

INAPPROPRIATE USE OR NEGLIGENT OPERATION

OF THE USER;

(3) UNAUTHORIZED DISASSEMBLE, REPAIR OR MODIFI-

CATION OF THE PRODUCT BY THE USER;

(4) ANY PROBLEM, CONSEQUENTIAL INCONVENIENCE,

OR LOSS OR DAMAGE, ARISING OUT OF THE SYS-

TEM COMBINED BY THE DEVICES OF THIRD PARTY.

(5) ANY CLAIM OR ACTION FOR DAMAGES, BROUGHT

BY ANY PERSON OR ORGANIZATION BEING A PHO-

TOGENIC SUBJECT, DUE TO VIOLATION OF PRIVACY

WITH THE RESULT OF THAT SURVEILLANCE-CAMER-

A’S PICTURE, INCLUDING SAVED DATA, FOR SOME

REASON, BECOMES PUBLIC OR IS USED FOR THE

PURPOSE OTHER THAN SURVEILLANCE

(6) ANY PROBLEM, CONSEQUENTIAL INCONVENIENCE,

ANY LOSS OR DAMAGE, ARISING OUT OF THE

IMPROPER DETECTION OR SLIP-UP IN DETECTION

BY VMD (Video Motion Detector) FUNCTION OF THE

PRODUCT.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1) Read these instructions.

2) Keep these instructions.

3) Heed all warnings.

4) Follow all instructions.

5) Do not use this apparatus near water.

6) Clean only with dry cloth.

7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

8) Do not use near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

9) Do not misuse the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding-type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10) Protect the power cord from being stepped on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenient receptacles and the points where they exit from the apparatus.

11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.

12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-overs.

S3125A

13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time.

14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as when the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.

PRECAUTIONS

• Refer all work related to the installation of these products to qualified service personnel or system installers.

• Do not operate the appliances beyond their specified temperature, humidity, or power source ratings.

Use the appliance at temperatures within +5 °C -

+45 °C (41 °F - 113 °F) and humidity below 85 %.

The input power source for this appliance is 220 V -

240 V AC 50 Hz.

Performance and lifetime of hard disk drives are easily affected by heat (used at high temperature) characteristically. It is recommended to use this appliance at temperatures within +20 °C - +30 °C (68 °F - 86 °F).

• Handle the appliance with care.

Do not strike or shake, as this may damage the appliance.

• Do not strike or give a strong shock to the unit.

It may cause damage or allow water to enter the unit.

• Built-in backup battery

Before the first use, charge the built-in backup battery

(lithium battery) by turning on the power for 48 hours or more.

If it is not charged enough, in a case where the power goes down, the internal clock may keep bad time or the operative condition may be different to that before the electric power failure.

The built-in battery life is approximately 5 years as an indication of replacement. (This is just an indication of replacement. We are not providing any guarantee of the built-in battery lifetime. Replacement cost of the built-in battery is not covered by the warranty even if it needs to be done within the warranty period.) Ask the shop where you purchased the unit when replacement of the battery is required.

• Cooling Fan

Turn the power off when cleaning the unit. Otherwise it may cause injuries.

Replacement costs of the cooling fan are not covered by the warranty even if it needs to be done within the warranty period. Consult your dealer for servicing.

• Cleaning

Turn the power off when cleaning the unit. Otherwise it may cause injuries.

Do not use strong or abrasive detergents when cleaning the appliance body.

Use a dry cloth to clean the appliance when it is dirty.

When the dirt is hard to remove, use a mild detergent and wipe gently.

• Indication label

Refer to the indication labels placed on the top and bottom of the unit as to the indications of equipment classification and power source, etc.

• Built-in hard disk drives

Hard disk drives are vulnerable to vibration. Handle them with care.

It is possible to damage them if they are moved while their motors are still running. Do not move them just after turning their power on or off (for around 30 seconds).

Hard disk drives are perishable. They will need to be replaced after around 20 000 - 30 000 hours of operation in case they are used at temperature of 25 °C

(77 °F).

Replacement costs of the hard disk drives are not covered by the warranty even if it needs to be done within the warranty period. Consult your dealer for servicing.

When hard disk drive trouble occurs, replace it immediately. Consult your dealer for servicing.

When replacing the hard disk drives, take notice of the following.

Do not detach the hard disk drives or the cables connecting the unit and the front cover while the

HDD1/HDD2 indicators are lit or for around 30 seconds after the indicators go off.

Protect the hard disk drives from static electricity.

Do not stack them, or keep them upright.

Do not use an electric screwdriver to fix them.

(Tightening torque: Approx. 0.49 N · m (5 k gf · cm))

Avoid rapid changes of the temperature/humidity to prevent condensation. (Acceptable change: within

15 °C/h (59 °F/h))

• Place the unit horizontally an a level surface. Do not place the unit in an upright position. When stacking multiple units, clear a space of more than 5 cm from both sides, the top, the bottom and the rear of the units.

• Avoid placing receptacles that contain liquids such as water near the unit.

If liquid spills onto the unit, it may cause fire or an electric shock.

• Do not expose the unit to water or moisture, or try to operate it in wet areas.

• Prevent condensation from forming on the surface of the hard disk.

If this happens, do not turn on the power of the recorder and leave the recorder for around 2 hours.

Wait until the dew evaporates in any of the following cases:

• The recorder is placed in an extremely humid place.

• The recorder is placed in a room where a heater has just been turned on.

• The recorder is moved from an air-conditioned room to a humid and high-temperature room.

• We recommend that you make a note of your settings and save them. This will help when you are required to change the system configuration, or when unexpected trouble or failure occurs.

• Distributing, copying, disassembling, reverse compiling, reverse engineering, and also exporting in violation of export laws of the software provided with this product, is expressly prohibited.

TRADEMARKS AND REGISTERED TRADEMARKS

• Adobe, Adobe logos, and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the U.S. and/ or other countries.

• Microsoft, Windows and Windows XP are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.

• Other names of companies and products contained in these operating instructions may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

ABOUT THESE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

There are 3 sets of operating instructions for the WJ-

HD316A/WJ-HD309A as follows.

• Operating Instructions (book, these operating instructions)

• Network Operating Instructions (PDF)

• Network Setup Instructions (PDF)

These "Operating Instructions" contain descriptions of how to operate this unit with the buttons on the front panel.

Refer to the "Network Operating Instructions" on the provided CD-ROM for descriptions of how to operate this unit from a PC.

Refer to the "Network Setup Instructions" on the provided

CD-ROM for descriptions of how to perform the required settings and how to connect to other devices.

Adobe

Reader is required to read these operating instructions (PDF) on the provided CD-ROM. When the Adobe

Reader is not installed on the PC, download the latest

Adobe

Reader from the Adobe web site and install it.

"WJ-HD300" or "HD300" shown in the illustrations used in these operating instructions indicate this unit or the WJ-

HD300 series.

LIMITATION OF LIABILITY .............................................. 3

DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY ........................................ 3

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS .......................... 4

PRECAUTIONS ................................................................ 5

TRADEMARKS AND REGISTERED TRADEMARKS ...... 6

ABOUT THESE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS .............. 6

PREFACE ......................................................................... 8

FEATURES ....................................................................... 8

MAJOR OPERATING CONTROLS AND

THEIR FUNCTIONS ......................................................... 9

■

Front View ................................................................... 9

■

Rear View ................................................................... 11

■

On Monitor 1 (To display only live image) .................. 12

■

On Monitor 2 (To display live or recorded images) ..... 13

STARTUP ......................................................................... 18

CLOCK ADJUSTMENT .................................................... 19

SHUTDOWN ..................................................................... 20

RECORDING (Manual Recording) ................................... 21

RECORDING (Emergency Recording) ............................. 22

PLAYBACK ....................................................................... 23

PLAYBACK IMAGE ON A DESIGNATED DISK ............... 26

PLAYBACK FROM A DESIGNATED TIME

AND DATE ........................................................................ 28

SEARCH AND PLAY ........................................................ 29

■

Search for a Recording Event and Play it back

(Recording Event Search) .......................................... 29

■

Search for Copied Recorded Images and

Play it back (Copy Data Search) ................................. 33

■

Search for a motion detected time and date from the recorded images and play it (VMD search) .......... 37

■

Search for a marked point and play from that point (Marking search) ................................................ 42

MONITOR LIVE IMAGES ................................................. 43

■

Displaying Live Images on a Single Screen ............... 43

■

Displaying on a Multi-screen ....................................... 44

■

Sequential Display ...................................................... 45

CONTROL CAMERAS ..................................................... 46

■

Panning/Tilting ............................................................ 46

■

Zoom ........................................................................... 46

■

Focus .......................................................................... 46

■

Iris ............................................................................... 47

■

Preset Action .............................................................. 47

■

Auto Function (Auto Pan, etc) ..................................... 49

ABOUT THE EVENT FUNCTION ..................................... 50

■

Action at an event occurrence .................................... 50

■

Cancel the Alarm Action ............................................. 52

■

Suspend the Alarm Actions ........................................ 52

COPYING (Duplicate) ....................................................... 53

DELETE DATA ON THE DISK ......................................... 55

■

Deletion of recorded images saved on the hard disk manually ...................................................... 55

FORMAT (INITIALIZE) A DVD-RAM DISK ....................... 57

DISPLAY/EDIT TEXT INFORMATION ............................. 59

ERROR/WARNINGS ........................................................ 61

OPERATION USING A PC ............................................... 64

■

Features ...................................................................... 64

■

System Requirements of a PC ................................... 64

OPERATION OF THE UNIT IN THE CASCADE

CONNECTION .................................................................. 65

■

Setup .......................................................................... 65

■

Operation using the buttons on the front panel ........... 65

■

Operation using the system controllers ...................... 66

MANAGEMENT OF USERS/HOSTS ............................... 67

OPERATING THE UNIT FOR THE FIRST TIME ............. 69

Preparation for maintenance (HDD replacement, installation, etc.) .............................................................. 70

INSTALLATIONS .............................................................. 72

Places to avoid ............................................................... 72

Rack mounting ................................................................ 72

CONNECTIONS ............................................................... 73

■

Connections when the unit is used independently ...... 74

■

Connections with an extension unit ............................ 75

■

Connections with DVD-RAM, CD-R, and

DVD-R drives .............................................................. 76

■

Connections with the VTR .......................................... 77

■

Connections with PS·Data systems ............................ 78

■

Cascade connection of multiple units ......................... 80

■

Connection with the RS485 camera ........................... 84

■

Mode Switch ............................................................... 86

■

RS485 Port ................................................................. 86

■

How to Use the Terminals of the ALARM/

CONTROL Connector ................................................. 87

■

How to Use the Terminals of the

ALARM Connector ...................................................... 91

■

How to Use the SERIAL Connector ............................ 93

SETUP .............................................................................. 94

■

About the SETUP MENU (Quick) ............................... 94

■

Item list of the SETUP MENU (Quick) ........................ 94

■

[Display] ...................................................................... 95

■

[REC & Event] ............................................................. 98

■

[Network] ................................................................... 101

■

About the SETUP MENU (Advanced) ...................... 102

■

Item list of the SETUP MENU ................................... 102

■

Basic Operation with the SETUP MENU

(Advanced) ............................................................... 105

■

[System] Settings on System .................................... 106

■

[Recording] ............................................................... 112

■

[Event] Function for Events ....................................... 115

■

[Schedule] Settings for the recording/ event action schedule ............................................... 120

■

[Switcher] Settings for the switcher function ............. 125

■

[Display] .................................................................... 128

■

[Comm] Settings for communication with other devices ............................................................ 131

■

[Maintenance] Functions for Maintaining .................. 136

DISPLAY SETUP MENU OF CAMERA .......................... 140

DISK MANAGEMENT ..................................................... 141

■

Notes on the hard disk .............................................. 141

■

How to replace the built-in hard disk ......................... 141

■

About the HDD DISK MENU ..................................... 144

■

Display of the HDD DISK MENU .............................. 144

■

RAID 5 Function of the Extension Unit ..................... 145

■

Formatting (Initialization) the Hard Disk .................... 146

■

Setting for Mirroring .................................................. 150

SERIAL (RS232C) CONNECTOR COMMAND

REFERENCE .................................................................. 154

■

SERIAL (RS232C) Communication Protocol ............ 154

■

Command Format ..................................................... 154

FLOWCHART OF THE SETUP MENU ........................... 164

PARAMETERS AND THE DEFAULT SETTINGS

OF THE SETUP MENU .................................................. 165

TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................... 173

SPECIFICATION ............................................................ 177

STANDARD ACCESSORIES ......................................... 178

PREFACE

The Digital Disk Recorders WJ-HD316A/309A are designed for use within a surveillance system and are a combination of a hard disk recorder and a video multiplexer (16-input for the WJ-HD316A, 9-input for the WJ-HD309A).

The digital hard disk recorder is a recording device using a hard disk drive to record camera pictures instead of using videotapes so that pictures recorded by repeated overwriting will not experience deterioration of the recorded picture quality. Up to 16 cameras can be connected to the WJ-

HD316A directly (up to 9 cameras to the WJ-HD309A) and it is possible to record their camera pictures. It is also possible to display four or more camera pictures on a single monitor, to switch camera pictures, and to operate cameras using this unit.

FEATURES

Various Recording Functions

• Multi-Recording

It is possible to perform multiple recordings using a single digital disk recorder even if the operating environments are different, for example, recording pictures of cameras in different places at different times.

• Schedule recording

It is possible to perform recording automatically at a scheduled time on a designated day of the week.

Schedules can be set on each camera.

• Emergency Recording

In the case of an emergency, emergency recordings will be given a higher priority than other recording modes by operating an external switch.

• External Timer Recording

It is possible to perform recording automatically using an external timer.

• Event Recording

At an event occurrence, such as when an alarm signal is supplied, the recording mode (quality and recording rate) can be changed to high quality to record pictures.

• Motion Detection Function (VMD)

It is possible to start recording automatically when motion is detected in a shooting area.

Frame Switcher Function

• It is possible to display pictures of four or more cameras on a single monitor (multi-screen) splitting the monitor screen into 4, 7, 9, 10, 13, or 16 sections using the WJ-HD316A, and into 4, 7, or 9 sections using the

WJ-HD309A.

While monitoring a multi-screen, each camera picture will be displayed as a moving image.

Remote Operation via Network

It is possible to operate this unit using a PC connected to a

LAN (Local Area Network) or the Internet with the featured network function.

Security Function and Reliability

• Authentication function (registration of ID and password) allows users access to a predetermined selection of the available functions. Up to 32 users can be registered.

• If alteration of a recorded image data is made for any reason, the alteration alert function will announce it.

• If a hard disk crashes, the backup function

, the mirroring function

*2 and the RAID 5 function

*3 prevent any data loss.

: Only when the recommended DVD-RAM drive, DVD-R drive or CD-R drive is used

: The mirroring function does not work with an external hard disk drive such as an extension unit.

: To use the RAID 5 function, an optional extension unit is required.

Transmission with Coaxial Cable, PS·Data and

RS485 Compatible

• It is possible to control a Panasonic combination camera such as the WV-CS850 using only a coaxial cable but not other devices. Using a coaxial cable also compensates for transmission loss.

• It is easy to establish the surveillance system by connecting a PS·Data compatible system controller and peripherals.

MAJOR OPERATING CONTROLS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS

■

Front View

t qw e r yu i o

!9 @0

!5 !6 !7

@6 @7 @8 @9

[WJ-HD316A]

ALARM

SUSPEND

OPERATE

TIMER

ERROR

ALARM

RESET

HDD 1

HDD 2

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

1 2 3 4

SHIFT

5 6

SEQ

OSD

DISK SELECT

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

EL-ZOOM

13 14 15

LOGOUT

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

SET

BUSY

–

REV FWD

PULL

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD A

!3 !4 @1 @2 @3 @4 @5

S-VIDEO

COPY 2 VIDEO

OUT

AUDIO

OUT

[WJ-HD309A]

t qw e r yu i o

!9 @0

!5 !6 !7

ALARM

SUSPEND

OPERATE

TIMER

ERROR

ALARM

RESET

HDD 1

HDD 2

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SHIFT

1 2

SEQ

TEXT

OSD

DISK SELECT

COPY

MARK

EL-ZOOM LOGOUT

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

LISTED

SETUP

/ESC

SET

BUSY

–

REV FWD

PULL

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD A

!3 !4 @1 @2 @3 @4 @5

@7 @8 @9

S-VIDEO

COPY 2 VIDEO

OUT

AUDIO

OUT

#0 q

Operate Indicator (OPERATE)

Lights up when the power is turned on.

Alarm Suspension Indicator (ALARM SUSPEND)

Lights up when the alarm suspension mode is selected.

Alarm Indicator (ALARM)

Blinks when an alarm occurs, and lights steadily when the activated alarm is reset automatically.

To turn this indicator off, press the ALARM RESET button.

Alarm Reset Button (ALARM RESET)

Pressing this button cancels alarm activation, and returns the system to the condition before the alarm was activated.

Error indicator (ERROR)

Blinks orange when an error occurs that will not keep the unit from running.

Blinks red when an error occurs that may cause the system to go down.

Refer to page 61 for further information about error/ warnings.

Timer Indicator (TIMER)

Lights up when the schedule recording is set, and blinks while the schedule recording is being performed.

HDD Access Indicators (HDD1/HDD2)

Blinks when the HDD1 or the HDD2 is accessed respectively.

Monitor Switch button (MONITOR1/MONITOR2)

Pressing this button switches the monitor. This button lights up when monitor 1 is selected, and goes off when monitor 2 or the VGA monitor is selected.

Shift Button (SHIFT)

Toggles the functions of the camera selection buttons.

Camera Selection Buttons ([1] - [10/0], [11] - [16] for the WJ-HD316A, [1] - [9], [0] for the WJ-HD309A)

Pressing a button displays live or playback images of the selected camera. The LED in the button indicates the status as follows.

Green:

When a button is lit green, the currently displayed image on the monitor is live from the respective camera.

Orange:

When a button is lit orange, the image from the respective camera is recorded.

Blue:

When a button is lit blue, the currently displayed image on the monitor is live from the respective camera and is also recorded.

When the shift button is lit, these buttons work as the toggled function buttons.

(The buttons available as the toggled function buttons will light green when the shift button is lit.)

Pan, Tilt, Latest Recorded Image Playback Button

(PAN/TILT, GO TO LAST)

Pans/tilts the selected camera, or plays back the latest recorded image.

(Refer to pages 46 and 24 respectively.)

Zoom, Focus, A - B Repeat Button (ZOOM/FOCUS,

A-B REPEAT)

Zooms in/out, adjusts focus, or repeats playback of recorded images between two designated points.

(Refer to pages 46 and 24 respectively.)

Iris, Listing Button (IRIS, LISTED)

Adjusts iris, or enables/disables the filtering playback.

(Refer to pages 47 and 29 respectively.)

Preset, Auto Function Button (PRESET/AUTO)

Moves a camera to the preset position, or activates the auto function of the camera.

(Refer to pages 47 and 49 respectively.)

Stop Button (STOP)

Stops playback.

Play/Pause Button (PLAY/PAUSE)

Plays recorded images, or pauses playback.

Record Button (REC/REC STOP)

Starts recording. To stop recording, press this button down for 2 seconds or more.

Slow Button (PAN/TILT. SLOW)

Pans/tilts the selected camera slowly.

Search Button (SEARCH)

Displays the search menu.

Setup, Escape Button (SETUP/ESC)

Displays the setup menu, or turns back to the previous page of the setup menu, etc.

Busy Indicator (BUSY)

Lights when the selected camera was not available to operate because another user is operating it using a controller or a PC via a network. In this case, wait until this indicator goes off.

Arrow Buttons (

CDAB

)

Adjusts zooming/focus, or moves the cursor on the setup menus and the search menu.

Set Button (SET)

Works differently depending on the situations listed below:

• Plays recorded images at the current playback speed when this button is pressed during fast playback.

• Registers preset positions of cameras.

• Activates the auto focus function.

• Resets the set iris.

• Sets the alarm suspension mode on/off.

• Determines the setting of parameters on the setup menus.

Jog Dial

Works differently depending on the situations as follows:

• Plays recorded images frame by frame when this dial is rotated during pausing playback.

• Skips playback time when this dial is rotated during playback at normal speed.

• Moves the cursor on the search menu or the thumbnail menu.

• Selects a parameter setting or a character on the setup menus.

Shuttle Ring

Works differently depending on the situations as follows:

• Plays fast when this ring is rotated during playback at normal speed.

• Turns the search menu pages or the thumbnail menu pages.

Connectors Cover

Copy Port (COPY2)

Connect a recommended external recording device to this port.

S-Video Output Connector (S-VIDEO)

Connect the S-video input connector of a VTR with this connector. The same video signal supplied to the MON-

ITOR OUT2 connector on the rear panel will be supplied to this connector.

Video Output Connector (VIDEO OUT)

Connect the video input connector of a VTR with this connector. The same video signal supplied to the MON-

ITOR OUT2 connector on the rear panel will be supplied to this connector.

Audio Output Connector (AUDIO OUT)

This connector, for an RCA standard jack, supplies an unbalanced –10 dBV, 600

Ω line output audio signal to an external device.

Recorded audio will be supplied from this connector during playback.

The same audio signal supplied to the AUDIO OUT connector on the rear panel will be supplied to this connector.

■

Rear View

[WJ-HD309A]

q w t y u i o !0

e !2 !4

[WJ-HD316A]

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

SERIAL

CASCADE

OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

13 12 11

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM

ALARM/CONTROL

8 7

OUT

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

VIDEO

8 7 6

MODE

COPY 1

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

4 3

10/100BASE-T

EXT STORAGE

5 4 3 2 1 q w t y u i r @0 o !0

e !2 !4

3 1

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

SERIAL

CASCADE

OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM

ALARM/CONTROL

8 7

OUT

9 8 7

P S · D a t a

MODE

COPY 1

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

4 3

10/100BASE-T

EXT STORAGE

VIDEO

5 4 3 2 1 r @0

SIGNAL GND

POWER

AC IN

SIGNAL GND

POWER

AC IN

Audio Input Connectors (AUDIO IN 1 - 4)

These connectors, for RCA pin jacks, accept an unbalanced –10 dBV, 10 k

Ω line input audio signal supplied from an external device such as a microphone amplifier.

Audio Output Connector (AUDIO OUT)

This connector, for an RCA standard jack, supplies an unbalanced –10 dBV, 600

Ω line output audio signal to an external device.

Recorded audio will be supplied from this connector during playback.

Video Input Connectors (CAMERA IN 1 - 16 for the

WJ-HD316A/CAMERA IN 1 - 9 for the WJ-HD309A)

Connect system cameras or combination cameras to these BNC connectors. Refer to page 73 for the important notice about the BNC cables to be used.

A 75

Ω termination is made unless the video output terminal is connected.

To connect combination cameras, connect them to the

CAMERA IN 1 - 8 connectors of the WJ-HD316A, or the

CAMERA IN 1 - 6 of the WJ-HD309A (accept coaxial communication).

Video Output Connectors (CAMERA OUT 1 - 16 for the WJ-HD316A/CAMERA OUT 1 - 9 for the WJ-

HD309A)

These BNC connectors supply video signals looped through the video input connectors. Refer to page 73 for the important notice about the BNC cables to be used.

Note:

Video signals will not be supplied from the CAM-

ERA OUT 1 - 8 connectors if the power of the unit is off.

Monitor Output Connectors (MONITOR OUT1, MONI-

TOR OUT2/CASCADE OUT)

Connect monitors to these BNC connectors. Refer to page 73 for the important notice about the BNC cables to be used.

The MONITOR OUT2 connector can also be used as the CASCADE OUT connector.

When using two or more units of the WJ-HD316A/WJ-

HD309A and using the MONITOR OUT2 connector as the CASCADE OUT connector, connect with the CAS-

CADE IN connector of another WJ-HD316A/WJ-

HD309A.

Cascade In Connector (CASCADE IN)

Connect with the CASCADE OUT connector of another

WJ-HD316A/WJ-HD309A when using two or more units of the WJ-HD316A/WJ-HD309A.

Serial Connector (SERIAL)

Connect a PC with this D-Sub 9-pin connector when controlling this unit.

Monitor Connector (MONITOR (VGA))

Connect a VGA monitor with this connector. The same video signal supplied to the MONITOR OUT2 connector will be supplied to this connector.

IMPORTANT

For European Customers

The refresh rate of the video output signal supplied from the

MONITOR (VGA) connector is 50 Hz. Some VGA monitors in Europe may not support this refresh rate and could be damaged. Please check the refresh rate supported by your

VGA monitor before connecting.

Please check the documentation supplied with your monitor to see if your VGA monitor supports a refresh rate of 50 Hz.

If your VGA monitor does not support 50 Hz (or if you are not sure), then turn off your VGA monitor before turning on

WJ-HD316A/WJ-HD309A when using your television as a display.

Alarm Connector (ALARM)

Connect an external device such as a sensor or a door switch with this D-Sub 25-pin connector.

Alarm/Control Connector (ALARM/CONTROL)

Connect a control switch with this D-Sub 25-pin connector when controlling this unit using an external device, or when controlling an alarm device such as a buzzer or a lamp.

PS·Data Ports (DATA)

Connect PS·Data compatible devices with these ports.

Mode Switches (MODE)

Set the operation mode of this unit with these dip switches.

RS485 Ports (RS485 (CAMERA))

Connect RS485 compatible combination cameras with these ports.

Network Port (10/100BASE-T)

Connect this unit to a network compatible with 10BASE-

T or 100BASE-Tx when controlling this unit using a PC via a network.

Copy Port (COPY1)

Connect a recommended external recording device to this port.

Extra Storage Port (EXT STORAGE)

Connect an optional extension unit (WJ-HDE300 series) with this port.

Power Switch (POWER)

Turns the power of this unit on and off.

Signal Ground Terminal (SIGNAL GND)

Power Cord Inlet (AC IN)

Connect the power cord to this inlet.

Cable Clamp

Fix the cables with this cable clamp to prevent disconnection or unstable connections that may cause recording failures or an unstable system.

■

On Monitor 1 (To display only live image)

q we q w e q q we q we

The negative circled numbers indicate the default positions of camera title q, time w and event display e.

Important:

• The SETUP MENU will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA monitor. (It is impossible to display the SETUP

MENU on monitor 1.)

• It will take around 2 minutes to display live images on monitor 1 after turning on the power of the unit.

1. Camera Title

Displays the edited camera title.

A position to display the camera title can be selected from the following.

Upper left, upper right, lower left, lower right, center

The default camera title position is upper right (R-

UPPER).

Note:

The camera title will be displayed with 16 characters (2 lines: 8 characters per line).

2. Time

Displays the current time (hour:minute:second) and date (day:month:year).

A position to display the time can be selected from the following.

Upper left, lower left, upper right, lower right

The default time display position is upper left (L-

UPPER).

Notes:

• When the camera title and the time display are layered, only the time display will be displayed.

• When monitor 1 is selected, it is possible to turn on/off display of the camera title and the time by pressing the camera selection button 8 for the WJ-

HD316A (the camera selection button 6 for the WJ-

HD309A) while the shift function is on (by pressing the SHIFT button).

3. Event Display

When an event has occurred, an event display will be displayed.

The position of an event display will be symmetrical to the position where the time is displayed. When the time is displayed at the lower left of the screen, an event display will be displayed at the upper right corner of the screen. The default position of an event display is the upper right corner of the screen (R-UPPER).

The event display will be displayed differently as follows depending on which event has occurred.

VMD-*:

When motion is detected.

LOSS-*:

When video loss has occurred.

COM-#:

When a command alarm has occurred.

TRM-#:

When a terminal alarm has occurred.

*: Camera number (1 - 16 for the WJ-HD316A, 1 - 9 for the WJ-HD309A)

#: Alarm number

Note:

Refer to page 50 for further information about event types and event actions.

■

On Monitor 2 (To display live or recorded images)

q q w

B q w

C q q w

– A

The negative circled number q indicates the camera title default position.

Notes:

• The same images displayed on monitor 2 will be displayed on the VGA monitor.

• The camera title will be displayed with 16 characters (2 lines: 8 characters per line).

• When monitor 2 is selected, it is possible to switch the way of displaying the camera title in the following order by pressing the camera selection button 8 for the WJ-

HD316A (the camera selection button 6 for the WJ-

HD309A) while the shift function is on (by pressing the

SHIFT button):

Display the camera title

→ Display the camera title in list form

→ Not display the camera title

• When playing images recorded after selecting "ON" for

"Embedded REC (Time & Date)", the embedded abbreviation of the recording mode (event recording/emergency recording) will be displayed.

The abbreviations are as follows:

EVT:

Pre-/post-event recording

EMR:

Emergency recording

• In case that "ON" is selected for "Embedded REC (Title)" and also "R-UPPER" or "R-LOWER" is selected for the camera title position, when playing images recorded with the resolution setting "SIF", a part of the embedded camera title may not be displayed.

Important:

• Since the VGA output from this unit is the same as for televisions (720 H x 576 V pixels/vertical frequency of

50 Hz), it may be possible that both the left and right edges can not fit onto the screen depending on the

VGA monitor.

• It is impossible to use the MONITOR (VGA) connector when connecting the unit in the cascade connection.

• It may take time to display live images on the VGA monitor if the VGA monitor is turned on/off when the unit is running.

IMPORTANT

For European Customers

Some VGA monitors in Europe cannot be used simultaneously with television display. When you enable television display in Europe, the refresh rate for the monitor and television is set to 50 Hz. Some VGA monitors may not support this refresh rate and could be damaged.

• Please check the documentation supplied with your monitor to see if your VGA monitor supports a refresh rate of 50 Hz.

If your VGA monitor does not support 50 Hz (or if you are not sure), then turn off your VGA monitor before turning on WJ-HD316A/WJ-HD309A when using your television as a display.

1. Camera Title

Displays the edited camera title.

A position to display the camera title can be selected from the following.

Upper left, upper right, lower left, lower right, center

The default camera title position is upper right (R-

UPPER).

2. Task Bar

Displays the current status.

The task bar consists of the main bar (w - A), the left bar (w - B), and the right bar (w - C).

There are 3 different ways to display the task bar as follows.

Mode 1

Displays only the main bar and the status is displayed on it.

Mode 2

Displays the status on the main bar, the left bar and the right bar.

Mode 3

Displays the status only on the main bar, and does not display information on the left bar and the right bar.

Note:

Mode 2 and Mode 3 are graphic operated. They may not be as clear as Mode 1.

●

Status on the Task Bar

• On the Main Bar

Status Display Area e

Live/Playback Time Display Area t

Error Display Area w

Copy/Delete Icons, Selected Disk,

Mirror/RAID Recovery Display Area r

Alarm Display Area q Status Display Area

Indicated Item

Live

Status

Indicates the live image display status

Playback

Indication

: Live image is displayed

: Live images are displayed sequentially

Indicates that playback is currently being performed with the displayed playback speed

5: Currently playing

4: Currently playing in reverse h: Currently pausing

2 : Currently playing at fast speed

1 : Currently playing in reverse at fast speed

Recording Indicates that recording is currently being performed

: Currently recording

Search Indicates that searching is currently being performed

: Currently searching w Copy/Delete Icons, Selected Disk, Mirror/RAID Recovery Display Area

Indicated Item Status

Copy Indicates that data copy is currently being performed

Delete

Selected Disk

Indicates that data deletion is currently being performed

Indicates the selected disk

Indication

: Currently copying

: Currently deleting data

RECOVER Indicates that mirror/RAID recovery is currently being performed

: Currently the HDD copy area is selected

: Currently the external recording device connected to the COPY 1 port is selected

: Currently the external recording device connected to the COPY 2 port is selected

: Currently recovering mirror/RAID e Live/Playback Time Display Area

Indicated Item

Time

Status

Displays time and date of the displayed image

When displaying live image: Current time and date

When playing recorded image: Time and date when recorded

*: During summer time, an asterisk (*) will be displayed on the left side of the displayed time.

Indication

Day:Month:Year Hour:Minute:Second

16 r Alarm Display Area

Indicated Item

Alarm

Status

Indicates that an alarm has occurred

VMD-*:

When motion is detected

LOSS-*:

When video loss has occurred

COM-#:

When a command alarm has occurred

TRM-#:

When a terminal alarm has occurred

*: Camera number (1 - 16 for the WJ-HD316A, 1 - 9 for the WJ-HD309A)

#: Alarm number

Indication

Alarm type

Alarm is occurring currently

Note:

Refer to page 50 for further information about event types and event actions.

t Error Display Area

Indicated Item

Error Warning

Status

Indicates an error occurrence or warning

ALT-*:

Alteration is detected

W-ERROR:

Failed to write data on the HDD

SMART:

Warning of the HDD malfunction

H-METER:

Set time for hour-meter (active time of the HDD) warning has passed

THERMAL:

The temperature inside the unit is too high

POWER:

A power outage has been detected

#-nn%:

Warning about running out of disk space while displaying available disk space percentage

#-FULL:

No available disk space

MEDIUM-n:

An error occurred in an external recording device

REMOVE:

The hard disk is removed from the system automatically because of an access error

FAN:

The fan is faulty

HDD-ERROR:

The hard disk designated as image storage was not found

M-FAIL:

Mirror recovery failed

R-FAIL:

RAID recovery failed

Indication

Error type

Error is occurring currently

Abbreviation of partition

Status

Normal recording area

Event recording area

Copy area

External recording device connected to the COPY1 port on the rear panel

External recording device connected to the COPY2 port on the front panel

Displayed abbreviation

NML

EVT

CPY

CP1

CP2

*: Camera number (1 - 16 for the WJ-HD316A, 1 - 9 for the WJ-HD309A)

#: Abbreviation that indicates partition nn: Available disk size n: Number of connector that an external recording device is connected to

Notes:

• Refer to page 61 for further information about error types and what to do when an error has occurred.

• The RAID recovery is a function of the optional extension unit (WJ-HDE300 series). Refer to the Operating Instructions of the optional extension unit for further information about the RAID recovery.

• On the Left Bar

Indicated Item

Camera

Status

Indicates recording and displaying status

Grey:

Camera currently not displayed or not connected to the respective channel

Green:

Camera displayed on the monitor

Orange:

Camera currently being recorded

Blue:

Camera currently being recorded and displayed on the monitor

Indication

Camera 1 is on the top and camera

16 is on the bottom

• On the Right Bar

Indicated Item

Used disk space

Status

Indicates the available disk space of each partition.

Top:

100 % of the disk space is being used (no available disk space)

Second from the top:

80 % of the disk space is being used

Center:

60 % of the disk space is being used

Second from the bottom:

40 % of the disk space is being used

Bottom:

20 % of the disk space is being used

Note:

When "CONTINUE" is selected on the "Disk End

Mode" page of the "Maintenance" setup menu, the available disk space will not be displayed. Refer to a system administrator for further information.

NML:

Available disk space of the normal recording area used for manual recording and schedule recording

EVT:

Available disk space of the event recording area used for event recording and emergency recording

Indication

Normal Recording Area

Event Recording Area

STARTUP

Insert the power plug to an outlet (AC 220 V -

240 V, 50 Hz)

Note:

Make sure the power source is AC 220 V - 240 V,

50 Hz.

Important:

When using the optional extension unit (WJ-HDE300 series), turn on the power of this unit after turning on the power of all extension units.

Turn on the power switch on the rear panel.

The OPERATE indicator will light and the system check

(checking the system and hard disk) will start.

The startup splash image below will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA monitor during the system check.

When the auto login is off, the login window will be displayed if any button on the front panel of this unit is pressed after the system check. (Go to step 3)

When the auto login is on, live images will be displayed after the system check.

Notes:

• If the hard disk configuration was changed after the last startup or the hard disk has problems, the HDD DISK

MENU will be displayed automatically after the startup splash. (Refer to page 144 for further information.)

• It is possible to display the disk configuration menu by pressing the SET button when the image shown below, that says the system check has been completed, is displayed.

Enter a user name and password.

Rotate the jog dial to select a character to be entered in the cursor position.

It is also possible to enter numbers by pressing the camera selection buttons ([1] - [10/0] for the WJ-HD316A, [1] - [9],

[0] for the WJ-HD309A).

To move the cursor, press the arrow buttons.

Use the same method to enter or edit characters attached to images. Refer to page 60 for further information.

Notes:

• The default user name and password are as follows:

User name:

ADMIN

Password:

12345

• To enhance the security, change the password for an administrator before starting to run the unit. It is recommended to change the password for an administrator periodically.

• To log out, press the LOGOUT button after confirming that the SHIFT indicator is lit.

Display a live image.

Press the SET button to display a live image.

If the authentication (login) window is displayed, enter the user name and password.

When authenticated, a live image will be displayed.

When not authenticated, the authentication (login) window will be displayed again.

Important:

The startup splash window will not be displayed on monitor 1.

CLOCK ADJUSTMENT

It is recommended to check the clock periodically and put the clock right if it shows the wrong time.

Adjust the clock when displaying a live image.

Note:

The following are the descriptions of how to adjust the clock on the SETUP MENU (Quick). Refer to page

107 for descriptions of how to adjust the clock on the

SETUP MENU (Advanced).

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

1 2 3 4

SHIFT

EL-ZOOM

OSD

DISK SELECT

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

SEQ

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

–

LISTED

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

+ xc c x z

Press the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or more.

The SETUP MENU (Quick) will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA monitor.

SETUP MENU

Quick

Display

REC & Event

Network

■

Date Format

■

Time Format

■

Time & Date

1 .

JAN .

■

Time & Date Display Position

■

Camera Title

■

Camera Title Display Position

■

Live Sequence

04 10 : 00 : 00

■

Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

■

Beep (Operation)

■

Language

DD.MMM.YY

12h

SET

L-UPPER

SETUP

R-LOWER

SETUP

AUTO

ENGLISH

LIVE

Advanced Menu

Move the cursor to "SET" and press the SET button.

The set time will be applied.

SETUP MENU

Quick

Display

REC & Event

Network

■

Date Format

■

Time Format

■

Time & Date

1 .

JAN .

■

Time & Date Display Position

■

Camera Title

■

Camera Title Display Position

■

Live Sequence

04 10 : 00 : 00

■

Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

■

Beep (Operation)

■

Language

DD.MMM.YY

12h

SET

L-UPPER

SETUP

R-LOWER

SETUP

AUTO

ENGLISH

LIVE

Advanced Menu

Press the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or more.

The SETUP MENU (Quick) will disappear and a live image will be displayed.

Important:

Recording will stop for around 4 seconds just after setting the clock.

Move the cursor to "Time & Date" using the arrows button (

C D A B

), and set the time

(Day, Month, Year, Time) using the jog dial.

SETUP MENU

Quick

Display

REC & Event

Network

■

Date Format

■

Time Format

■

Time & Date

1 .

JAN .

DD.MMM.YY

12h

■

Camera Title

■

Live Sequence

04 10

Time & Date Display Position

Camera Title Display Position

■

Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

■

Beep (Operation)

■

Language

SET

L-UPPER

SETUP

R-LOWER

SETUP

AUTO

ENGLISH

LIVE

Advanced Menu

SHUTDOWN

To shutdown the unit, do the following.

When recording is being performed, press the REC button for 2 or more seconds. Recording will stop and the indicator on the REC button will go off.

When playback is being performed, press the STOP button.

Playback will stop and the indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will go off.

Turn off the power of the unit after confirming that the HDD1 and HDD2 indicators are off.

Important:

• Detach the plug from the outlet if not operating the unit for a length of time.

• When the unit has not been used for a certain period, turn on the power of the unit (approximately once a week), and perform recording/playback to prevent interferences with functions.

RECORDING (Manual Recording)

Do the following to record manually.

Refer to a system administrator about the required settings for manual recording.

When recording with higher priority than manual recording is performed, manual recording will not be performed until this recording finishes.

Refer to the following about the recording mode.

z x

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SHIFT

1 2 3

SEQ

OSD

8 5

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

SET

BUSY

–

REV FWD

+ z

Start recording.

Press the REC button to start recording.

The indicator on the button will light and recording will start.

Images from all the connected cameras will be recorded with the default setting.

It is possible to record only images displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA monitor by changing the settings.

Stop recording.

Press the REC button down for around 2 seconds.

The indicator on the button will go off and recording will stop.

Notes:

316

• The camera selection button will light orange (currently recording) or blue (currently being recorded and displayed on the monitor) to indicate which camera is being recorded.

• When recording with other recording modes being performed, the indicator on the REC button will not go off even though the REC button is pressed to stop manual recording.

• Manual recording will be stopped for a camera channel when the supply of the video input signals to the camera channel is stopped. When the supply of the video input signals to the camera channel is resumed, manual recording will be performed automatically.

●

Recording Mode and Priority

There are 4 recording modes as follows.

Recording Mode

Emergency Recording

Event Recording

Manual Recording

Schedule Recording

Description Priority

Start recording manually using an external switch at an emergency event occurrence Highest

Recording will be performed automatically at an event occurrence 1

Start and stop recording manually

Recording will be performed automatically with a designated start/stop time and date

*1: Priorities on the above table are the default settings. (Emergency recording is the highest priority.)

*2: Priorities for manual recording, schedule recording and event recording can be changed. Refer to a system administrator about the settings.

RECORDING (Emergency Recording)

Record manually using an external switch at an emergency event occurrence.

For example, install an external switch at the reception counter, and start recording with it when a suspicious individual appears.

Refer to a system administrator about the required settings for emergency recording.

• When starting emergency recording while another recording with a different recording mode (except event recording) is being performed, the indicator on the REC button will remain lit and the other recording will resume after the emergency recording has finished.

ALARM

SUSPEND

OPERATE

TIMER

ERROR

ALARM

RESET

HDD 1

HDD 2

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SHIFT

1 2 3

SEQ

OSD

8 5

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

–

SET

BUSY x z

Press the external switch.

The indicator on the REC button will light and recording will start.

With the default setting, recording will be performed for 10 seconds.

Emergency recording is the highest priority. Emergency recording will be performed even when this unit is recording in other recording modes.

●

Recording duration of emergency recording

Recording duration of emergency recording can be set as follows. Refer to a system administrator for further information.

Parameter Recording Duration

1 s - 10 s

20 s

30 s

Record for the selected time (1 - 10 seconds, can be set in 1 second intervals)

Record for 20 seconds

Record for 30 seconds

316

Record for the selected time (1 -10 minutes can be set in 1 minute intervals)

20 min - 60 min Record for the selected time (20 - 60 min-

MANUAL utes, can be set in 10 minutes intervals)

Record only while the external switch is

CONTINUE being pressed down

(Record for at least 8 seconds)

Record until the ALARM RESET button is pressed x

Stop recording.

When the recording duration set in advance has passed, recording will stop automatically.

With the default setting, recording will stop automatically after recording for 10 seconds.

When "CONTINUE" is selected for "Recording Time" of

"Emergency REC" on the SETUP MENU (Recording), press the ALARM RESET button to stop recording.

The indicator on the REC button will go off and recording will stop.

Notes:

• The camera selection button will light orange (currently recording) or blue (currently being recorded and displayed on the monitor) to indicate which camera is being recorded.

PLAYBACK

It is possible to play recorded images without stopping recording.

The playback images will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA monitor.

[WJ-HD316A]

z c x

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SHIFT

1 2 3 4

SEQ

OSD

8 5

DISK SELECT

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

EL-ZOOM

13 14 15

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

–

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

[WJ-HD309A]

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SHIFT SEQ

1 2

TEXT

OSD

DISK SELECT

COPY

MARK

EL-ZOOM LOGOUT

0 c x

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

–

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

+ x

Start playback.

Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will light and the recorded images of the selected camera will be played.

First playback after login:

The latest recorded image will be played.

With the default setting, playback will start 5 seconds before the start time of the latest recorded image. The start time can be selected from the following:

5 s/10 s/30 s/1 min/5 min

Refer to a system administrator about the settings.

Other than those above:

Playback will start from the end point of the recorded image played last time.

Stop playback.

Press the STOP button.

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will go off and playback will be stopped.

Live images will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA monitor.

Select the camera respective to the recorded images to be played. (Go to step 2 if not necessary)

Press the desired camera selection button.

The pressed camera selection button will light green or blue and the respective live images will be displayed.

●

Available functions during playback

Pause

PLAY PAUSE

Pressing the PLAY/PAUSE button to pause playback. While pausing, the indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will blink.

Pressing this button again will resume playback.

Single frame skip

–

REV FWD

Rotating the jog dial during pause will skip to the next or previous frame.

Rotating the jog dial clockwise will skip to the next frame and rotating it counterclockwise will skip to the previous frame.

Fast forward/Fast reverse

Hold playback speed

–

REV FWD

Rotating the shuttle ring will change the playback speed (1/2x, 1x, 2x,

5x, 10x, 20x) according to rotated degree. When the shuttle ring is held in the 20x position (rotated to the end) for 5 seconds, the playback speed will be 50x. When the shuttle ring is held 5 more seconds after the playback speed became 50x, the playback speed will be

100x.

Rotating the shuttle ring clockwise will play images at a faster speed and rotating it counterclockwise will play images in reverse at a faster speed.

To play at normal speed, release the shuttle ring.

Press the SET button while holding the rotated shuttle ring to hold a desired playback speed. (Playback speed will be held even though the shuttle ring is released.)

To return to the normal playback speed, press the SET button.

+

SET

Skip

Play the latest recorded image

Multi-screen display

(For the WJ-HD316A)

(For the WJ-HD309A)

–

PAN/

TILT

SHIFT +

REV FWD

GOTO

LAST

Rotating the jog dial during playback will skip to the next or previous recorded image.

Rotating the jog dial clockwise will skip to the start time of the next recording and start playback, and rotating it counterclockwise will skip to the start time of the previous one. (Rotating the jog dial counterclockwise at a point shortly after the start time of the recording will skip to the start time of the previous recording).

If there is no next or previous recorded image, current playback will continue.

Press the GO TO LAST button to play the latest recorded image.

When the GO TO LAST button is pressed for 2 seconds or more while displaying live images, playback of the latest recorded images will start.

When the GO TO LAST button is pressed during recoding, it may happen that playback starts from not the latest recording time.

It is possible to display recorded images in multi-screen format

(4/7/9/10/13/16 for the WJ-HD316A, 4/7/9 for the WJ-HD309A).

q Press the SHIFT button. The SHIFT indicator will light.

w Press a camera selection button (1 - 6 for the WJ-HD316A, 1 - 3 for the WJ-HD309A) to select a desired multi-screen.

Camera selection button 1: 4-split screen

Camera selection button 2: 7-split screen

Camera selection button 3: 9-split screen

Camera selection button 4: 16-split screen (Only for the WJ-

HD316A)

Camera selection button 5: 10-split screen (Only for the WJ-

HD316A)

Camera selection button 6: 13-split screen (Only for the WJ-

HD316A) e To display recorded images on a single screen, press the SHIFT button again.

After the SHIFT indicator goes off, press the camera selection button.

Marking

(For the WJ-HD316A)

SHIFT

(For the WJ-HD309A)

SHIFT

MARK

Text display

(For the WJ-HD316A)

SHIFT

(For the WJ-HD309A)

SHIFT

A - B repeat playback

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

+ TEXT

It is possible to play from a marked point. Do the following to mark a desired point.

1. Press the SHIFT button. The SHIFT indicator will light.

2. Press the camera selection button 12 (9 for the WJ-HD309A) (MARK) at a desired point to be marked during playback.

Up to 100 points can be marked. When more than 100 points are marked, the older marked points will be overwritten by the newer marked points. In this case, the oldest marked point is the first to be overwritten.

When marked while displaying in multi-screen, the same number of split screens will be counted as marked points. (When a point is marked while displaying a 16-split screen, 16 points will be marked simultaneously.)

It is possible to display text information attached to a recorded image during playback.

Text display is available only when playing on a single screen.

q Pause playback.

w Press the SHIFT button. The SHIFT indicator will light.

e Press the camera selection button 11 (5 for the WJ-HD309A) (TEXT).

It is possible to play recorded images between two designated points repeatedly.

q Designate a start point (A) by pressing the A - B REPEAT button during playback.

The A - B REPEAT indicator will light, and the time of point A will be displayed.

Blink: During the A-B repeat playback

Light: When designating a start point (A)

Time of point A

To cancel the designated point, press the SETUP/ESC button.

w Designate an end point (B) by pressing the A - B REPEAT button during playback.

When the start point and the end point are set, the A - B REPEAT indicator will start blinking.

Playback between point A and B will start and keep playing repeatedly.

The time of point A and B will be displayed during playback.

Time of point A and B e Press the A - B REPEAT button during A - B repeat playback to return to normal playback.

Note:

When the clock of the unit has been changed by editing the time and date settings or by the auto time adjustment function, overlapping of the time ranges of the images recorded before and after the time adjustment could occur.

In this case, the A-B repeat playback may not function properly.

Notes:

• Playback will be paused if the playback time caught up with the recording time (present time) when recording and playback are performed simultaneously.

• When playing images recorded at a high recording rate, unsteady playback speed and audio break-up may occur.

• A black screen may sometimes be displayed during fast playback/fast reverse playback. This is a normal operation.

PLAYBACK IMAGE ON A DESIGNATED DISK

Images from a camera will be recorded on the built-in hard disk or external recording devices (DVD-RAM drive, DVD-R drive or CD-R drive) connected to this unit.

Available disk areas are as follows.

Note:

External recording devices can be used as a copy area for images recorded on the hard disk. It is impossible to record images on the external recording devices directly.

HDD Normal Recording Area/Event Recording Area:

Recording area in the built-in hard disk of this unit.

Recorded images by manual recording (page 21) or event recording will be stored in this area. There are 3 ways to search for a recorded image and play it when

"HDD normal area" or "event recording area" is selected as the recording area.

• Search for a recording event and play it (Recording event search) (page 29)

• Search for a motion detected time and date from the recorded images and play it (VMD search)

(page 37)

• Search for a marked point and play it (Marking search) (page 42)

HDD Copy Area:

Recording area in the built-in hard disk of this unit. Recorded images will be copied in this area.

There are 2 ways to search for a recorded image and play it when "HDD copy area" is selected as the recording area.

• Search for a recording event and play it (Recording event search) (page 29)

• Search for a motion detected time and date from the recorded images and play it (VMD search)

(page 37)

COPY 1/COPY 2:

Recording area in the external recording device (DVD-RAM disk, DVD-R disk, CD-R disk) connected to the COPY 1 port or the COPY 2 port of the unit. Recorded images will be copied in this area.

To search for a copied recorded image when "COPY 1" or "COPY 2" is selected as the recording area.

• Search for copied recorded images (Copy Data

Search) (page 33)

Built-in hard disk

Normal recording area

Event recording area

Copy area

Recording area for manual recording and schedule recording

Recording area for event recording and emergency recording

Recording area for copying

Notes:

• Playback images will be displayed only on monitor 2 and the VGA monitor.

• Playback can be performed during recording.

• When a pre-recording area is created in an optional extension unit, it is possible to play the images recorded on the pre-recording area.

• Disk space size of each recording area differs depending on the settings.

Refer to a system administrator for further information.

[WJ-HD316A]

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

1 2 3 4

SHIFT

5 6

SEQ

OSD

DISK SELECT

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

EL-ZOOM

13 14 15

LOGOUT

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

–

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

+ z x

[WJ-HD309A]

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SHIFT

1 2 3

SEQ

TEXT

OSD

DISK SELECT

COPY

MARK

EL-ZOOM LOGOUT

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

SET

BUSY

–

REV FWD

+ z x z

Press the SHIFT button.

The SHIFT indicator will light.

Press the camera selection button 9 (7 for the

WJ-HD309A) (DISK SELECT).

The DISK SELECT window will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA monitor.

DISK SELECT

HDD NORMAL/EVENT AREA

HDD COPY AREA

COPY 1

COPY 2

OK CANCEL

n b

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SHIFT

1 2 3

SEQ

OSD

8 5

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

SET

BUSY

–

REV FWD

+ c cv cv c

Select a disk to be played using the jog dial and move the cursor to "OK" using the arrows button. Press the SET button to determine the selection.

DISK SELECT

HDD NORMAL/EVENT AREA

HDD COPY AREA

COPY 1

COPY 2

OK CANCEL

When "HDD NORMAL/EVENT AREA" or "HDD COPY AREA" is selected, the recording event list window will be displayed. (Refer to page 29 for further information about the recording event list window.)

When "COPY 1" or "COPY 2" is selected, the copy data list window will be displayed. (Refer to page 33 for further information about the copy data list window.)

To close the DISK SELECT window, move the cursor to select "CANCEL" and press the SET button.

Important:

In the following cases, the recording event list window/copy data list window will not be displayed even when you move the cursor to "OK" and press the

SET button after selecting any of "HDD COPY AREA",

"COPY 1" or "COPY 2":

• When another user has selected the same area

• When copying is being performed manually in the same area using a PC via a network v

Rotate the jog dial to select a desired recorded image to be played.

TIME&DATE CAMERA REC EVENT

TIME&DATE

20.AUG.04 3:04:23 PM

20.AUG.04 3:01:24 PM

20.AUG.04 3:00:40 PM

20.AUG.04 3:00:00 PM

20.AUG.04 2:59:11 PM

20.AUG.04 2:45:45 PM

20.AUG.04 2:44:09 PM

20.AUG.04 2:33:16 PM

TEXT

CAM REC EVT

01ch

MANUAL

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

ABCDEFGHIJ

20.AUG.04 3:22:10 AM 20.AUG.04 2:31:18 AM TOTAL

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

100

TIME&DATE CAMERA REC EVENT

TIME&DATE

20.AUG.04 3:00:00 PM

19.AUG.04 2:29:00 PM

TEXT

CAM REC EVT

01ch

MANUAL

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

ABCDEFGHIJ

TOTAL --

COPY DATA

316 Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to play the selected recorded image.

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will light and playback will start.

Notes:

• When "COPY 1" or "COPY 2" is selected, audio will not be heard.

• When "COPY1" or "COPY2" is selected, the reload speed of recorded images may become slow during playback of images recorded at a high recording rate.

To stop playback, press the STOP button.

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will go off and playback will stop.

Live images will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA monitor.

Note:

Pressing the PLAY/PAUSE button after stopping playback will start playback from the end point of the recorded image played last time.

PLAYBACK FROM A DESIGNATED TIME AND DATE

Note:

This feature is available only when "HDD NORMAL/

EVENT AREA" or "HDD COPY AREA" is selected with the DISK SELECT window. When "COPY 1" or "COPY 2" is selected, this feature is not available. Refer to page

26 for further information about the DISK SELECT window.

It is possible to play recorded images from a designated time and date without stopping recording.

Playback images will be displayed on monitor 2 and the

VGA monitor.

v c

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

–

LISTED

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

+ z x x c

Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will light and start playback from the entered time and date.

If there is no recorded image after the entered time:

When there are images recorded after the entered time, the oldest recorded image after the entered time will be played.

When there are no images recorded after the entered time, the newest recorded image before the entered time will be played.

Press the STOP button.

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will go off and stop playback.

Live images will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA monitor.

316 Press the SEARCH button repeatedly until the time and date designation window is displayed.

The time and date designation window will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA monitor.

START

JAN

12 : 00 : 00 AM

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

Enter the start time using the jog dial and the arrows button.

Select the time and date using the jog dial. To move the cursor, use the arrows button (A B).

START

FEB

12 : 00 : 00 AM

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

SEARCH AND PLAY

There are 3 ways to search for a recorded image and play it when "HDD NORMAL/EVENT AREA" or "HDD COPY AREA" is selected with the DISK SELECT window.

• Search for a recording event and play it (Recording event search) (see below)

• Search for a motion detected time and date from the recorded images and play it (VMD search) (page 37)

• Search for a marked point and play it (Marking search) (page 42)

When "COPY 1" or "COPY 2" is selected with the DISK SELECT window, the following is available.

• Search for copied recorded images (Copy Data Search) (page 33)

Note:

Playback images will be displayed on a single screen on monitor 2 and the VGA monitor. To play in a multi-screen, switch to a multi-screen after starting playback.

■

Search for a Recording Event and Play it (Recording Event Search)

Note:

This feature is available only when "HDD NORMAL/EVENT AREA" or "HDD COPY AREA" is selected with the DISK

SELECT window. When "COPY 1" or "COPY 2" is selected, this feature is not available. Refer to page 26 for further information about the DISK SELECT window.

Display a list or a thumbnail of recording events, and select the desired recording event from them to play it.

It is possible to search using the following filters:

Search Filters

TIME & DATE

CAMERA

REC EVENT

Search for only images recorded in the entered time range.

Search for only recorded images from the selected camera channel.

Search for only images recorded in the selected recording mode.

It is possible to search for images recorded in the following recording modes:

EMERGENCY: Emergency recording (Refer to page 22.)

VMD: Event recording performed when motion was detected.

TERMINAL: Event recording performed when a terminal alarm was detected.

COMMAND: Event recording performed when a command alarm was detected.

VIDEO LOSS: Event recording performed when video loss occurred.

MANUAL: Manual recording (Refer to page 21.)

SCHEDULE: Schedule recording (Refer to page 120.)

Search for only images recorded with text information.

TEXT

●

Recording Event List Window

Search filter buttons

Filter cancel button

Recording event

Camera channel

Time and date

Time range of the listed data

TIME&DATE CAMERA REC EVENT

TIME&DATE

20.AUG.04 3:04:23 PM

20.AUG.04 3:01:24 PM

20.AUG.04 3:00:40 PM

20.AUG.04 3:00:00 PM

20.AUG.04 2:59:11 PM

20.AUG.04 2:45:45 PM

20.AUG.04 2:44:09 PM

20.AUG.04 2:33:16 PM

TEXT

CAM REC EVT

01ch

MANUAL

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

ABCDEFGHIJ

20.AUG.04 3:22:10 AM 20.AUG.04 2:31:18 AM TOTAL

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

Text information

Number of the listed data

Search information

Search filter buttons:

Filter cancel button:

Time and date:

Camera channel:

Recording event:

Text information:

Time range of the listed data:

Number of the listed data:

Search information:

Selects the search filter

Cancels the selected search filter and lists all recording events

The time when recording started will be displayed.

The time when motion was detected will be displayed.

The time when the point was marked will be displayed.

The camera channel of the recorded image will be displayed. The recorded image of the displayed camera channel will be played on a single screen.

The recording mode will be displayed.

The first several characters of text information will be displayed if the image has text information.

The time range of the listed data will be displayed.

The number of the listed data will be displayed.

The search filter will be displayed. (A filter of the currently displayed list will be displayed in orange.)

●

Recording Event Thumbnail Window

Time and date

Camera channel/Recording event

Number of the listed data

Time and date:

Number of the listed data:

The time when recording started will be displayed.

The time when motion was detected will be displayed.

The time when the point was marked will be displayed.

Camera channel/Recording event:

The camera channel of the recorded image will be displayed. The recorded image of the displayed camera channel will be played on a single screen. The recording mode also will be displayed.

The number of the listed data will be displayed.

Notes:

• Some images displayed in the thumbnail window may not match with their respective displayed recorded time due to playing of compressed recorded images.

• When the clock of the unit has been changed by editing the time and date settings or by the auto time adjustment function, overlapping of the time ranges of the images recorded before and after the time adjustment could occur. In this case, the thumbnail display may not function properly.

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

1 2 3 4

SHIFT

5 6

SEQ

OSD

DISK SELECT

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

EL-ZOOM

13 14

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

–

LISTED

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

+ z z x x z

Press the SEARCH button repeatedly until the recording event list window is displayed.

TIME&DATE CAMERA REC EVENT

TIME&DATE

20.AUG.04 3:04:23 PM

20.AUG.04 3:01:24 PM

20.AUG.04 3:00:40 PM

20.AUG.04 3:00:00 PM

20.AUG.04 2:59:11 PM

20.AUG.04 2:45:45 PM

20.AUG.04 2:44:09 PM

20.AUG.04 2:33:16 PM

TEXT

CAM REC EVT

01ch

MANUAL

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

ABCDEFGHIJ

20.AUG.04 3:22:10 AM 20.AUG.04 2:31:18 AM TOTAL

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

100

The recording event list window will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA monitor.

Use the arrows button (C D) to switch between displaying the list window and the thumbnail window alternately.

To search using a search filter, go to step 4.

Use the arrows button (

A B

) to select a search filter (TIME & DATE, CAMERA, REC EVENT,

TEXT), and press the SET button.

316

TIME&DATE CAMERA REC EVENT

TIME&DATE

20.AUG.04 3:04:23 PM

20.AUG.04 3:01:24 PM

20.AUG.04 3:00:40 PM

20.AUG.04 3:00:00 PM

20.AUG.04 2:59:11 PM

20.AUG.04 2:45:45 PM

20.AUG.04 2:44:09 PM

20.AUG.04 2:33:16 PM

TEXT

CAM REC EVT

01ch

MANUAL

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

ABCDEFGHIJ

20.AUG.04 3:22:10 AM 20.AUG.04 2:31:18 AM TOTAL

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

100

When a search filter is selected, the respective search filter window will be displayed.

Select "UNLOCK FILTER" and press the SET button to cancel the selected filter.

Refer to page 29 about search filters.

TIME&DATE CAMERA REC EVENT

TIME&DATE

20.AUG.04 3:04:23 PM

20.AUG.04 3:01:24 PM

20.AUG.04 3:00:40 PM

20.AUG.04 3:00:00 PM

20.AUG.04 2:59:11 PM

20.AUG.04 2:45:45 PM

20.AUG.04 2:44:09 PM

20.AUG.04 2:33:16 PM

TEXT

CAM REC EVT

01ch

MANUAL

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

ABCDEFGHIJ

20.AUG.04 3:22:10 AM 20.AUG.04 2:31:18 AM TOTAL

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

100

<List window>

<Thumbnail window>

32 b

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

1 2 3 4

SHIFT

EL-ZOOM

OSD

DISK SELECT

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

SEQ

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

–

LISTED

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

+ c c c c v c

Filter recording events.

Filter recording events by time and date

■

TIME&DATE FILTERING

START

JAN

END

JAN

12 : 00

SET : [SET] CANCEL : [ESC]

Move the cursor using the arrows button and rotate the jog dial to enter the time and date.

Press the SET button to determine the entered time and date.

The recording event in the entered time range will be listed and displayed.

Filter recording events by camera channel

CAMERA FILTERING

CAMERA

SET : [ SET ] CANCEL : [ ESC ]

Select camera channel numbers (1 - 16 for the WJ-

HD316A, 1 - 9 for the WJ-HD309A) using the arrows button to move the cursor, and rotate the jog dial to apply filtering.

It is possible to select camera channels using the camera selection buttons [1] - [16] for the WJ-HD316A ([1] - [9] for the WJ-HD309A).

The selected camera channels will turn white.

Press the SET button to determine the selection of camera channel numbers.

The recording events of the selected camera channels will be listed.

Note:

When operating the system controller, select a camera channel using the numeric keypad. In this case, it is impossible to select 10 CH to 16 CH.

Filter recording events by the recording event

316

REC EVENT FILTERING

EMERGENCY

VMD

TERMINAL

COMMAND

VIDEO LOSS

MANUAL

SCHEDULE

OFF

SET : [ SET ] CANCEL : [ ESC ]

Move the cursor to select the recording event (refer to page

29) using the arrows button (C D) and rotate the jog dial to

ON.

Press the SET button to determine the selection.

The recording events of the selected filter will be listed.

Filter recording events by text information

TEXT FILTERING

WITHOUT TEXT

SET : [ SET ] CANCEL : [ ESC ]

Rotate the jog dial to select OFF, WITH TEXT or WITHOUT

TEXT.

Press the SET button to determine the selection.

The recording events filtered by the selected filter will be listed.

Rotate the jog dial to select the recording event to be played.

TIME&DATE CAMERA REC EVENT

TIME&DATE

20.AUG.04 3:04:23 PM

20.AUG.04 3:01:24 PM

20.AUG.04 3:00:40 PM

20.AUG.04 3:00:00 PM

20.AUG.04 2:59:11 PM

20.AUG.04 2:45:45 PM

20.AUG.04 2:44:09 PM

20.AUG.04 2:33:16 PM

TEXT

CAM REC EVT

01ch

MANUAL

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

ABCDEFGHIJ

20.AUG.04 3:22:10 AM 20.AUG.04 2:31:18 AM TOTAL 12345

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

It is possible to turn the page by rotating the shuttle ring.

Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.

The LISTED indicator and the indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will light and playback of the selected recording event will start.

Note:

When the LISTED indicator is lit, only listed recording events are available to be played. Press the LISTED button during playback to make all recording events available to be played.

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

1 2 3 4

SHIFT

5 6

SEQ

OSD

DISK SELECT

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

EL-ZOOM

13 14

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

–

LISTED

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

Important:

In the recording event list, the start time of recording will be displayed.

When events occurred successively, the contents of the event log and the recording event list will not always match since the unit continues to record the first occurring event.

316 To stop playback, press the STOP button.

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will go off and playback will be stopped.

Live images will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA monitor.

■

Search for Copied Recorded Images (Copy Data Search)

Note:

This feature is available only when "COPY 1" or "COPY 2" is selected with the DISK SELECT window. When "HDD NOR-

MAL/EVENT AREA" or "HDD COPY AREA" is selected, this feature is not available. Refer to page 26 for further information about the DISK SELECT window.

Display a list or a thumbnail of copied recorded images (Copy Data), and select the desired copy data file from them.

It is possible to search using the following filters:

Search Filters

TIME & DATE

CAMERA

Search for only images recorded in the entered time range.

Search for only recorded images from the selected camera channel.

●

Copy Data List Window

Camera channel

Time and date

Search filter buttons:

Filter cancel button:

Time and date:

Camera channel:

Search filter buttons

Filter cancel button

TIME&DATE CAMERA REC EVENT

TIME&DATE

20.AUG.04 3:04:23 PM

20.AUG.04 3:01:24 PM

20.AUG.04 3:00:40 PM

20.AUG.04 3:00:00 PM

20.AUG.04 2:59:11 PM

20.AUG.04 2:45:45 PM

20.AUG.04 2:44:09 PM

20.AUG.04 2:33:16 PM

TEXT

CAM REC EVT

01ch

MANUAL

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

ABCDEFGHIJ

20.AUG.04 3:22:10 AM 20.AUG.04 2:31:18 AM TOTAL

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

Number of the listed data

(Always "--" is displayed.)

Selects the search filter

Cancels the selected search filter and lists all copy data file

The time when recording of the source of the copied recorded images had started will be displayed.

The camera channel of the copy data file will be displayed. The recorded image of the displayed camera channel will be played on a single screen.

●

Copy Data Thumbnail Window

Time and date

Camera channel

Number of listed data

(Always "--" is displayed.)

Time and date:

Camera channel:

The time when copying of the recorded images had started will be displayed.

The camera channel of the copy data file will be displayed. The recorded image of the displayed camera channel will be played on a single screen. The recording mode also will be displayed.

Notes:

• Some images displayed in the thumbnail window may not match with their respective displayed recorded time due to playing of compressed recorded images.

• When no image file was found for the searched time and date, the displayed time and date on the list/thumbnail window may not matchthe start time of the recorded images to be played.

• If the copy completion is not performed for the CD-R/DVD-R disk, it is impossible to search/play copied recorded images on the CD-R/DVD-R disk.

Refer to page 54 for further information about the copy completion.

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

1 2 3 4

SHIFT

5 6

SEQ

OSD

DISK SELECT

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

EL-ZOOM

13 14

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

–

LISTED

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

+ z z x x z

Press the SEARCH button repeatedly until the copy data file list window is displayed.

TIME&DATE CAMERA REC EVENT

TIME&DATE

20.AUG.04 3:00:00 PM

19.AUG.04 2:29:00 PM

TEXT

CAM REC EVT

01ch

MANUAL

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

ABCDEFGHIJ

TOTAL --

COPY DATA

The copy data file list window will be displayed on monitor

2 and the VGA monitor.

Use the arrows button (C D) to switch between displaying the list window and the thumbnail window alternately.

To search using a search filter, go to step 4.

TIME&DATE CAMERA REC EVENT

TIME&DATE

20.AUG.04 3:00:00 PM

19.AUG.04 2:29:00 PM

TEXT

CAM REC EVT

01ch

MANUAL

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

ABCDEFGHIJ

TOTAL --

COPY DATA

<List window>

Use the arrows button (

A B

) to select a search filter (TIME & DATE, CAMERA), and press the

SET button.

316

TIME&DATE CAMERA REC EVENT

TIME&DATE

20.AUG.04 3:00:00 PM

19.AUG.04 2:29:00 PM

TEXT

CAM REC EVT

01ch

MANUAL

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

ABCDEFGHIJ

TOTAL --

COPY DATA

When a search filter is selected, the respective search filter window will be displayed.

Select "UNLOCK FILTER" and press the SET button to cancel the selected filter.

Refer to page 29 about search filters.

<Thumbnail window>

36 n b

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

1 2 3 4

SHIFT

EL-ZOOM

OSD

DISK SELECT

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

SEQ

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

–

LISTED

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

+ c c c c v c

Filter copy data files.

Filter copy data files by time and date

■

TIME&DATE FILTERING

START

JAN

END

JAN

12 : 00

SET : [SET] CANCEL : [ESC]

Move the cursor using the arrows button and rotate the jog dial to enter the time and date.

Press the SET button to determine the entered time and date.

The copy data file in the entered time range will be listed and displayed.

Filter copy data files by camera channel

CAMERA FILTERING

CAMERA

SET : [ SET ] CANCEL : [ ESC ]

Select camera channel numbers (1 - 16 for the WJ-

HD316A, 1 - 9 for the WJ-HD309A) using the arrows button to move the cursor, and rotate the jog dial to apply filtering.

It is possible to select camera channels using the camera selection buttons [1] - [16] for the WJ-HD316A ([1] - [9] for the WJ-HD309A).

The selected camera channels will turn white.

Press the SET button to determine the selection of camera channel numbers.

The recording events of the selected camera channels will be listed.

Note:

When operating the system controller, select a camera channel using the numeric keypad. In this case, it is impossible to select 10 CH to 16 CH.

Rotate the jog dial to select the recording event to be played.

316

TIME&DATE CAMERA REC EVENT

TIME&DATE

20.AUG.04 3:00:00 PM

19.AUG.04 2:29:00 PM

TEXT

CAM REC EVT

01ch

MANUAL

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

ABCDEFGHIJ

TOTAL --

COPY DATA

It is possible to turn the page by rotating the shuttle ring.

Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.

The LISTED indicator and the indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will light and playback of the selected recording event will start.

To stop playback, press the STOP button.

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will go off and playback will be stopped.

Live images will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA monitor.

■

Search for a motion detected time and date from the recorded images and play it (VMD search)

Note:

This feature is available only when "HDD NORMAL/

EVENT AREA" or "HDD COPY AREA" is selected with the DISK SELECT window. When "COPY 1" or "COPY 2" is selected, this feature is not available. Refer to page

26 for further information about the DISK SELECT window.

Search for a motion detected time and date from all the images recorded in all the recording modes, and display a list or a thumbnail of the results.

Select a time and date displayed on the result list or thumbnail to play it.

It is possible to filter by camera channel, time and date, detection area or search mode, to list the time and date of events that were recorded when motion was detected.

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

1 2 3 4

SHIFT

5 6

SEQ

OSD

DISK SELECT

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

EL-ZOOM

13 14

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

–

LISTED

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

+ z

316

The result list of the VMD search will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA monitor.

(The list in the displayed window is of the results of the previous search.)

Use the arrows button (C D) to switch between displaying the list window and the thumbnail window alternately.

VMD SEARCH

TIME&DATE

20.AUG.04 3:07:28 PM

20.AUG.04 3:07:27 PM

20.AUG.04 3:07:26 PM

20.AUG.04 3:07:24 PM

20.AUG.04 3:07:22 PM

20.AUG.04 3:07:21 PM

20.AUG.04 3:07:20 PM

20.AUG.04 3:07:19 PM

CAM

01ch

20.AUG.04 3:07:28 AM 20.AUG.04 3:00:00 AM TOTAL

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

200

<List window>

Press the SEARCH button repeatedly until the

VMD search list is displayed.

VMD SEARCH

TIME&DATE

20.AUG.04 3:07:28 PM

20.AUG.04 3:07:27 PM

20.AUG.04 3:07:26 PM

20.AUG.04 3:07:24 PM

20.AUG.04 3:07:22 PM

20.AUG.04 3:07:21 PM

20.AUG.04 3:07:20 PM

20.AUG.04 3:07:19 PM

CAM

01ch

20.AUG.04 3:07:28 AM 20.AUG.04 3:00:00 AM TOTAL

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

200

<Thumbnail window>

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

1 2 3 4

SHIFT

EL-ZOOM

OSD

DISK SELECT

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

SEQ

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

–

LISTED

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

+ cn xvn cb x

Press the SET button.

■

SELECT CAMERA & DATE

CAMERA

CAM1

START

1 .

JAN .

END

1 .

JAN .

12 : 00 AM

00 AM

SET : [SET] SEARCH : [PLAY] CANCEL : [ESC]

The VMD search window will be displayed.

Enter a camera channel number and time range on the

VMD search window for the VMD search.

To search using the same conditions as the previous search, press the PLAY/PAUSE button.

Go to step 13 when the VMD search is performed and a list of the results is displayed after the PLAY/PAUSE button is pressed. c

Move the cursor using the arrows button and rotate the jog dial to enter the camera channel number and time range for the VMD search.

■

SELECT CAMERA & DATE

CAMERA

CAM1

START

1 .

JAN .

END

1 .

JAN .

12 : 00 AM

SET : [SET] SEARCH : [PLAY] CANCEL : [ESC]

The motion detection area setup window will be displayed.

To search using the same conditions as the previous search, press the PLAY/PAUSE button.

Go to step 13 when the VMD search is performed and a list of the results is displayed after the PLAY/PAUSE button is

Note:

If no image was recorded in the time range set in step 3, the motion detection area setup window will not be displayed when the SET button is pressed.

Rotate the jog dial to select "SETUP AREA" on the status bar.

Note:

It is possible to set all displayed areas as motion detection areas by pressing the SET button after selecting "ALL AREAS".

Move the cross cursor using the arrows button to a point to be determined as the start point of the motion detection area.

Press the SET button to determine the selected point as the start point of the motion detection area.

Press the SET button.

⁄1

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SHIFT

1 2 3

SEQ

OSD

8 5

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

SET

BUSY

–

REV FWD

+ m.

m,⁄2 ,⁄0⁄2 m

Move the cross cursor using the arrows button to a point to be determined as the end point of the motion detection area.

316

Press the SET button to determine the selected point as the end point of the motion detection area.

It is possible to set up to 4 motion detection areas by repeating steps 6 and 7.

Press the SET button after selecting "SENSI-

TIVITY" by rotating the jog dial.

Move the cross cursor to the motion detection area to apply the sensitivity using the arrows button (

D C A B

).

⁄0

Select the sensitivity using the jog dial from the following.

OFF:

Motion will not be detected

LOW:

Low sensitivity

MID:

Standard sensitivity

HIGH:

High sensitivity

Note:

Depending on the set positions of each motion detection area, the sensitivity parameters for the motion detection areas may be displayed overlapped with each other.

⁄1

After completing the sensitivity settings for the detection areas by repeating steps 9 and 10, press the SETUP/ESC button.

⁄2

Press the SET button after selecting "VMD

MODE" by rotating the jog dial.

Notes:

• Depending on the set positions of the detection areas, the sensitivity indications of the detection areas may be displayed overlapping each other.

• Depending on the set position of the detection area, a part of the sensitivity indication of the detection area may not be displayed.

⁄8 ⁄5⁄7 ⁄4

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SHIFT

1 2 3

SEQ

OSD

8 5

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

–

LISTED

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

⁄3 ⁄3⁄5 ⁄3 ⁄6

⁄3

Move the cursor to select a detection mode using the arrow buttons and rotate the jog dial to check the radio button next to the selected detection mode. Press the SET button to determine the selection.

■

VMD SEARCH

ANY AREA

MASKING DURATION

VECTOR

A 20s B 20s C 20s

DURATION

A 20s B 20s C 20s

D 20s

SET : [SETUP/ESC] SEARCH : [PLAY]

24h

Refer to page 41 for further information about each of the detection modes.

<ANY AREA mode>

Move the cursor to the parameter box using the arrows button (C) to select a masking duration from the following.

1 s/1 min/1 h/24 h

<VECTOR mode>

Move the cursor to an area for the settings of VECTOR using the arrows button (C) and rotate the jog dial to select an area. Move the cursor to the parameter box of the selected area using the arrows button (B) to select an interval time for an object moving between each area from the following.

–/5 s/10 s/20 s/30 s/40 s/50 s/1 min

<DURATION mode>

Move the cursor to the parameter box of each area using the arrows button (B) and rotate the jog dial to select a moving duration for an object in each area from the following.

0 s/5 s/10 s/20 s/30 s/40 s/50 s/1 min

⁄4

After setting the detection mode, press the

SETUP/ESC button.

316

⁄5

After selecting "EXIT" by rotating the jog dial, press the SET button or the PLAY/PAUSE button to start searching and display the results of the VMD search.

Notes:

• Up to 200 results will be displayed. (When 200 results are listed, searching will stop.)

• It may take some time until the search results are displayed.

• It is possible to stop searching by pressing the STOP button.

⁄6

Rotate the jog dial to select a result to be displayed.

VMD SEARCH

TIME&DATE

20.AUG.04 3:07:28 PM

20.AUG.04 3:07:27 PM

20.AUG.04 3:07:26 PM

20.AUG.04 3:07:24 PM

20.AUG.04 3:07:22 PM

20.AUG.04 3:07:21 PM

20.AUG.04 3:07:20 PM

20.AUG.04 3:07:19 PM

CAM

01ch

20.AUG.04 3:07:28 AM 20.AUG.04 3:00:00 AM TOTAL

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

200

It is possible to turn the page by rotating the shuttle ring.

⁄7

Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to start playback.

The LISTED indicator and the indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will light and playback of the selected recording will start.

Note:

It is possible to skip from the playback point to the listed time (motion detected time) by rotating the jog dial when the LISTED indicator is lit.

To return to normal playback, press the LISTED button.

⁄8

Press the STOP button to stop playback.

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will go off and playback will be stopped.

Live images will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA monitor.

●

To delete the motion detection area

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

1 2 3 4

SHIFT

5 6

SEQ

OSD

DISK SELECT

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

EL-ZOOM

13 14

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

SET

BUSY

–

REV FWD

+ x zx z z

Rotate the jog dial to select "DELETE AREA" on the status bar.

Any motion will be detected anywhere in the A, B, C, D areas.

Note:

In the ANY AREA mode, it is possible to set the masking duration. When the masking duration is set, motion will be ignored for a certain period (set duration as the masking duration) in the same area. It is convenient to set the masking duration to make the subject

316

period shorter in case it is necessary to search an extended time range or when searching through many results.

<VECTOR mode>

It will be subject to listing if an object moves within the set time to the other detection areas in the set order.

The following is an example.

10 s

20 s

10 s

Note:

To delete all the motion detection areas, select

"DELETE ALL AREA" and press the SET button.

Move the cursor to the motion detection area to be deleted using the arrows button and press the SET button.

The selected area will be deleted.

●

Detection Mode

Set how to detect motion in the set motion detection area.

There are 3 detection modes as follows:

Note:

It is impossible to set two or more detection modes simultaneously.

<ANY AREA mode>

It will be subject to listing if "motion" is detected in any of the set motion detection areas.

Motion is detected in area B within 10 seconds after being detected in area A.

Motion is detected in area C within 20 seconds after being detected in area B.

Motion is detected in area D within 10 seconds after being detected in area C.

When all of the above have occurred, an event action will be performed.

<DURATION mode>

It will be subject to listing if an object keeps moving for the set period in the detection area. For example, in case of the following settings; 10 sec. for areas A and B, 20 sec. for area C and 30 sec. for area D:

An event action will be performed when an object keeps moving longer than the set period in the specified detection area.

10 s

20 s

30 s

Important:

• When images to be searched are recorded with a low recording rate, the DURATION mode may not work correctly.

• It may take some time to search according to the contents of the recorded images.

■

Search for a marked point and play from that point (Marking search)

Display the recording time of the recorded images with a marked point in a list or a thumbnail and select the desired recording time to play. Refer to page 25 for further information about marking.

Note:

Marking search is available only when "HDD normal area" or "event recording area" is selected as the recording area with the DISK SELECT window.

v c z

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

1 2 3 4

SHIFT

EL-ZOOM

OSD

DISK SELECT

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

SEQ

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

–

LISTED

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

+ z x x z

Press the SEARCH button repeatedly until the marking list window is displayed.

TIME&DATE

20.AUG.04 4:39:38 PM

20.AUG.04 4:31:01 PM

20.AUG.04 4:17:35 PM

20.AUG.04 3:30:01 PM

20.AUG.04 3:00:05 PM

20.AUG.04 2:45:18 PM

20.AUG.04 2:40:31 PM

20.AUG.04 2:35:31 PM

CAM REC EVT

01ch

TEXT

20.AUG.04 4:39:38 PM 20.AUG.04 2:31:22 PM TOTAL

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

100

The result list of the marking search will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA monitor.

Use the arrows button (C D) to switch between displaying the list window and the thumbnail window alternately.

TIME&DATE

20.AUG.04 4:39:38 PM

20.AUG.04 4:31:01 PM

20.AUG.04 4:17:35 PM

20.AUG.04 3:30:01 PM

20.AUG.04 3:00:05 PM

20.AUG.04 2:45:18 PM

20.AUG.04 2:40:31 PM

20.AUG.04 2:35:31 PM

CAM REC EVT

01ch

TEXT

20.AUG.04 4:39:38 PM 20.AUG.04 2:31:22 PM TOTAL

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

100

To delete all displayed marking lists, press the camera selection buttons [1] and [2] simultaneously for 2 seconds or more when displaying the marking list window.

Rotate the jog dial or the shuttle ring to select the desired marked time.

316

TIME&DATE

20.AUG.04 4:39:38 PM

20.AUG.04 4:31:01 PM

20.AUG.04 4:17:35 PM

20.AUG.04 3:30:01 PM

20.AUG.04 3:00:05 PM

20.AUG.04 2:45:18 PM

20.AUG.04 2:40:31 PM

20.AUG.04 2:35:31 PM

CAM REC EVT

01ch

TEXT

20.AUG.04 4:39:38 PM 20.AUG.04 2:31:22 PM TOTAL

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

100

Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.

The LISTED indicator and the indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will light, and playback of a recorded image from the selected marked time will start.

Notes:

• It is possible to skip from the playback point to the listed time (marked time) by rotating the jog dial when the

LISTED indicator is lit.

To return to normal playback, press the LISTED button.

• It is possible that some recorded images with marked points may have been deleted by overwrite recording or the delete function.

Press the STOP button.

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will go off and playback will be stopped.

Live images will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA monitor.

MONITOR LIVE IMAGES

It is possible to display live images on a single screen or a multi-screen, or on a single sequential display (Displayed images from cameras on a single screen will be automatically switched.).

■

Displaying Live Images on a

Single Screen

[WJ-HD316A]

z x

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SHIFT

1 2 3 4

SEQ

OSD

8 5

DISK SELECT

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

EL-ZOOM

13 14 15

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

–

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

[WJ-HD309A]

z x

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

EL-ZOOM

1 2

SHIFT SEQ

TEXT

OSD

DISK SELECT

COPY

MARK

LOGOUT

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

SET

BUSY

–

REV FWD

+ z

Press the MONITOR1/MONITOR2 button to select the monitor.

When monitor 1 is selected, the indicator will light.

When monitor 2 or the VGA monitor is selected, the indicator will not light.

Press a camera selection button

(1 - 16 for the WJ-HD316A, 1 - 9 for the WJ-

HD309A) to select a camera.

Live images from the selected camera will be displayed and the respective camera selection button will light green or blue.

When monitor 2 is selected, live images will be displayed on the VGA monitor.

Notes:

• When live images from the audio assigned camera channel (audio is assigned on the SETUP MENU:

"Recording" - "REC Setup" - "Audio Allocation") are displayed on a single screen, audio from the respective camera channel will be heard.

• When the GO TO LAST button is pressed for 2 seconds or more while displaying live images, playback of the latest recorded images will start. (At the default setting, playback will start from 30 seconds before the start time of the latest recorded images.)

●

Electronic Zoom

When displaying a single screen, zooming in on the displayed image is possible.

Electronic zoom is available only on the selected monitor.

When the MONITOR1/MONITOR2 indicator is lit (the monitor 1 is selected), electronic zoom works only on monitor 1.

[WJ-HD316A]

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

1 2 3 4

SHIFT

5 6

SEQ

OSD

DISK SELECT

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

EL-ZOOM

13 14 15

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

–

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

+ z x

[WJ-HD309A]

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SHIFT

1 2 3

SEQ

TEXT

OSD

DISK SELECT

COPY

MARK

EL-ZOOM

LOGOUT

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

–

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

+ z x z

Press the SHIFT button when monitoring live images on a single screen.

The SHIFT indicator will light.

44 x

Press the EL-ZOOM button to enlarge the displayed image.

The displayed image will be displayed with x2 zoomed size.

Zooming level will change each time the EL-ZOOM button is pressed.

→ x4 → OFF

Notes:

• When an image is zoomed in on (x2 or x4), it is possible to move the zoomed image using the arrows button.

• When any indicator of PAN/TILT, ZOOM/FOCUS, IRIS,

PRESET/AUTO is lit, it is impossible to use the EL-

ZOOM function.

■

Displaying on a Multi-screen

It is possible to display images on a multi-screen (4, 7, 9,

10, 13, 16 for the WJ-HD316A, 4, 7, 9 for the WJ-HD309A).

Notes:

• Audio will not be heard when displaying images on a multiscreen.

[WJ-HD316A]

z c

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SHIFT

1 2 3 4

SEQ

OSD

8 5

DISK SELECT

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

EL-ZOOM

13 14 15

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

–

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

2 x

[WJ-HD309A]

z c

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SHIFT

1 2

SEQ

TEXT

OSD

DISK SELECT

COPY

MARK

EL-ZOOM

LOGOUT

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

–

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

+ x z

Press the MONITOR1/MONITOR2 button to select the monitor.

When monitor 1 is selected, the indicator will light.

When monitor 2 is selected, the indicator will not light.

Press the SHIFT button.

The SHIFT indicator will light.

Press a camera selection button 1 - 6 (1 - 3 for the WJ-HD309A) to select a desired multiscreen.

Camera selection button 1: 4-split screen

Camera selection button 2: 7-split screen

Camera selection button 3: 9-split screen

Camera selection button 4: 16-split screen (Only for the WJ-

HD316A)

Camera selection button 5: 10-split screen (Only for the WJ-

HD316A)

Camera selection button 6: 13-split screen (Only for the WJ-

HD316A)

The camera selection buttons respective to the live images displayed on a multi-screen will light green or blue.

When monitor 2 is selected in step 1, live images will also be displayed on the selected multi-screen on the VGA monitor.

To display on a single screen

Press the SHIFT button. The SHIFT indicator will go off.

Press any of the camera selection buttons.

Live images will be displayed on a single screen.

When displaying on a 4-split screen

Each time the camera selection button 1 is pressed, the displayed camera channels will be changed as follows:

WJ-HD316A: 1-4 CH

→ 5-8 CH → 9-12 CH → 13-16 CH

WJ-HD309A: 1-4 CH

→ 5-8 CH → 9 CH

When displaying on a 9-split screen

Each time the camera selection button 3 is pressed, the displayed camera channels will be changed as follows:

Only for the WJ-HD316A: 1-9 CH

→ 10-16 CH

■

Sequential Display

Displayed images from cameras will be switched automatically.

Camera images will be displayed sequentially according to the settings performed in advance.

[WJ-HD316A]

z c

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SHIFT

1 2 3 4

SEQ

OSD

8 5

DISK SELECT

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

EL-ZOOM

13 14 15

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

SET

BUSY

–

REV FWD

+ x

[WJ-HD309A]

z c

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

1 2 3

SHIFT SEQ

TEXT

OSD

DISK SELECT

COPY

MARK

EL-ZOOM LOGOUT

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

–

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

+ x z

Press the MONITOR1/MONITOR2 button to select the monitor.

When monitor 1 is selected, the indicator will light.

When monitor 2 is selected, the indicator will not light.

Press the SHIFT button.

The SHIFT indicator will light.

Press the SEQ button.

The camera selection button respective to the displayed image will light green or blue.

To stop sequential display, press the SEQ button.

When trying to display on a single screen or multi-screen during the sequential display, the sequential display will be stopped.

When monitor 2 is selected in step 1, the sequential display will also start on the VGA monitor.

Notes:

• It is possible to skip a sequential step (camera channel) if no video input is supplied (Auto skip function). Refer to a system administrator for further information.

• Cameras that are out of the controllable range set by the camera partitioning function will be skipped. Refer to the Network Setup Instructions (PDF) for further information about the camera partitioning.

CONTROL CAMERAS

When displaying live images, the following camera controls are possible.

• Panning/Tilting: Moves a camera horizontally/vertically.

• Zooming: Zooms in/out on images.

• Focus:

• Iris:

Adjusts the focus.

Adjusts the iris of the lens.

• Preset Action: Moves a camera to the preset position registered in advance.

• Auto Function: Moves a camera with an auto function set in advance.

Notes:

• Controlling cameras is possible only when displaying images on a single screen.

• Depending on models of the connected cameras, it may be impossible to control the camera or some functions may not be available.

• When a user with higher priority is controlling the selected camera, it may be impossible to control the camera.

Refer to page 67 for further information about priority.

• Refer to page 140 for descriptions of how to display and perform the settings with the settings menu of the camera from this unit.

■

Zooming

Zooms in/out on images. Depending on models of the connected cameras, the image size for the respective zooming level may be different. For further information, refer to the operating instruction for the camera.

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SHIFT

1 2 3

SEQ

OSD

8 5

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

–

LISTED

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

+ c z x

316 Press the ZOOM/FOCUS button.

The ZOOM/FOCUS indicator will light.

Use the arrows button (

) to zoom in on or out of the displayed image.

Press the arrows button downward (C) to zoom out and upward (D) to zoom in.

Press the camera selection button ([1] - [16] for the WJ-HD316A, [1] - [9] for the WJ-HD309A) respective to the controlled camera channel to quit the zooming operation.

■

Panning/Tilting

Moves a camera horizontally/vertically.

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SHIFT

1 2 3

SEQ

OSD

8 5

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

–

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

+ c z x x z

Press the PAN/TILT button.

The PAN/TILT indicator will light.

Use the arrows button to adjust the vertical or horizontal position.

Camera will move slowly by pressing the arrows button while holding the PAN/TILT SLOW button down.

Press the camera selection button ([1] - [16] for the WJ-HD316A, [1] - [9] for the WJ-HD309A) respective to the controlled camera channel to quit the panning/tilting operation.

■

Focus

Adjusts the focus. The auto focus function is available.

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SHIFT

1 2 3

SEQ

OSD

8 5

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

–

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

+ c z x x z

Press the FOCUS button.

The ZOOM/FOCUS indicator will light.

316 Use the arrows button (

A B

) to adjust the focus.

Press the arrows button (A) to shift the focus nearer.

Press the arrows button (B) to shift the focus farther.

Auto focus is available by pressing the SET button.

Press the camera selection button ([1] - [16] for the WJ-HD316A, [1] - [9] for the WJ-HD309A) respective to the controlled camera channel to quit the focusing operation.

■

Iris

Adjusts the iris of the lens.

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SHIFT

SEQ

DISK SELECT

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

EL-ZOOM

13 14

LOGOUT

OSD

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

SET

BUSY

–

REV FWD

+ c z x x z

Press the IRIS button.

The IRIS indicator will light.

Use the arrows button (

A B

) to adjust the iris.

Press the arrows button (A) to close the iris.

Press the arrows button (B) to open the iris.

To reset the set iris, press the SET button.

Press the camera selection button ([1] - [16] for the WJ-HD316A, [1] - [9] for the WJ-HD309A) respective to the controlled camera channel to quit the iris operation.

■

Preset Action

Moves a camera to the preset position registered in advance.

Important:

• When using a camera of the WV-CS650 (WV-CSR650) series or the WV-CS600 (WV-CSR600) series, register preset positions using the settings menu of the camera.

• When the monitor 1 is selected, it is impossible to register preset positions and move a camera to a preset position by performing the following steps.

In this case, perform the settings using the setup menu of camera.

●

Register Preset Positions of Cameras

Up to 256 preset positions can be registered.

[WJ-HD316A]

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

316

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SHIFT

1 2 3 4

SEQ

OSD

8 5

DISK SELECT

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

EL-ZOOM

13 14 15

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

SET

BUSY

–

REV FWD

+ z z x

[WJ-HD309A]

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SHIFT

1 2 3

SEQ

TEXT

OSD

DISK SELECT

COPY

MARK

EL-ZOOM LOGOUT

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

–

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

+ z z x z

Press the PAN/TILT button and move the camera to a desired position to be registered as a preset position.

Press the SET button. The REGISTRATION

PRESET POSITION window will be displayed.

REGISTRATION PRESET POSITION

PRESET NUMBER

OK CANCEL

[WJ-HD316A]

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

1 2 3 4

SHIFT

5 6

SEQ

OSD

DISK SELECT

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

EL-ZOOM

13 14 15

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

–

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

+ v v c c

[WJ-HD309A]

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SHIFT

1 2 3

SEQ

TEXT

OSD

DISK SELECT

COPY

MARK

EL-ZOOM LOGOUT

0 c

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

–

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

+ v v c c

Press a camera selection button

([1] - [10/0] for the WJ-HD316A, [1] - [9], [0] for the WJ-HD309A) to register a preset position number.

The pressed button number will be registered as a preset position number.

The jog dial also can be used to select a preset position number by rotating it.

Up to 256 can be registered as preset position numbers.

Select "OK" using the arrows button and press the SET button.

The adjusted camera position (currently displayed on the monitor) will be registered as a preset position with the selected preset position number.

To cancel the selected preset position, select "CANCEL" using the arrows button and press the SET button. The setting will be canceled and the REGISTRATION PRESET

POSITION window will be closed.

●

Move a camera to the preset position

[WJ-HD316A]

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SHIFT

1 2 3 4

SEQ

OSD

8 5

DISK SELECT

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

EL-ZOOM

13 14 15

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

–

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

2 x

[WJ-HD309A]

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

EL-ZOOM

1 2

SHIFT SEQ

TEXT

OSD

DISK SELECT

COPY

MARK

LOGOUT

0 x z c c x

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

–

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

+ z c c x z

Press the PRESET/AUTO button.

The PRESET/AUTO indicator will light and the PRESET/

AUTO PAN window will be displayed.

Press a camera selection button

([1] - [10/0] for the WJ-HD316A, [1] - [9], [0] for the WJ-HD309A) to select a desired preset position.

Pressing the camera selection button [10/0] ([0] for the WJ-

HD309A) moves a camera to the home position.

The jog dial can also be used to select a preset position number by rotating it.

PRESET / AUTO PAN

PRESET

PRESET NUMBER

AUTO PAN

CANCEL

Select "OK" using the arrows button and press the SET button.

The PRESET/AUTO PAN window will be closed and the camera will move to the selected preset position.

(It is also possible to close the PRESET/AUTO PAN window and move the camera to the selected preset position by pressing the SET button when the cursor is on "PRESET

NUMBER".)

When selecting "CANCEL" using the arrows button and press the SET button, the PRESET/AUTO PAN window will be closed.

Note:

Refer to the operating instructions of the camera for further information about the auto function of the camera in use.

■

Auto Function (Auto Pan, etc)

Moves a camera with an auto function set in advance.

Important:

When monitor 1 is selected, it is impossible to move a camera with an auto function by performing the following steps.

In this case, perform the settings using the setup menu of camera.

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SHIFT

SEQ

DISK SELECT

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

EL-ZOOM

13 14

LOGOUT

OSD

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

SET

BUSY

–

REV FWD

+ z xc c x

316 Press the PRESET/AUTO button.

The PRESET/AUTO indicator will light and the PRESET/

AUTO PAN window will be displayed.

Move the cursor to "AUTO PAN" using the arrows button and check the radio button next to "AUTO PAN" using the jog dial.

PRESET / AUTO PAN

PRESET

PRESET NUMBER

AUTO PAN

CANCEL

Select "OK" using the arrows button and press the SET button.

The PRESET/AUTO PAN window will be closed and auto function will start.

During auto function, it is impossible to register a preset position. To close the PRESET/AUTO PAN window, select

"CANCEL" using the arrows button and press the SET button. The setting will be canceled and the PRESET/AUTO

PAN window will be closed.

ABOUT THE EVENT FUNCTION

The event action will be performed when the following events occur.

•

Motion detection:

When motion is detected by the motion detection function (see below), this is stated as an event of motion detection.

•

Video Loss:

When a video signal supply is stopped because of a cable disconnection or malfunction of a camera, this is stated as an event of video loss.

•

Terminal alarm:

When a signal is supplied from an external device such as a door sensor to the ALARM terminal, this is stated as an event of the terminal alarm.

•

Command alarm:

When a command alarm is supplied from a PC connected to the SERIAL connector on the rear panel of this unit, this is stated as an event of the command alarm.

About the Motion Detection Function (VMD)

An alarm signal will be supplied when motion (luminance transition) is detected in a designated area. It is possible to save images recorded in the place where motion is detected, or send e-mails when motion is detected.

Refer to a system administrator for further information about the required settings for the motion detection function such as the settings of the detection area.

■

Action at an event occurrence

The event action will be performed according to the settings when an event occurs.

There are 2 event action modes, the alarm mode (ALARM) and the activity detection mode (ACT DET), for each event type. The event action will be different according to the event action mode set.

When an event of the alarm mode (ALARM) occurs, this unit activates the alarm action.

About the event action mode

●

Alarm Mode (ALARM)

This mode announces an event occurrence outside. Action taken in the alarm mode is referred to as the alarm action.

●

Activity Detection Mode (ACT DET)

This mode records images in the place where an event occurred without announcing it.

●

OFF

Only recording the event log is applicable. Any other event actions are not applicable.

Event Action

Alarm

Mode

✓

Start recording.

Displays event information on the monitor.

Blinks the alarm indicator.

✓

Sounds the buzzer.

* Switches from a displayed image to the image from the location of the alarm occurrence.

* Moves a camera to the preset position.

* Announces an event occurrence by sending e-mails.

✓

* Announces an event occurrence by the

PS·Data/Serial (RS232C) commands.

Supplies a signal from the

ALARM connector or the

ALARM/CONTROL connector on the rear panel of this unit (Alarm signal output).

✓

Records the event log.

✓

* Transmits images to an

FTP server.

✓

✓ : Applicable

– : Not applicable

Activity

Detection Mode

✓

–

✓

–

✓

–

OFF

–

✓

–

* : Available only when using a PC via a network (Refer to the Network Setup Instructions (PDF) for further information.)

Alarm Function

●

Blinks the ALARM indicator on the front panel

ALARM

SUSPEND

OPERATE

TIMER

ERROR

ALARM

RESET

HDD 1

HDD 2

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SHIFT

1 2

SEQ

TEXT

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

●

Displays the event information in the alarm display area on monitor 1 and the camera title display area on monitor 2

<Monitor 1>

●

Switches from the images displayed on monitor 1 and monitor 2 to the images from the location of the alarm occurrence (on a single screen)

<Monitor 2>

●

Sounds the buzzer

Contact a system administrator about sounding duration.

●

Announces an event occurrence to the connected system device (Alarm Output)

Sends a signal to the device connected to the

ALARM/CONTROL connector, and the connected device such as a buzzer will be activated.

●

Starts recording automatically

Starts recording the image from the location of the event occurrence automatically.

●

Moves a camera to the preset position

A camera will move to the preset position registered in advance.

●

Announces an event occurrence by sending e-mails

E-mails will be sent to addresses registered in advance.

Refer to the Network Operating Instructions (PDF) on the provided CD-ROM.

■

Cancel the Alarm Action

When an alarm has occurred, this unit will start the alarm action according to the selected alarm action mode.

To cancel the alarm action, press the ALARM RESET button.

When "ON" is selected for "Alarm Auto Reset" (on the "Alarm

Setup" menu of "Event"), the following will be performed automatically even if the alarm action is not canceled by pressing the ALARM RESET button on the front panel.

• The ALARM indicator will stop blinking and light steadily

• The displayed alarm information will disappear

• The buzzer will stop beeping

ALARM

SUSPEND

OPERATE

TIMER

ERROR

ALARM

RESET

HDD 1

HDD 2

STOP PLAY

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SHIFT

1 2 3 4

SEQ

OSD

8 5

DISK SELECT

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

EL-ZOOM

13 14 15

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SEA

LISTED

BUSY z z

Press the ALARM RESET button to cancel the alarm actions.

The ALARM indicator will go off.

Note:

When the alarm is canceled, the event action will stop.

■

Suspend the Alarm Actions

It is possible to suspend (deactivate temporarily) the alarm actions even when an event has occurred.

This function will be useful when it is necessary not to activate the alarm actions for a certain period, such as when configuring the system. However, images and event logs will be recorded even when alarm actions are suspended.

TIMER

ERROR

ALARM

RESET

HDD 1

HDD 2

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

1 2 3 4

SHIFT

5 6

SEQ

OSD

DISK SELECT

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

EL-ZOOM

13 14

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

SET

BUSY

–

REV FW zx zx

●

To suspend (deactivate temporarily) the alarm actions

Press both the ALARM RESET button and the

SET button at the same time.

The ALARM SUSPEND indicator will light.

●

To stop suspending the alarm actions

Press both the ALARM RESET button and the

SET button at the same time again.

The ALARM SUSPEND indicator will go off.

Note:

When an external switch is connected to the

ALARM/CONTROL connector on the rear panel, it is possible to suspend the alarm actions using the external switch.

In this case, the alarm actions will be suspended when the external switch is on.

To stop suspending the alarm actions, set the external switch to off.

316

COPYING (Duplicate)

It is possible to copy (duplicate) manually the images recorded on the disk area selected with the DISK SELECT window (page 26) to the HDD copy area or the external recording device (DVD-RAM disk, DVD-R disk, CD-R disk) connected to the unit.

It is recommended to make back-up copies on a regular basis for unexpected situations such as malfunction of the hard disk.

Manual copy is available during the following.

• While displaying live images

• While pausing playback of recorded images

• When displaying a search window (Recording event list window, VMD search list window, Marking list window)

(Manual copy is not available when a thumbnail window is displayed.)

Notes:

• The auto copy function is available for copying recorded images to the DVD-RAM disk automatically. When the auto copy function is enabled, manual copy is not available. Refer to a system administrator for further information about the auto copy function.

• To copy during playback of recorded images, pause the playback temporarily.

• To copy recorded images on the DVD-RAM disk, formatting (initializing) the DVD-RAM disk is required in advance. Refer to page 57 for the descriptions of how to format DVD-RAM disks.

• Copy time may differ depending on the size of the recorded image. It may take longer to copy images recorded in higher quality and resolution even when selecting the same number of cameras and designating the same recording duration.

[WJ-HD316A]

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

1 2 3 4

SHIFT

5 6

SEQ

OSD

DISK SELECT

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

EL-ZOOM

13 14 15

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

SET

BUSY

–

REV FWD

+ z x

[WJ-HD309A]

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SHIFT

1 2 3

SEQ

TEXT

OSD

DISK SELECT

COPY

MARK

EL-ZOOM LOGOUT

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

–

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

+ z x z

Press the SHIFT button.

The SHIFT indicator will light.

To copy recorded images during playback, pause the playback temporarily.

Press the COPY button.

DATA COPY

CAMERA

PERIOD

AUG

COPY DRIVE

HDD COPY AREA

Alter Detect

13 14

COPY1

6 7

3 : 00 PM

3 : 30 PM

COPY2

OFF

OK CANCEL

The DATA COPY window will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA monitor.

The DATA COPY window will not be displayed when a thumbnail window is displayed.

In this case, display a list window using the arrows button

(C D).

Notes:

• When the auto copy function is enabled, the DATA

COPY window will not be displayed.

• The copy cancel window will be displayed if the user who started manual copy presses the COPY button during the manual copy. (It is impossible to stop manual copy performed by other users.)

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

1 2 3 4

SHIFT

EL-ZOOM

OSD

DISK SELECT

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

SEQ

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

–

LISTED

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

+ cvcv v c

Perform the settings for data copy (camera channel, time range, the disk on which images are to be copied). Move the cursor to each setting item using the arrows button and select a parameter by rotating the jog dial. (It is possible to change only the CAMERA parameter settings by pressing the SET button.)

Notes:

• Time range to be set for "PERIOD" should be 99 minutes and 59 seconds or less to copy images for one attempt. (Copying will stop automatically when the size of the copied data reaches 4 GB even before the end time of the set time range.)

• When "COPY 1" or "COPY 2" is selected for "COPY

DRIVE", it is possible to detect alteration using the viewer software by checking the "ALTER DETECT" checkbox.

Select the "OK" button using the arrows button and press the SET button.

The DATA COPY window will be closed and data copy will start.

The copy icon will be displayed on the task bar during copying.

To close the DATA COPY window, select "CANCEL" using the arrows button and press the SET button. The setting will be canceled and the DATA COPY window will be closed.

<To eject the disk of COPY1>

Confirm the SHIFT indicator is lit. Then, press the COPY button and [1] simultaneously for 2 seconds or more.

316

<To eject the disk of COPY2>

Confirm the SHIFT indicator is lit. Then, press the COPY button and [2] simultaneously for 2 seconds or more.

• Copying will be performed in the following order:

Viewer Software

→ Images → Audio

Depending on the set time range for "PERIOD", some of images and audio may not be copied.

• Use the viewer software to play the copied images.

Refer to the Network Operating Instructions (PDF) for descriptions of how to play the copied images.

Copy icon

In the following cases, copying will not start even when you move the cursor to "OK" and press the SET button:

• When another user has selected the desired copy drive

• When copying is being performed manually

Important:

• To eject the disk, do the following operation (copy completion) while live images are displayed before pressing the eject button of the external recording device.

DELETE DATA ON THE DISK

Perform the settings for the built-in hard disk of the unit, the optional extension unit and the DVD-RAM disk. These are the descriptions of how to delete recorded images on the hard disk and how to format a DVD-RAM disk.

Refer to a system administrator for further information about the other disks.

■

Deletion of recorded images saved on the hard disk manually

Delete recorded images saved in the normal area or the event area of the built-in hard disk or the optional extension unit manually.

By setting a time and date, images in the normal record area of the hard disk recorded before the set time and date will be deleted.

Manually delete unwanted images on the hard disk.

Important:

• It is impossible to recover the deleted images.

• When "STOP" is selected for "Disk End Mode", the available disk space will not be increased even though deletion is performed.

Note:

It is possible to delete recorded images automatically when the set days have passed from the day the image was recorded (Auto Delete). Refer to a system administrator for further information.

SETUP MENU

Quick

Display

REC & Event

Network

■

Date Format

■

Time Format

■

Time & Date

1 .

JAN .

■

Time & Date Display Position

■

Camera Title

■

Camera Title Display Position

■

Live Sequence

04 10 : 00 : 00

■

Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

■

Beep (Operation)

■

Language

DD.MMM.YY

12h

SET

L-UPPER

SETUP

R-LOWER

SETUP

AUTO

ENGLISH

LIVE

Advanced Menu

Move the cursor to "Advanced Menu" using the arrows button (

C D

) and press the SET button.

The SETUP MENU (Advanced) will be displayed.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Basic Setup

Time & Date

User Regist.

User Edit

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Quick Menu

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

■

ADMIN Password

*****

■

PSD User

ADMIN

■

Auto Login

Auto Login User

ADMIN

■

Auto Logout

■

Priority

■

"GO TO LAST" before

■

Language

■

Beep(Operation)

■

Buzzer(Error)

■

Shutdown Time

■

Auto Copy

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

LIVE

OFF

Follow the priority.

ENGLISH

10s

OFF

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

1 2 3 4

SHIFT

5 6

SEQ

DISK SELECT

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

EL-ZOOM

13 14

LOGOUT

OSD

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

–

LISTED

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

+ xcv xc z

Press the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or more.

The SETUP MENU (Quick) will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA monitor.

When "ADVANCED" is selected for "REC Type" of "REC &

Event" on the SETUP MENU (Quick) (page 98), the top page of the SETUP MENU (Advanced) will be displayed. In this case, go to step 3.

Move the cursor to "Maintenance" using the arrows button (

C D A B

) and press the SET button.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

REC Rate

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Quick Menu

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

CAM 1

CAM 2

CAM 3

CAM 4

CAM 5

CAM 6

CAM 7

CAM 8

CAM 9

CAM 10

CAM 11

CAM 12

CAM 13

CAM 14

CAM 15

CAM 16

AUTO

MANU

AUTO

1ips

SCHE

1ips

PRE EVT POST EVT

1ips

EMR

1ips

LIVE

SUPER FINE

FINE

NORMAL

EXTENDED

Move the cursor to "Data Delete" using the arrows button (

C D

).

The "Data Delete" menu will be displayed.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

REC Rate

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

■

Auto Delete

OFF

■

Manual Delete for Normal Recording Area

Delete before 1 . . JAN .

DELETE

■

Manual Delete for Event Recording Area

Delete before 1 . . JAN . 04

DELETE

■

Disc Format of DVD

COPY1 (Rear)

COPY2 (Front)

FORMAT

LIVE

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Quick Menu

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

1 2 3 4

SHIFT

EL-ZOOM

OSD

DISK SELECT

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

SEQ

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

–

LISTED

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

+ nm, bm, n b

Press the SET button.

The cursor will be displayed on the "Data Delete" menu.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

REC Rate

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

■

Auto Delete

OFF

■

Manual Delete for Normal Recording Area

Delete before 1 .

JAN .

DELETE

■

Manual Delete for Event Recording Area

Delete before 1 .

JAN .

DELETE

■

Disc Format of DVD

COPY1 (Rear)

COPY2 (Front)

FORMAT

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Quick Menu

LIVE

Move the cursor to "Manual Delete for Normal

Recording Area" or "Manual Delete for Event

Recording Area" using the arrows button, and set time and date using the jog dial.

The images recorded until the day before the set time and date will be subject to be deleted.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

REC Rate

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

■

Auto Delete

OFF

■

Manual Delete for Normal Recording Area

Delete before 1 . JAN .

DELETE

■

Manual Delete for Event Recording Area

Delete before 1 . JAN .

DELETE

■

Disc Format of DVD

COPY1 (Rear)

COPY2 (Front)

FORMAT

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Quick Menu

LIVE

Move the cursor to "DELETE" using the arrows button and press the SET button.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

REC Rate

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

■

Auto Delete

OFF

■

Manual Delete for Normal Recording Area

Delete before 1 . JAN .

DELETE

■

Manual Delete for Event Recording Area

Delete before 1 . JAN .

DELETE

■

Disc Format of DVD

COPY1 (Rear)

COPY2 (Front)

FORMAT

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Quick Menu

LIVE

The confirmation dialog window will be displayed.

Select "OK" using the arrows button and press the SET button.

Normal recording area is going to be erased.

Are you sure?

316

To cancel delete, select "CANCEL".

CANCEL

Press the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or more.

The SETUP MENU (Advanced) will be closed and the live images will be displayed.

FORMAT (INITIALIZE) A DVD-RAM DISK

To copy (duplicate) recorded images onto the DVD-RAM disk, formatting (initializing) the DVD-RAM disk is required in advance.

To delete images recorded on the DVD-RAM disk, formatting (initializing) of the DVD-RAM disk is also required.

Important:

All data on the disk will be deleted if formatted (initialized). It is impossible to recover the deleted images.

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SHIFT

1 2 3

SEQ

OSD

8 5

DISK SELECT

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

EL-ZOOM

13 14

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

–

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

+ xcvn xcb c

Select "Maintenance" using the arrows button and press the SET button.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

REC Rate

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Quick Menu

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

CAM 1

CAM 2

CAM 3

CAM 4

CAM 5

CAM 6

CAM 7

CAM 8

CAM 9

CAM 10

CAM 11

CAM 12

CAM 13

CAM 14

CAM 15

CAM 16

AUTO

MANU

AUTO

1ips

SCHE

1ips

PRE EVT POST EVT

1ips

EMR

1ips

LIVE

SUPER FINE

FINE

NORMAL

EXTENDED

Select "Data Delete" using the arrows button

(

C D

).

316

SETUP MENU

Advanced

REC Rate

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

System Recording Event Schedule

Switcher Display Comm Maintenance

■

Auto Delete

OFF

■

Manual Delete for Normal Recording Area

Delete before 1 . . JAN .

DELETE

■

Manual Delete for Event Recording Area

Delete before 1 . . JAN . 04

DELETE

■

Disc Format of DVD

COPY1 (Rear)

COPY2 (Front)

FORMAT

LIVE

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Quick Menu

Press the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or more.

The SETUP MENU (Quick) will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA monitor.

When "ADVANCED" is selected for "REC Type" of "REC &

Event" on the SETUP MENU (Quick) (page 98), the top page of the SETUP MENU (Advanced) will be displayed. In this case, go to step 3.

SETUP MENU

Quick

Display

REC & Event

Network

■

Date Format

■

Time Format

■

Time & Date

1 .

JAN .

■

Time & Date Display Position

■

Camera Title

■

Camera Title Display Position

■

Live Sequence

04 10

■

Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

■

Beep (Operation)

■

Language

DD.MMM.YY

12h

SET

L-UPPER

SETUP

R-LOWER

SETUP

AUTO

ENGLISH

LIVE

Advanced Menu

Press the SET button.

The cursor will be displayed on the "Data Delete" menu.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

REC Rate

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

■

Auto Delete

OFF

■

Manual Delete for Normal Recording Area

Delete before 1 .

JAN .

DELETE

■

Manual Delete for Event Recording Area

Delete before 1 .

JAN .

DELETE

■

Disc Format of DVD

COPY1 (Rear)

COPY2 (Front)

FORMAT

LIVE

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Quick Menu

Select either "COPY1" or "COPY2" (port to which the DVD-RAM is connected) for "Disc

Format of DVD" using the arrows button.

Move the cursor to "Advanced Menu" using the arrows button (

C D

) and press the SET button.

The SETUP MENU (Advanced) will be displayed.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Basic Setup

Time & Date

User Regist.

User Edit

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Quick Menu

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

■

ADMIN Password

*****

■

PSD User

ADMIN

■

Auto Login

Auto Login User

ADMIN

■

Auto Logout

■

Priority

■

"GO TO LAST" before

■

Language

■

Beep(Operation)

■

Buzzer(Error)

■

Shutdown Time

■

Auto Copy

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

LIVE

OFF

Follow the priority.

ENGLISH

10s

OFF

SETUP MENU

Advanced

REC Rate

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

■

Auto Delete

OFF

■

Manual Delete for Normal Recording Area

Delete before 1 .

JAN .

DELETE

■

Manual Delete for Event Recording Area

Delete before 1 .

JAN .

DELETE

■

Disc Format of DVD

COPY1 (Rear)

COPY2 (Front)

FORMAT

LIVE

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Quick Menu

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

1 2 3 4

SHIFT

EL-ZOOM

OSD

DISK SELECT

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

SEQ

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

–

LISTED

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

, m, m

Press the SET button to select "FORMAT".

The confirmation dialog window will be displayed.

All of data in the COPY1 is going to be erased.

Starting format?

OK CANCEL

Move the cursor to "OK" using the arrows button and press the SET button to start formatting.

To stop formatting, select "CANCEL" and press the SET button.

During formatting, the status window will be displayed.

The status window will be closed automatically after completing formatting.

Press the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or more to close the SETUP MENU (Advanced).

Live images will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA monitor.

316

DISPLAY/EDIT TEXT INFORMATION

It is possible to attach text information to images when recording.

Entering 20 characters for a line (up to 10 lines, with a total of 200 characters) is possible.

These are the descriptions of how to display/edit the attached text information for images.

Note:

Displaying/editing text information is possible during the following.

• While pausing playback on a single screen

• While displaying the recording event list window

[WJ-HD316A]

cv z

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SHIFT

1 2 3 4

SEQ

OSD

8 5

DISK SELECT

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

EL-ZOOM

13 14 15

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

–

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

+ x

[WJ-HD309A]

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SHIFT

1 2 3

SEQ

TEXT

OSD

DISK SELECT

COPY

MARK

EL-ZOOM LOGOUT

0 z

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

SET

BUSY

– z

REV FWD

+ x z x

Press the SHIFT button.

The SHIFT indicator will light.

Press the TEXT button to display the TEXT

INFORMATION window.

TEXT INFORMATION

EDIT : [TEXT] SET : [SET] CANCEL : [ESC]

Text information attached to the paused playback image or text information attached to the selected recording event will be displayed.

To close the TEXT INFORMATION window, press the

SETUP/ESC button or the SET button.

Press the TEXT button again to edit text information.

TEXT INFORMATION

EXT : [TEXT]

<While playing on a single screen> Press the

PLAY/PAUSE button to stop playback.

<While displaying the recording event list window>

Select a desired recording event by rotating the jog dial.

TIME&DATE CAMERA REC EVENT

TIME&DATE

20.AUG.04 3:04:23 PM

20.AUG.04 3:01:24 PM

20.AUG.04 3:00:40 PM

20.AUG.04 3:00:00 PM

20.AUG.04 2:59:11 PM

20.AUG.04 2:45:45 PM

20.AUG.04 2:44:09 PM

20.AUG.04 2:33:16 PM

TEXT

CAM REC EVT

01ch

MANUAL

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

ABCDEFGHIJ

20.AUG.04 3:22:10 AM 20.AUG.04 2:31:18 AM TOTAL

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

100

[WJ-HD316A]

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

1 2 3 4

SHIFT

EL-ZOOM

SEQ

OSD

DISK SELECT

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

14 15

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

–

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

[WJ-HD309A]

b n b

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SHIFT

1 2 3

SEQ

TEXT

OSD

DISK SELECT

COPY

MARK

EL-ZOOM LOGOUT

0 b

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

LISTED

–

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

+ n b b

Edit text information using the arrows button and the jog dial.

• To insert a character

Move the cursor to a desired point where a character is to be inserted using the arrows button, and select a character using the jog dial.

• To delete a character

Move the cursor to a character to be deleted using the arrows button, and press the STOP button.

• To delete all characters

Press the STOP button for 2 seconds or more.

• Available characters

The following characters can be entered:

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8 9 ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | }

~ SP

Press the TEXT button after editing text.

Press the SET button to apply the edited characters.

TEXT INFORMATION

Digital Disc Recorder WJ-HD31 6

Important:

It is impossible to edit text information using the system controller.

EDIT : [TEXT] SET : [SET] CANCEL : [ESC]

To cancel the edit, press the SETUP/ESC button. The edited characters will not be applied.

ERROR/WARNINGS

• The "error" status

When a fatal error (one that might cause the system to go down) has occurred, the ERROR indicator will blink red and the error indication will be displayed on the monitor 2.

• The "warning" status

When an error (even though it has not caused the system trouble yet, but which may become a fatal error) has occurred, the ERROR indicator will blink orange.

• When the buzzer sounding duration has passed from the error occurrence or the ALARM RESET button is pressed, the error indication will disappear and the blinking ERROR indicator will light steadily. (Error half-reset)

If the error is eliminated, the ERROR indicator will go off when the ALARM RESET button is pressed while the ERROR indicator is lit. (Error reset)

At an error occurrence

ERROR indicator on the front panel

Buzzer

Error display area on the main bar

The error output (pin no.18) of the ALARM/CONTROL connector

Problem mail

Error log

Blinks

Sounds (when it has been set)

Displays

Outputs

Transmitted (When it has been set)

Filed

–

In the error half-reset condition

Lights steadily

Stops

Displays

Does not output

–

In the error reset condition

Off

Stops

Does not display

Does not output

ALT-*

Indication

Error

Status

W-ERROR

SMART

H-METER

Error

Warning

Description

Recorded image has been altered.

Playback will be paused.

Failed to write data on the HDD.

The hard disk may be malfunctioning and may not work correctly.

The set time for the HOUR METER has passed. (Refer to page 136.)

It may be reaching the end of the hard disk’s lifetime.

Solution

Press the ALARM RESET button to cancel the error status. The unit will be in the error half-reset/error reset condition.

Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to resume playback.

Press the ALARM RESET button to cancel the error status. The unit will be in the error half-reset/error reset condition.

When the "W-ERROR" indication is displayed frequently, contact the dealer to replace the hard disk drive.

Press the ALARM RESET button to cancel the warning status. The unit will be in the error half-reset/error reset condition.

Contact the dealer to replace the hard disk.

Press the ALARM RESET button to cancel the warning status. The unit will be in the error half-reset/error reset condition.

Contact the dealer to replace the hard disk.

Indication

THERMAL

Status

Warning

POWER

#-nn% (available disk space is running out)

#-FULL (no available disk space)

MEDIUM-n

REMOVE

FAN

HDD-ERROR

Warning

Error

Warning

Error

Warning

Error

Description

Thermal error of the unit or the optional extension unit has been detected.

Solution

Press the ALARM RESET button to cancel the warning status. The unit will be in the error half-reset/error reset condition.

If thermal errors occur frequently, the unit may be malfunctioning. Contact the dealer.

The power outage alert signal is supplied from the uninterruptible power supply system (UPS). Internal processing will start when the set time for "Shutdown

Time" on the "Basic Setup" menu of

"System" has passed after having received the power outage alert signal.

(Refer to page 107.) When the internal processing starts, recording will stop and all operations will be invalid.

Press the ALARM RESET button to cancel the warning status. The unit will be in the error half-reset/error reset condition.

The unit will start operation automatically after the UPS starts power supply.

The hard disk is almost full or completely full.

Press the ALARM RESET button to cancel the error/warning status. The unit will be in the error half-reset/error reset condition. Initialize or replace the hard disk.

(Refer to pages 146, 141.) When initialized, all recorded data will be deleted. It is recommended to copy the data using an external recording device.

The DVD-RAM disk is almost full or completely full.

Press the ALARM RESET button to cancel the error/warning status. The unit will be in the error half-reset/error reset condition. Initialize the DVD-RAM disk.

(Refer to page 57.) When initialized, all recorded data will be deleted.

The CD-R or DVD-R disk is almost full or completely full.

Press the ALARM RESET button to cancel the error/warning status. The unit will be in the error half-reset/error reset condition. Replace the disk with a new one.

The external recording device is not operable because no disk or different format disk has been inserted, etc.

Press the ALARM RESET button to cancel the warning status. The unit will be in the error half-reset/error reset condition.

Confirm that a disk has been inserted, or check the inserted disk format.

An error has occurred on the hard disk and the hard disk has been unmounted from the system automatically.

Consult the dealer. After replacing the hard disk, the "REMOVE" error status will be canceled.

The fan of this unit or the optional extension unit is malfunctioning. It may produce an increase in temperature in the unit and cause malfunction of the HDDs.

Press the ALARM RESET button to cancel the warning status. The unit will be in the error half-reset condition. Consult the dealer.

The designated hard disk drive was not found because of a hard disk drive error, etc.

Press the ALARM RESET button to cancel the error status. The unit will be in the error half-reset condition. Contact the dealer.

Indication

M-FAIL

R-FAIL

Error

Status Description

Failed to recover mirroring.

Failed to recover RAID.

Solution

Press the ALARM RESET button to cancel the error status. The unit will be in the error half-reset condition. Contact the dealer.

* : Camera number

# : Partition number (Refer to page 16.) nn : Available disk space (percentage) n : COPY port number to which an external recording device is connected

Note:

The available disk space warning will be given only once when the available disk space has reached the set value. Mail notification of an available disk space warning will be sent each time 1 % of the available disk space is reduced after the available disk space has reached the set value. Refer to page 137 for descriptions of how to set the available disk space

(Disk Capacity) warning. For further information about mail notification of available disk space warning, refer to the Network

Setup Instructions (PDF).

OPERATION USING A PC

It is possible to perform the settings or operate the unit using a web browser installed on a PC when this unit is connected to a network.

The available features and the system requirements of a

PC are as follows.

Refer to the Network Operating Instructions (PDF) on the provided CD-ROM.

■

Features

It is possible to operate this unit using a web browser in much the same way as using the buttons on the front panel of this unit.

The following functions are available when using a PC via a network as well as the functions operable using the buttons on the front panel of the unit.

●

Downloading/transmitting images

It is possible to download (save) the currently displayed image in the web browser window onto the hard disk of a

PC. By establishing an FTP server, it is possible to transmit images to a designated FTP server. When an event occurs, it is possible to transmit images from the camera installed in the place where the event occurred.

●

Event notification function

When an event occurs, it is possible to send e-mails to designated addresses to notify of the event occurrence. It is also possible to send an e-mail with a recorded image of the place where the event occurred.

●

Host authentication

It is possible to restrict devices from operating this unit if their IP addresses are not registered.

■

System Requirements of a PC

It is recommended to operate this unit using a PC that meets the following system requirements. If using a PC that does not meet the following system requirements, it may cause problems such as slow imaging or the browser becomes unable to operate.

OS:

One of the following operating systems:

Microsoft

Windows

2000 Professional SP4

Microsoft

Windows

XP Professional or Home Edition

SP1

PC:

IBM PC/AT Compatible

CPU:

Intel

Pentium

4, 1.4 GHz or faster

Memory:

512 MB or more

Monitor:

1024 x 768 pixels or more, HIGH color 16 bit or more

Interface:

Built-in network interface card compatible 10/100 Mbps

Recommended web browser:

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2, 6.0 SP1

Other web browsers are not compatible with this unit.

Important:

The plug-in software must be installed. The plug-in software will be downloaded and installed automatically when accessing the unit using a browser. If the plug-in software has not been downloaded/installed correctly, install it from the provided CD-ROM.

Refer to "readme.txt" on the provided CD-ROM for the descriptions of how to install it.

OPERATION OF THE UNIT IN THE CASCADE CONNECTION

When connecting multiple units (up to 4 units) in the cascade connection, it is possible to monitor images from all of the WJ-HD316A/309A in the cascade connection using a monitor. It is necessary in advance to perform the settings to operate the unit in the cascade connection. Refer to a system administrator for further information.

Important:

• Video output signal will not be supplied from the MONI-

TOR (VGA) connector when connecting the units in the cascade connection.

• When audio input signals are supplied to the AUDIO IN connectors, audio will be heard from the respective unit to the AUDIO IN connector.

Important:

This example works only when all the system controllers of the unit address 002 - 004 are the WV-CU650.

If any of the system controller of the unit address 002 -

004 is the WV-CU360C, the camera channel playing on monitor 2 using the system controller of the unit address 001 will be changed when playback operation is performed by the WV-CU360C.

To allow the system controllers of the unit address 002 -

004 to operate only monitor 1 connected to each of the unit, use the WV-CU650 for the unit address 002 - 004.

Monitor 2

PS·Data compatible system controller

(Unit Address: 001)

System Controller

■

Setup

For the unit

• Select "ON" for "Cascade" of "PS.Data Setup" on the

SETUP MENU (Advanced) ("Comm" - PS.data Setup" -

"Cascade").

• Set the unit address as follows.

WJ-HD316A/WJ-

HD309A

First unit

Second unit

Third unit

Fourth unit

Unit Address

(System)

001

002

003

004

Unit Address

(Controller)

Number except

001 - 004

(Do not allocate a number already in use.)

For the system controller

• Set the unit address as follows.

Monitor 1

ALARM

SUSPEND

OPERATE

TIMER

ERROR

ALARM

RESET

HDD 1

HDD 2

First unit

(Unit Address

(System): 001)

PULL STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

1 2 3 4

SHIFT

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

10/0

SEQ

TEXT

OSD

MARK

LOGOUT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

LISTED

SETUP

/ESC

BUSY

SET

–

REV FWD

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD A

System Controller

(Unit Address: 002)

System Controller

ALARM

SUSPEND

OPERATE

TIMER

ERROR

ALARM

RESET

HDD 1

HDD 2

Second unit

(Unit Address

(System): 002)

PULL

SHIFT

1 2

3 4

SEQ

OSD

8 5

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

LISTED

SETUP

/ESC

BUSY

SET

–

REV FWD

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD A

Third unit

(Unit Address

(System): 003)

ALARM

SUSPEND

OPERATE

TIMER

ERROR

ALARM

RESET

HDD 1

HDD 2

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SHIFT

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

2 3

COPY

10/0

SEQ

TEXT

OSD

MARK

LOGOUT

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

–

IRIS LISTED

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

PULL

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD A

System Controller

(Unit Address: 003)

System Controller

(Unit Address: 004)

System Controller

Fourth unit

(Unit Address

(System): 004)

ALARM

OPERATE

TIMER

ERROR

ALARM

RESET

HDD 1

HDD 2

SHIFT

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

SEQ

OSD

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

14 15

LOGOUT

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

LISTED

SETUP

/ESC

BUSY

SET

–

REV FWD

PULL

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD A

System controller

Controller used to operate the first unit

Controller used to operate the second unit

Controller used to operate the third unit

Controller used to operate the fourth unit

Unit Address

001

002

003

004

Note

It is possible to operate all of four units.

It is possible to operate only monitor 1 connected to the second unit.

It is possible to operate only monitor 1 connected to the third unit.

It is possible to operate only monitor 1 connected to the fourth unit.

■

Operation using the buttons on the front panel

It is possible to operate the unit using the buttons on the front panel as described on pages 19 - 54. When monitor 2 is selected, images will be displayed on monitor 2 connected to the first unit. When monitor 1 is selected, images will be displayed on monitor 1 connected to the unit currently in use.

When operating the buttons on the front panel, only live/recorded images from the cameras connected to the unit currently in use are available. It is impossible to operate live/recorded images from the cameras connected to the other units.

■

Operation using the system controllers

When using the system controller to which the unit number "001" is allocated

It is possible to operate all of the WJ-HD316A/309A in the cascade connection using an optional PS·Data compatible controller by designating a unit number. When monitor 2 is selected, it is possible to display images from any unit which will be displayed on monitor 2 connected to the first unit.

(*1)

When monitor 1 is selected, images will be displayed on monitor 1 connected to the unit currently in use. Refer to the operating instructions of the system controller for further information about the PS·Data mode operation.

*1: When the WV-CU360C is used for the unit address 001, images from the desired camera channel sometimes may not be displayed on monitor 2 connected to the first unit. In this case, select the desired camera channel first using the WV-CU360C.

When using the system controller to which the unit number "002", "003" or "004" is allocated

It is possible to operate only monitor 1 connected to any unit by designating a unit number using an optional PS-

Data compatible controller.

MANAGEMENT OF USERS/HOSTS

It is necessary in advance to register users and PCs (hosts) who access this unit via a network such as a LAN.

Up to 32 users and 8 hosts can be registered.

The following information can be registered as user information and host information.

Item

User name

Host IP address

Password

Level

Priority

Default screen

Description

Name of user who logs into this unit. Enter this in the login window.

IP address of a PC that accesses this unit.

Only PCs with registered IP addresses can access this unit if ON is selected for "Host

Authentication".

Password of user who logs into this unit. Enter this in the login window.

Level of users or hosts for operable functions.

Refer to page 110 for further information.

Priority of controllable functions. When two or more users/hosts performed the same operation, only a user/host with the highest priority can perform the operation.

Note

Item to be set only for user registration

Item to be set only for host registration

Item to be set only for user registration

Determine the priority in the following cases:

• A user tries to log in after another user has already logged in.

• A user tries to control a camera that is being controlled by another user.

Startup display to be displayed on monitor 1, monitor 2 and the VGA monitor after login.

Controllable range for each camera channel.

Camera partitioning

For the set items above, the unit will work differently depending on whether the unit is operated directly or operated via a network as follows.

●

When the unit is operated directly

Operate using the monitor connected with this unit. There are 3 ways to operate this unit as follows:

• Operate using the buttons on the front panel of the unit

• Operate using a PS·Data compatible controller

Note:

The priority setting of this unit will not be applied when controlling the cameras connected to the coaxial communication using a PS·Data compatible controller. (Post-priority will be applied.)

• Operate using a PC connected to the SERIAL connector (RS232C) on the rear panel of the unit

It is impossible to log into the unit simultaneously by the above methods (except when using the same user name to log in).

When a user tries to log in after another user has already logged into the unit, the unit will work as follows according to the setting for "Priority" of "System".

Setting for "Priority"

Follow the priority

Pre-priority

Post-priority

Description

When a user’s priority is higher than the one of the other user who has already logged in, this user can log in and the other user who has already logged in will be forced to log out.

When a user’s priority is lower than the one of the other user who has already logged in, this user cannot log in.

When another user has already logged in, any user except administrators cannot log in regardless of priority.

When an administrator has logged in, the other user who has already logged in will be forced to log out.

Any user can log in regardless of priority.

Notes:

• When a user is operating this unit using a PS·Data compatible controller, this user can log in automatically as a PSD user set for "PSD User" of "System" on the SETUP MENU.

• When a user logged into this unit using a PS·Data compatible controller and didn’t operate the unit for around 2 minutes, this PSD user will be forced to log out.

• It is possible to log in as the user who has already logged in regardless of priority.

●

When the unit is operated using a PC via a network

Operate using a PC via a network. Up to 8 hosts (PCs) can access the unit.

When a host tries to log in after 8 hosts have already logged in the unit, the unit will work as follows according to the setting for

"Priority" of "System".

Setting for "Priority"

Follow the priority

Pre-priority

Post-priority

Description

When a host’s priority is higher than the one of the other host who has already logged in, this host can log in and the other host who has already logged in will be forced to log out.

When a host’s priority is lower than the one of the other host who has already logged in, this host cannot log in.

Any host cannot log in regardless of priority. However, it is possible to log in as an administrator by operating the buttons on the front panel of the unit. In this case, users who have already logged in will be forced to log out.

Any host can log in regardless of priority.

When accessing the unit using a PC via a network, the unit will work as follows according to the setting for "User

Authentication" and "Host Authentication" of "NW Setup 1".

User/Host to log in Note Setting for "User

Authentication"

OFF

Setting for "Host

Authentication"

OFF

Log into the unit as an administrator.

Log into the unit as a registered user.

Log into the unit as a registered host.

The login window will be displayed.

The login window will not be displayed.

Log into the unit as a registered user.

It is impossible to log in for an unregistered host.

OPERATING THE UNIT FOR THE FIRST TIME

Important:

When connecting an optional extension unit (the WJ-

HDE300 series), turn on the power of the extension unit before turning on the power of this unit.

Turn on the POWER switch.

Press the SET button when the system check complete window is displayed.

The HDD DISK MENU window will be displayed.

Perform the settings with this menu according to your needs.

Refer to page 144 for further information.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

TOP MENU

FORMAT

MAIN

EXT1

EXT2

EXT3

EXT4

EXT5

EXT6

EXT7

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF REMOVE LINK RESTART

160GB

*(160GB)

160GB

*(ERROR)

ADD (160GB)

160GB

ADD (ERROR)

160GB

LOST

160GB

Information of recording areas : [SETUP/ESC] OK : [SET]

EXIT

Press the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or more.

The SETUP MENU (Quick) will be displayed.

Adjust the clock of the unit with this menu.

Refer to page 19 for further information about clock adjustment.

SETUP MENU

Quick

Display

REC & Event

Network

■

Date Format

■

Time Format

■

Time & Date

1 .

JAN .

■

Time & Date Display Position

■

Camera Title

■

Camera Title Display Position

■

Live Sequence

04 10 : 00 : 00

■

Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

■

Beep (Operation)

■

Language

DD.MMM.YY

12h

SET

L-UPPER

SETUP

R-LOWER

SETUP

AUTO

ENGLISH

LIVE

Advanced Menu

With the default setting, the unit is ready to start manual recording. Perform the settings for recordings or event actions according to your needs.

After completing the settings, press any button to close the

HDD DISK MENU.

The login window will be displayed.

When "ON" is selected for "Auto Login" of "Basic Setup" on the "System" menu, the login window will not be displayed.

(The default setting is ON.) n

Press the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or more.

The SETUP MENU (Quick) will be closed and the live images will be displayed.

Enter a user name and password.

Live images will be displayed after logging in.

Refer to page 18 for further information about the user name and password.

Notes:

• With the default setting, the disk space is set as the normal recording area. Perform the settings for each recording area according to your needs.

• The default user name and password are as follows:

User name:

ADMIN

Password:

12345

• To enhance the security, change the password for an administrator periodically.

Preparation for maintenance (HDD replacement, installation, etc.)

When maintaining (HDD replacement, installation, etc.) without turning the power of the unit off, carry out the following operation after setting the HDD SAFETY MODE to ON.

(The default setting is OFF.)

This can be set on the "Disk Info" menu of "Maintenance".

Refer to page 136 for further information.

Important:

After completing the installation or the maintenance, set the HDD SAFETY MODE to OFF.

Do the following before starting operation when maintaining

(HDD replacement, installation, etc.).

Press the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or more.

The SETUP MENU (Quick) will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA monitor.

When "ADVANCED" is selected for "REC Type" of "REC &

Event" (page 98), the SETUP MENU (Advanced) will be displayed. In this case, go to step 3.

SETUP MENU

Quick

Display

REC & Event

Network

■

Date Format

■

Time Format

■

Time & Date

1 .

JAN .

DD.MMM.YY

12h

■

Time & Date Display Position

■

Camera Title

■

Camera Title Display Position

■

Live Sequence

10 : 00 : 00 PM

SET

L-UPPER

SETUP

R-LOWER

SETUP

■

Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

■

Beep (Operation)

■

Language

AUTO

ENGLISH

LIVE

Advanced Menu

Select "Maintenance" using the arrows button

(

C D A B

) and press the SET button.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

REC Rate

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Quick Menu

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

CAM 1

CAM 2

CAM 3

CAM 4

CAM 5

CAM 6

CAM 7

CAM 8

CAM 9

CAM 10

CAM 11

CAM 12

CAM 13

CAM 14

CAM 15

CAM 16

MANU

AUTO

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

1ips

SCHE

1ips

PRE EVT

1ips

POST EVT

1ips

EMR

1ips

LIVE

SUPER FINE

FINE

NORMAL

EXTENDED

Move the cursor to "Disk Info" using the arrows button (

C D

) and press the SET button.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

REC Rate

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Quick Menu

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

1 2

MAIN 160GB 160GB

15000h 15000h

EXT7

160GB 160GB

15000h 15000h

3 4

160GB 160GB

15000h 15000h

160GB 160GB

15000h 15000h

160GB 160GB

15000h 15000h

160GB 160GB

15000h 15000h

160GB 160GB

15000h 15000h

160GB 160GB

15000h 15000h

160GB 160GB

15000h 15000h

■

Warning for Disk Life Time

HDD Safety Mode

Schedule

Maintenance

LIVE

Remaining

Normal REC Area

Event REC Area

1800GB

Copy Area

1200GB

1000GB

COPY

1 (Rear)

2 (Front)

1000GB

3000h

OFF

Move the cursor to "HDD Safety Mode" and rotate the jog dial to select "ON".

SETUP MENU

Advanced

REC Rate

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Quick Menu

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

2 3

Event

Comm

EXT5 160GB 160GB

15000h 15000h

EXT6 160GB 160GB

15000h 15000h

EXT7

160GB 160GB

15000h 15000h

■

Warning for Disk Life Time

HDD Safety Mode

160GB 160GB

15000h 15000h

160GB 160GB

15000h 15000h

160GB 160GB

15000h 15000h

160GB 160GB

15000h 15000h

160GB 160GB

15000h 15000h

160GB 160GB

15000h 15000h

160GB 160GB

15000h 15000h

Schedule

Maintenance

LIVE

Remaining

Normal REC Area 1800GB

Event REC Area

Copy Area

Copy 1 (Rear)

Copy

(Front)

1200GB

1000GB

3000h

Select "Advanced Menu" using the arrows button (

C D

) and press the SET button.

The SETUP MENU (Advanced) will be displayed.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Basic Setup

Time & Date

User Regist.

User Edit

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Quick Menu

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

■

ADMIN Password

*****

■

PSD User

ADMIN

■

Auto Login

Auto Login User

ADMIN

■

Auto Logout

■

Priority

■

"GO TO LAST" before

■

Language

■

Beep(Operation)

■

Buzzer(Error)

■

Shutdown Time

■

Auto Copy

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

LIVE

OFF

Follow the priority.

ENGLISH

10s

OFF

Press the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or more.

The SETUP MENU (Advanced) will be closed.

The unit will restart automatically and the HDD SAFETY

MODE window will be displayed.

The HDD safety mode will begin.

The camera selection buttons (1 - 16 for the WJ-HD316A, 1

- 9, 0 for the WJ-HD309A) will light green and go off (for 2 seconds each) alternately.

The following window will be displayed after around 30 seconds.

●

When replacing the built-in hard disk of the unit

Move the cursor to "REMOVE" using the arrows button and press the SET button.

The OPERATE indicator on the front panel will go off.

The power supply to the front panel will be cut and the unit will be unable to operate with the front panel.

Start maintenance after this window is displayed.

The procedures are different between the replacement of the hard disks and the installation of the unit (rack mounting/unmounting).

Refer to the following descriptions.

When the system check has been completed, the HDD

SAFETY MODE window (as shown below) will be displayed.

The camera selection buttons on the front panel (1 - 16 for the WJ-HD316A, 1 - 9, 0 for the WJ-HD309A) will light green and orange (for 2 seconds each) alternately.

Move the cursor to OFF using the arrows button and press the SET button.

Detach the cable from the front panel and start replacing the built-in hard disk.

Start from step 2 on page 141 to replace the built-in hard disk.

The OPERATE indicator on the front panel will light by attaching the cable to the front panel. The power will be supplied to the front panel and the unit will be enabled to operate with the front panel.

●

When replacing the built-in hard disk of the extension unit

Once displaying the HDD SAFETY MODE window in step 5, start replacing the built-in hard disk of the optional extension unit.

Refer to the operating instructions of the extension unit for the descriptions of how to replace the hard disk.

●

When installing/uninstalling the unit into/from the rack (rack mounting/unmounting)

Once displaying the HDD SAFETY MODE window in step 5, start installing/uninstalling the unit.

The unit will restart automatically and the system check complete window will be displayed.

When the system check complete window is displayed, carry out the procedures described on page 69 (start from x).

Important:

Detach the cable from the front panel after confirming that the OPERATE indicator on the front panel is not lit.

Otherwise, it may cause malfunction.

INSTALLATIONS

Places to avoid

• Places exposed to direct sunlight or near a source of heat such as a radiator

• Very dirty and dusty places

• Places subject to strong vibrations

• Near magnetic field sources such as a television or speakers

• Near high-voltage cables such as a power cable

• Near noise sources such as fluorescent lamps

• Places where condensation forms easily

• Humid places

• Places where drastic temperature changes occur

• Places which are not level

• Steamy and oily places such as kitchens

Rack mounting

1. Remove the rubber legs (6 pcs.) on the bottom of the unit.

• Use a flat-blade screwdriver and remove the screws.

2. Install the rack mounting brackets on both sides of the unit.

• Using the mounting screws (4 pcs.) for the rack mounting brackets, fix them firmly.

3. Install the unit in the rack.

• Fix the unit firmly with the rack mounting screws (4 pcs.).

Important:

• The cooling fan inside the unit is perishable and must be replaced periodically.

• Do not block the ventilation openings or slots in the cover to prevent the unit from overheating.

• If the rack is subject to vibration, secure the rear of the unit to the rack using additional mounting brackets (not included).

• Be sure to keep the temperature inside the rack below

30 °C (86 °F) when operating the units. Installing ventilation fan(s) in the rack is recommended especially when the rack is covered with front lids. Otherwise, it can cause reductions in the lifespans of hard disk drives.

• When installing, install the unit lower in the rack with a space equivalent to about 1 unit (44 mm) or more separating it from the other appliances.

Remove the rubber legs.

Mounting screws for rack mounting brackets

(accessories)

Rack mounting brackets (accessories)

Rack mounting screws

For our rack: Nominal diameter 5 tapping (accessory)

CONNECTIONS

Important:

• Use only the recommended BNC connectors listed below.

RECOMMENDED

Tip dimensioins inside the BNC

Ø 1.32 mm – Ø 1.37 mm

Tip

(inside)

Ø 0.13 mm – Ø 0.69 mm

BNC

Video (coaxial) Cable

Standards

For U.S.A.

For Europe

For Japan

MIL-C39012C or MIL-C39012/16F

BS CECC 22120:1981

JIS C5412

Suffixes attached to the standards may be updated.

Other BNC connectors may cause video signal interruption, and damage the BNC receptacles on the rear panel of the unit.

• When connecting the Panasonic matrix switcher or the data multiplex unit to this unit, the looped through output signal for every video input signal from them must be supplied to the video input connectors of this unit directly.

Do not supply the monitor output signal or the spot output signal from the matrix switcher or the data multiplex unit to the video input connectors of this unit.

Otherwise, the images may be disorderly displayed and recorded for a split second. (The images displayed before switching channel may be displayed and recorded.)

■

Connections when the unit is used independently

An example of connections is shown below when the unit is used independently.

Important:

• When connecting the Panasonic matrix switcher or the coaxial communication unit to this unit, the looped through output signal for every video input signal from them must be supplied to the video input connectors of this unit directly.

Do not supply the monitor output signal or the spot output signal from the matrix switcher or the coaxial communication unit to the video input connectors of this unit. Otherwise, the improper image switching may occur and the images displayed before switching channels may be displayed and recorded.

• The power plug should be connected last.

• When connecting combination cameras, connect them to the video input connectors 1 - 8 when using the WJ-HD316A or

1 - 6 when using the WJ-HD309A (for coaxial communication).

●

Examples of connections

Monitor 1 Monitor 2

Microphone

Amplifier

Mode switch setting (Factory default)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Note: If the DATA and RS485 ports are not used, the mode switches should be used as illustrated.

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

SERIAL

CASCADE

OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

13 12 11

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM

ALARM/CONTROL

8 7

OUT

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

VIDEO

8 7

MODE

COPY 1

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

4 3

10/100BASE-T

EXT STORAGE

6 5 4 3 2 1

SIGNAL GND

POWER

AC IN

AC 220 V - 240 V,

50Hz

For Audio Amplifier

• • • • • •

System cameras

(VIDEO IN 9 - 16)

• • • • • •

Combination cameras

(VIDEO IN 1 - 8)

Notes:

• The SETUP MENU will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA monitor. (It is impossible to display the SETUP MENU on monitor 1.)

• The same images displayed on monitor 2 will be displayed on the VGA monitor.

■

Connections with an extension unit

An example of connections is shown below when the unit is used together with an optional extension unit.

This unit can be connected with up to seven extension units.

Connect the EXT IN port on the rear panel of the extension unit and the EXT STORAGE port on the rear panel of this unit using the cable provided with the optional extension unit.

Important:

• Use the cable provided with the optional extension unit.

• Fix the cables with the cable clamp (provided with each unit) to prevent disconnection or unstable connections that may cause recording failures or an unstable system.

How to fix the cable clamp

COPY

10/100BASE-T

EXIT ST

ORA

Cable Clamp

Fixing screw

Remove this screw from the unit and fix the cables with the cable clamp using the screw removed from the unit.

AUDIO IN

SERIAL

AUDIO OUT

15 14

CASCADE

OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

13 12 11

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM

ALARM/CONTROL

8 7

OUT

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

VIDEO

8 7 6

MODE

2 1

COPY 1

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

4 3

10/100BASE-T

EXT STORAGE

5 4 3 2 1

This unit

Cable (attached to the extension unit)

SIGNAL GND

POWER

AC IN

EXT

OUT

2 1

Cable Clamp

EXT

OUT

Fixing screw

Remove this screw from the unit and fix the cables with the cable clamp using the screw removed from the unit.

How to fix the cable clamp

Extension unit (WJ-HDE300 series)

SIGNAL GND

POWER

AC IN

■

Connections with DVD-RAM, CD-R, and DVD-R drives

This is an example of connection when the unit is used together with the designated DVD-RAM, DVD-R and CD-R drive.

Connect the designated DVD-RAM, DVD-R and CD-R drive and the COPY1 port on the rear panel or the COPY2 port inside the connectors cover on the front panel of this unit using an USB cable (not included).

Important:

• Use an appropriate USB cable compatible with the USB2.0 standard.

• When a DVD-RAM, DVD-R or CD-R drive is connected to one of the COPY1 or COPY2 port, do not connect another drive to the other port.

• Fix the cables with the cable clamp (provided with this unit) to prevent disconnection or unstable connections that may cause recording failures or an unstable system.

How to fix the cable clamp

Cable Clamp

COPY

10/100BASE-T

EXIT ST

ORA

Fixing screw

Remove this screw from the unit and fix the cables with the cable clamp using the screw removed from the unit.

Designated DVD-RAM drive, etc.

R O M

USB cable (Locally procured)

3 1

AUDIO IN

SERIAL

AUDIO OUT

15 14

CASCADE

OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

13 12 11

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM

ALARM/CONTROL

8 7

OUT

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

VIDEO

8 7

MODE

COPY 1

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

4 3

10/100BASE-T

EXT STORAGE

6 5 4 3 2 1

Rear

SIGNAL GND

ALARM

SUSPEND

OPERATE

TIMER

ERROR

ALARM

RESET

HDD 1

HDD 2

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SHIFT

1 2

SEQ

OSD

8 5

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SETUP

/ESC

–

LISTED

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

S-VIDEO

COPY 2 VIDEO

OUT

AUDIO

OUT

POWER

AC IN

Front

USB cable (Locally procured)

R O M

Designated DVD-RAM drive, etc.

■

Connections with the VTR

When it is necessary to copy the recorded images to a video tape using a VTR, connect the VTR to the S-VIDEO connector (or the VIDEO OUT connector) and the AUDIO OUT connector inside the connectors cover on the front panel of this unit as below.

Open the connectors cover.

ALARM

SUSPEND

OPERATE

TIMER

ERROR

ALARM

RESET

HDD 1

HDD 2

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

10/0

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

STOP PLAY PAUSE REC - REC STOP

PAN/

TILT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

IRIS

PRESET

/AUTO

GOTO

LAST

A-B

REPEAT

PAN/TILT

SLOW

LISTED

SETUP

/ESC

–

SET

BUSY

REV FWD

S-VIDEO

COPY 2 VIDEO

OUT

AUDIO

OUT

AUDIO

VTR

S-VIDEO IN connector

VIDEO

Audio cable with an RCA pin plug (Locally procured)

Video cable with an RCA pin plug (Locally procured)

S-video cable (Locally procured)

Notes:

• The same video signal supplied to the MONITOR2 (VGA) connector will be supplied to the S-VIDEO connector and the

VIDEO OUT connector inside the connectors cover.

The same audio signal supplied to the AUDIO OUT connector on the rear panel of this unit will be supplied to the AUDIO

OUT connector inside the connectors cover on the front panel.

• When connecting multiple units in the cascade connection, it is impossible to supply video output signals of an other unit using the S-VIDEO connector or the MONITOR (VGA) connector. Connect VTRs individually to each WJ-HD316A/WJ-

HD309A unit.

■

Connections with PS·Data systems

This is an example of connection when the unit is used together with the PS·Data devices.

If a connected system controller is PS·Data compatible, it is possible to operate this unit or connected devices using the system controller.

Use the RS485 cable provided with the system controller.

Important:

• Terminate both devices on both ends of the connection. Refer to the respective operating instructions for the descriptions of how to terminate. Termination of this unit can be set with the mode switch on the rear panel. (See below.)

• When connecting a PS·Data compatible device, it is necessary to set each item of "PS·Data Setup" of "Comm" on the

SETUP MENU according to the system configuration.

• The PS·Data is our exclusive protocol. Contact the dealer about devices that can be connected.

●

When connecting this unit with a controller

System Controller

RS485 cable (provided with the controller)

Mode switch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

(No. 7: ON)

(No. 8: OFF)

Controller

Termination: ON

Unit Address : 1

3 1

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

SERIAL

CASCADE

OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

13 12 11

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM

ALARM/CONTROL

8 7

OUT

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

VIDEO

8 7 6 5

MODE

2 1

4 3 2

COPY 1

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

4 3

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

2 1

SIGNAL GND

POWER

AC IN

"PS·Data setup" of "Comm" on the SETUP MENU

• Unit Address (System) : 1

• Unit Address (Controller) : 2

●

When installing this unit between a controller and a system device

System Controller

POWER

OFF

UNIT

ALARM

RESET SUSPEND

SET

SET UP

ESC

2 3

ALARM

SUSPEND

Data Multiplex Unit WJ-MP204

Coaxial communication unit

Termination: ON

Unit Address : 2

RS485 cable

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

SERIAL

CASCADE

OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

13 12 11

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM

ALARM/CONTROL

8 7

OUT

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

VIDEO

8 7

MODE

COPY 1

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

4 3

10/100BASE-T

EXT STORAGE

6 5 4 3 2 1

Controller

Termination: ON

Unit Address : 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

(No. 7: OFF)

(No. 8: OFF)

Mode switch

SIGNAL GND

POWER

AC IN

"PS·Data setup" of "Comm" on the SETUP MENU

• Unit Address (System) : 1

• Unit Address (Controller) : 2

●

When connecting this unit with a system device

RS485 cable

Mode switch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

(No. 7: OFF)

(No. 8: ON)

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

SERIAL

CASCADE

OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

13 12 11

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM

ALARM/CONTROL

8 7

OUT

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

VIDEO

8 7

MODE

COPY 1

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

4 3

10/100BASE-T

EXT STORAGE

6 5 4 3 2 1

SIGNAL GND

POWER

AC IN

POWER

OFF

UNIT

ALARM

RESET

SET

SUSPEND SET UP

ESC

2 3

ALARM

SUSPEND

Data Multiplex Unit WJ-MP204

Coaxial communication unit

Termination: ON

Unit Address : 3

RS485 cable

POWER

OFF

UNIT

ALARM

RESET

SET

SUSPEND SET UP

ESC

2 3 4

ALARM

SUSPEND

Data Multiplex Unit WJ-MP204

Coaxial communication unit

Termination: OFF

Unit Address : 2

"PS·Data setup" of "Comm" on the SETUP MENU

• Unit Address (System) : 1

• Unit Address (Controller) : 1

■

Cascade connection of multiple units

Up to of four units can be connected.

For the cascade connection, connect the CASCADE IN connector and the CASCADE OUT connector on the rear panel of each unit as below.

Important:

• When connecting the unit in the cascade connection, set "Cascade" of "PS·Data Setup" in "Comm" on the SETUP MENU to

"ON". (Page 131)

• It is impossible to use this connector when connecting the unit in the cascade connection.

●

When no PS·Data compatible device is connected to the system

Monitor 2 Monitor 1

AUDIO IN

SERIAL

AUDIO OUT

15 14

CASCADE

OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

13 12 11

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM

ALARM/CONTROL

8 7

OUT

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

VIDEO

8 7

MODE

COPY 1

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

4 3

10/100BASE-T

EXT STORAGE

6 5 4 3 2 1

Mode switch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

(No. 7: OFF)

(No. 8: ON)

SIGNAL GND

POWER

AC IN

Unit Address settings of "PS·Data Setup" of "Comm" on the

SETUP MENU

First unit (this unit)

System : 1

Controller : 1

Monitor 1

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

RS485 Cable

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

Mode switch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

(No. 7: OFF)

(No. 8: OFF)

AUDIO IN

SERIAL

AUDIO OUT

15 14

CASCADE

OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

13 12 11

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM

ALARM/CONTROL

8 7

OUT

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

VIDEO

8 7

MODE

COPY 1

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

4 3

10/100BASE-T

EXT STORAGE

6 5 4 3 2 1

SIGNAL GND

POWER

AC IN

Second unit

System : 2

Controller : 2

Monitor 1

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

RS485 Cable

Mode switch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

(No. 7: ON)

(No. 8: OFF)

AUDIO IN

SERIAL

AUDIO OUT

15 14

CASCADE

OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

13 12 11

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM

ALARM/CONTROL

8 7

OUT

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

VIDEO

8 7

DATA

6 5

MODE

RS485(CAMERA)

4 3

10/100BASE-T

EXT STORAGE

4 3 2

COPY 1

SIGNAL GND

POWER

AC IN

Third unit

System : 3

Controller : 3

●

When the PS·Data compatible device is connected to the first unit

Monitor 2

Monitor 1

Controller

Termination: ON

Unit Address : 1

System Controller

Monitor 1

RS485 cable

(provided with the controller)

3 1

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

SERIAL

CASCADE

OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

13 12 11

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM

ALARM/CONTROL

8 7

OUT

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

VIDEO

8 7 6

MODE

2 1

COPY 1

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

4 3

10/100BASE-T

EXT STORAGE

5 4 3 2 1

Mode switch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

(No. 7: OFF)

(No. 8: OFF)

SIGNAL GND

Unit Address settings of "PS·Data Setup" of "Comm" on the

SETUP MENU

POWER

AC IN

First unit (this unit)

Controller : 2

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

RS485 cable

Mode switch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

(No. 7: OFF)

(No. 8: OFF)

Monitor 1

3 1

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

SERIAL

CASCADE

OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

13 12 11

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM

ALARM/CONTROL

8 7

OUT

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

VIDEO

8 7 6

MODE

2 1

COPY 1

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

4 3

10/100BASE-T

EXT STORAGE

5 4 3 2 1

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

SIGNAL GND

POWER

AC IN

Second unit

Controller : 3

RS485 cable

Mode switch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

(No. 7: ON)

(No. 8: OFF)

3 1

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

SERIAL

CASCADE

OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

13 12 11

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM

ALARM/CONTROL

8 7

OUT

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

VIDEO

8 7 6

MODE

2 1

COPY 1

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

4 3

10/100BASE-T

EXT STORAGE

5 4 3 2 1

SIGNAL GND

POWER

AC IN

Third unit

Controller : 4

●

When the PS·Data compatible device is connected to the third unit

Monitor 2

Monitor 1

AUDIO IN

SERIAL

AUDIO OUT

15 14

CASCADE

OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

13 12 11

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM

ALARM/CONTROL

8 7

OUT

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

VIDEO

8 7

DATA

6 5

MODE

RS485(CAMERA)

4 3

10/100BASE-T

EXT STORAGE

4 3 2

COPY 1

Mode switch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

(No. 7: OFF)

(No. 8: ON)

SIGNAL GND

POWER

AC IN

Unit Address settings of "PS·Data Setup" of "Comm" on the

SETUP MENU

First unit (this unit)

System : 1

Controller : 1

Monitor 1

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

RS485 cable

Mode switch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

(No. 7: OFF)

(No. 8: OFF)

AUDIO IN

SERIAL

AUDIO OUT

15 14

CASCADE

OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

13 12 11

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM

ALARM/CONTROL

8 7

OUT

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

VIDEO

8 7

MODE

COPY 1

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

4 3

10/100BASE-T

EXT STORAGE

6 5 4 3 2 1

SIGNAL GND

POWER

AC IN

Second unit

System : 2

Controller : 2

Monitor 1

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

RS485 cable

Mode switch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

(No. 7: OFF)

(No. 8: OFF)

AUDIO IN

SERIAL

AUDIO OUT

15 14

CASCADE

OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

13 12 11

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM

ALARM/CONTROL

8 7

OUT

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

VIDEO

8 7

MODE

COPY 1

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

4 3

10/100BASE-T

EXT STORAGE

6 5 4 3 2 1

RS485 cable

SIGNAL GND

Coaxial communication unit

Termination: ON

Unit Address: 4

POWER

OFF

UNIT

ALARM

RESET SUSPEND

SET

SET UP

ESC

2 3 4

ALARM

SUSPEND

Data Multiplex Unit WJ-MP204

POWER

AC IN

Third unit

System : 3

Controller : 3

●

When the PS·Data compatible devices are connected to the first and third units

Monitor 2

Monitor 1

Data Compatible

System Controller

Controller

Termination: ON

Unit Address: 1

RS485 cable

(provided with the controller)

3 1

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

SERIAL

CASCADE

OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

13 12 11

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM

ALARM/CONTROL

8 7

OUT

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

VIDEO

8 7 6

MODE

2 1

COPY 1

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

4 3

10/100BASE-T

EXT STORAGE

5 4 3 2 1

Mode switch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

(No. 7: OFF)

(No. 8: OFF)

SIGNAL GND

POWER

AC IN

Unit Address settings of "PS·Data Setup" of "Comm" on the

SETUP MENU

First unit (this unit)

Controller : 2

Monitor 1

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

RS485 cable

Mode switch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

(No. 7: OFF)

(No. 8: OFF)

3 1

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

SERIAL

CASCADE

OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

13 12 11

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM

ALARM/CONTROL

8 7

OUT

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

VIDEO

8 7 6

MODE

2 1

COPY 1

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

4 3

10/100BASE-T

EXT STORAGE

5 4 3 2 1

SIGNAL GND

POWER

AC IN

Second unit

Controller : 3

Monitor 1

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

RS485 cable Mode switch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

(No. 7: OFF)

(No. 8: OFF)

3 1

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

SERIAL

CASCADE

OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

13 12 11

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM

ALARM/CONTROL

8 7

OUT

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

VIDEO

8 7 6

MODE

2 1

COPY 1

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

4 3

10/100BASE-T

EXT STORAGE

5 4 3 2 1

SIGNAL GND

POWER

AC IN

Third unit

Controller : 4

RS485 cable

POWER

OFF

UNIT

ALARM

RESET SUSPEND

SET

SET UP

ESC

2 3

ALARM

SUSPEND

Data Multiplex Unit WJ-MP204

Coaxial communication unit

Termination: ON

Unit Address: 5

■

Connection with the RS485 camera

This is an example of connection when the unit is used together with the RS485 devices.

Up to eight cameras can be connected using a single RS485 (CAMERA) port.

Important:

• When connecting an RS485 camera, it is necessary to set each item of "RS485 Setup" of "Comm" on the SETUP MENU according to the RS485 settings of the camera. (Refer to page 132.)

• The total length of the RS485 cable from this unit is 1 200 meters at the maximum.

●

1:1 connection

Connect a camera to the RS485 (CAMERA) port.

Example: When the RS485 cameras are connected to the CAMERA IN connectors 9 and 13:

Mode switch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

(No. 1, No. 4 : ON)

3 1

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

SERIAL

CASCADE

OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

13 12 11

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM

ALARM/CONTROL

8 7

OUT

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

VIDEO

8 7

MODE

COPY 1

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

4 3

10/100BASE-T

EXT STORAGE

6 5 4 3 2 1

SIGNAL GND

POWER

AC IN

RS485 cable

Unit No.13

Termination: ON

Unit No.9

Termination: ON

Combination Cameras

Connect the RS485 camera to Switches required to be set

RS485 (1)

RS485 (2)

No.2

No.3

No.5

No.6

4-wire communication

OFF

2-wire communication

●

Daisy connection

Multiple cameras can be connected to the RS485 (CAMERA) port.

Example: When cameras 1 - 4 are connected to the CAMERA IN connectors 1 - 4 and cameras 9 - 12 are connected to the

RS485 (CAMERA) port 1.

RS485 cable

3 1

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

SERIAL

CASCADE

OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

13 12 11

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM

ALARM/CONTROL

8 7

OUT

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

VIDEO

8 7 6

MODE

2 1

COPY 1

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

4 3

10/100BASE-T

EXT STORAGE

5 4 3 2 1

Mode switch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Nos. 1,2,3,4,5,6 : ON

SIGNAL GND

POWER

AC IN

Unit No. 12

Termination:

Unit No. 11

Termination:

OFF

Unit No. 10

Termination: Termination:

OFF

Unit No. 9

OFF

Combination cameras (RS485 compatible)

Unit No. 4

Termination:

Unit No. 3

Termination:

OFF

Unit No. 2

Termination:

OFF

Unit No. 1

Termination:

OFF

Combination cameras (coaxial communication compatible)

Connect the RS485 camera to Switches required to be set

RS485 (1)

RS485 (2)

No.2

No.3

No.5

No.6

4-wire communication

OFF

2-wire communication

■

Mode Switch

RS485 interface is used to communicate between this unit and the PS·Data compatible system device. In this case, it is necessary to terminate both devices on both ends of the RS485 connection.

The settings of the mode switch will be different depending on whether this unit is used as a receiver or a controller.

When an RS 485 camera is connected to this unit, it is necessary to terminate both devices on both ends of the connection.

• When connecting this unit with the system controller and this is installed at the end of the PS·Data connection

PS·Data termination switch 1: ON

• When connecting a system device and this unit is installed at the end of the PS·Data connection

PS·Data terminating switch 2: ON

• When connecting RS485 cameras

Set the termination switch of the connected RS485 (CAMERA) port to ON.

Connected to the RS485 (CAMERA) port 1: Set the RS485 (1) termination switch to ON.

Connected to the RS485 (CAMERA) port 2: Set the RS485 (2) termination switch to ON.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

• For 2-wire communication

Connected to the RS485 (CAMERA) port 1: Set the switch No.2 and No.3 to ON.

Connected to the RS485 (CAMERA) port 2: Set the switch No.5 and No.6 to ON.

• For 4-wire communication

Connected to the RS485 (CAMERA) port 1: Set the switch No.2 and No.3 to OFF.

Connected to the RS485 (CAMERA) port 2: Set the switch No.5 and No.6 to OFF.

RS485 (1) terminating switch

RS485 (1) 2/4-wire changeover

RS485 (2) terminating switch

RS485 (2) 2/4-wire changeover

PS•Data terminating switch 1

PS•Data terminating switch 2

■

RS485 Port

DATA

TA TB RA RB

Output Input

Internal block diagram

■

How to Use the Terminals of the ALARM/CONTROL Connector

These terminals are used for emergency recording, auto time adjustment (Auto Adjust Time), taking measures against power outages (Shutdown Time), and when installing a buzzer, a lamp, or similar alarm device. They are also used to synchronize with the sequential display changeover.

The terminal pin array and connections are shown below. The connector used should be compatible with the pin configuration.

Pin array

The pin array is different from other disk recorders. Make sure that the connection is correct referring to the following.

ALARM/CONTROL

Pin No.

q w u i o

e r t y

Signal

Ch 8 alarm output

Ch 9 alarm output

Ch 10 alarm output

Ch 11 alarm output

Ch 12 alarm output

Ch 13 alarm output

Ch 14 alarm output

Ch 15 alarm output

Ch 16 alarm output

Alarm reset input

Emergency recording input

!3, !4

Earth (Grounding)

Alarm output for available disk space of device connected to copy port

HDD error output

Camera error output

Error output

End of outage processing

Operation

Alarm signal output at an event occurrence

Only for the WJ-HD316A

(Not available for the WJ-HD309A)

Canceling the alarm display

Starting emergency recording signal input

Generation of signal output for disk space alarming of DVD-RAM, DVD-R and CD-R

Remarks

Open collector output

24 V max., 100 mA

Non-voltage make contact input

–100 mA, 5 V pull-up

Open collector output

24 V max., 100 mA

Time adjustment I/O

Sequence changeover

I/O

Alarm suspension input

Outage detection I/O

Signal output upon detection of an HDD error

Signal output upon detection of a camera error

Signal output upon detection of a unit error

Signal output upon completion of outage processing

High (+12 V)

The time of this unit is adjusted to the preset time according to the signal input. This signal output is then generated for the setting time of this unit.

Time of all other units is adjusted to the setting time of this unit.

30 k

Ω 5 V pull-up,

–100 mA/make contact

Sequence changeover is affected according to the signal input. Signal output is generated at the time of sequence changeover.

The state of alarm suspension is assumed according to the signal input.

Start of outage processing according to the signal input.

Changeover to the external recording mode

Non-voltage make contact input

–100 mA, 5 V pull-up

External recording mode changeover

+5 V output +5 V output 200 mA max.

●

Connection for emergency recording

When the external switch is turned ON, emergency recording will be started.

Resolution, recording time, recording rate and quality for emergency recording can differ according to the settings of

"Emergency REC" of "Recording" on the SETUP MENU. (Refer to page 113.)

(Earth)

(Emergency record input)

External switch

ALARM/CONTROL

●

Connection for external recording changeover

When the external switch is turned ON, the recording program changeover is affected for recording.

The recording program can be set for "EXT" with the "Time Table" of "Schedule" on the SETUP MENU. (Refer to page 122.)

(Earth)

(External recording mode)

External switch

ALARM/CONTROL

●

Connection to synchronize the sequential display changeover (when multiple units are used)

Sequential display changeover is affected by the timing of supplied signals to the sequence changeover input terminal. When multiple units are used, the sequence timing can be synchronized.

Setting for the sequence timing can be set with "Sequence Timing" of "Switcher" on the SETUP MENU. (Refer to page 126.)

For the synchronization of the sequence timing between multiple units, there is a difference in the sequence timing setting as shown below between the synchronized side (Master) and the synchronizing side (Slave).

Synchronized side (Master): Set at "INT" (functioning as an output terminal)

Synchronizing side (Slave): Set at "EXT" (functioning as an input terminal)

(Earth)

(Sequence changeover output)

(Earth)

(Sequence changeover input)

ALARM/CONTROL

WJ-HD316A/WJ-HD309A

(First unit)

ALARM/CONTROL

WJ-HD316A/WJ-HD309A

(Second unit)

●

Connection for the Auto Adjust Time function

• When "Auto Adjust Time" of "System" on the SETUP MENU is set to "MASTER"

"Time Adjust Output" becomes available and the clock of this unit can be applied to other units.

(Earth)

(Time adjust output)

Terminal block of other units

Front LED monitor output

ALARM/CONTROL

• When "Auto Adjust Time" of "System" on the SETUP MENU is set to "SLAVE"

"Time Adjust Input" becomes available. When a signal output from other equipment is supplied to the time adjust I/O terminals between 00 minutes 00 seconds and 14 minutes 59 seconds every hour or between 45 minutes 00 seconds and 59 minutes

59 seconds every hour, the clock will be set to "00 minutes 00 seconds" of the closest hour.

Example:

Signal is supplied at 2:50:00 (hour:minute:second)pm

→ Set at 3:00:00 pm

Signal input supplied at 3:14:45 pm

→ Set at 3:00:00 pm

Signal is supplied at 3:20:00 pm

→ Time will not be adjusted.

(Earth)

(Time adjust input)

Terminal block of other units

Front LED monitor output

ALARM/CONTROL

Important:

• When "SLAVE" is selected, the auto time adjustment function works differently depending on the recording status as follows:

When no recording is being performed

When manual recording is being performed

When schedule recording is being performed

When event recording is being performed

When emergency recording is being performed

The clock will be adjusted when the clock becomes inaccurate beyond ±5 seconds.

The clock will not be adjusted.

: When event recording is performed on any camera channel

• Recording will not be performed for around 4 seconds when the clock is adjusted during recording.

●

Connection with the Uninterruptible Power System (UPS)

This is an example of connection with the uninterruptible power system (UPS) to be installed to protect from a power outage.

When a signal is supplied to the outage detection I/O terminals from the uninterruptible power system (UPS), internal processing (stops recording safely) will be started to shut off the power supply for this unit.

After completing the internal processing, a signal will be supplied from the outage processing end output terminal to the uninterruptible power system (UPS). Then, the power supply to this unit can be suspended.

This unit

(Earth)

(Outage detection I/O)

(Outage processing end output)

(COM)

(Detection)

(Shutdown)

* Refer to the operating instructions of the used product for further information about connection of the UPS side.

Power cable

Uninterruptible power system

(UPS)

ALARM/CONTROL To an AC outlet

●

Connection of the control output

• When an alarm device such as a buzzer or a lamp is connected, the signal output from Pin Nos. 15 - 18 can be used to notify the status by sounding a buzzer or lighting a lamp.

• The following example is of a connection with the HDD error output (pin no. 16).

(Earth)

(HDD error output)

Alarming device

ALARM/CONTROL

Relay, etc.

Install according to your needs

■

How to Use the Terminals of the ALARM Connector

These terminals are used to connect the alarm devices, such as sensors, door switches, etc.

The pin configurations of these terminals are as shown below. The connector used should be compatible with the pin configuration.

Pin Configuration

ALARM

@5 !4

The pin array is different from other disk recorders. Make sure that the connection is correct by referring to the following.

Pin No.

Signal

Ch 1 alarm input

Ch 2 alarm input w e r t

Ch 3 alarm input

Ch 4 alarm input

Ch 5 alarm input

Ch 6 alarm input y u i o

Ch 7 alarm input

Ch 8 alarm input

Ch 1 alarm output

Ch 2 alarm output

Ch 3 alarm output

Ch 4 alarm output

!3, !4

Earth (Grounding)

Ch 9 alarm input

Ch 10 alarm input

Ch 11 alarm input

Ch 12 alarm input !8

Ch 13 alarm input

Ch 14 alarm input

Ch 15 alarm input

Ch 16 alarm input @2

Ch 5 alarm output

Ch 6 alarm output

Ch 7 alarm output

Operation

Event action will be performed according to the settings.

Remarks

Non-voltage make contact/–100 mA,

5 V pull-up

Alarm signal will be supplied at an event occurrence

Event action will be performed according to the setting.

Only for the WJ-HD316A

(Not available for the WJ-HD309A)

Alarm signal will be supplied at an event occurrence

Open collector output/24 V, 100 mA

Non-voltage make contact input/

–100 mA, 5 V pull-up

Open collector output/24 V max.,

100 mA

●

Alarm connection

When a signal is supplied to the alarm input terminals of CH 1-16, recording and displaying of camera images will be performed according to the settings.

When an alarm device such as a buzzer, a lamp, etc., is installed outside, connect them to the alarm output terminals (pin nos.

9 - 12, pin nos. 23 - 25) or to the alarm output terminals (pin nos. 1 - 9) of the ALARM/CONTROL terminal.

Sensor

Security door switch

(Earth)

Alarming devices

Relay, etc.

Install according to your needs.

(Ch 1 alarm output)

ALARM

(Earth)

Alarming devices

Relay, etc.

Install according to your needs.

(Ch 16 alarm output) o

ALARM/CONTROL

Time and polarities of the ALARM/CONTROL terminal and the ALARM terminal

Terminal

Alarm input

Active time

100 ms or more

Alarm output

Alarm reset input

Emergency recording input

Alarm output for available disk space of device connected to the copy port

HDD error output

Camera error output

Error output

Outage processing end output

Time adjust I/O

Sequence changeover output

Outage detection output

External recording mode changeover

Alarm suspend output

The set time on the SETUP MENU

100 ms or more

While the size of the available disk space is less than the set size

Until the HDD error is cleared

Until the camera error is cleared

Until the error is cleared

100 ms

Input: 100 ms or more

Output: 1 s

100 ms or more

Note

N.O.: L active

N.C.: H active

L active

H active

L active

L active, judged by level

■

How to Use the SERIAL Connector

This connector is compliant with the RS232C Standard, and is used to communicate with a connected PC.

A connection example and the pin configuration of the SERIAL connector are as shown below.

Important:

When using the SERIAL connector, it is necessary to perform the settings with "RS232C Setup" of "Comm" on the SETUP

MENU for the communication functions. (Page 133)

●

Pin Configuration

Serial connector of this unit

D-sub Pin 9 (Female)

Personal computer side

D-sub Pin 9 (Female)

(Locally procured)

7 (RTS)

8 (CTS)

3 (TXD)

5 (GND)

2 (RXD)

WJ-HD316A/WJ-HD309A

7 (RTS)

8 (CTS)

3 (TXD)

5 (GND)

2 (RXD)

PC or another device

Connection example of cross cable

●

Connection example

D-sub Pin 9

(Female)

3 1

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

SERIAL

CASCADE

OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

13 12

MONITOR (VGA)

11 10

ALARM

ALARM/CONTROL

8 7

OUT

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

VIDEO

8 7

MODE

COPY 1

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

4 3

10/100BASE-T

EXT STORAGE

6 5 4 3 2 1

This unit

SIGNAL GND

POWER

AC IN

D-sub Pin 9

(Female)

SETUP

To operate this unit, it is necessary to set each item of the SETUP MENU in advance.

Using the SETUP MENU (Quick) and the SETUP MENU (Advanced)

First, check the setting items of the SETUP MENU (Quick) and perform the settings. When more detailed settings are required, perform the settings on the SETUP MENU (Advanced).

Refer to page 102 for descriptions about the SETUP MENU (Advanced).

Perform the settings for each item of the SETUP MENU by displaying the SETUP MENU on monitor 2.

Settings items are as below.

■

About the SETUP MENU (Quick)

SETUP MENU

Quick

Display

REC & Event

Network

■

Date Format

■

Time Format

■

Time & Date

1 .

JAN .

DD.MMM.YY

12h

■

Time & Date Display Position

■

Camera Title

■

Camera Title Display Position

■

Live Sequence

SET

L-UPPER

SETUP

R-LOWER

SETUP

■

Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

■

Beep (Operation)

■

Language

AUTO

ENGLISH

LIVE

Advanced Menu

Live image

Main area

Menu:

These menus are always displayed on the SETUP MENU (Quick).

Live image:

Live images from the camera channel that was selected just before the SETUP MENU (Quick) was displayed, will be displayed in this area.

Main area:

The setting items of the selected menu will be displayed in this area.

■

Item list of the SETUP MENU (Quick)

Settings menu

Display

REC & Event

Network

Description

Perform the display settings such as the display position of the camera title and time, and the settings for other basic operations of this unit.

Perform the basic settings for recording and alarm operation.

Perform the basic network settings.

Page

101

■

[Display]

Perform the time and date, display settings such as the time and date display, the camera title display, the sequential display and the language setting.

SETUP MENU

Quick

Display

REC & Event

Network

■

Date Format

■

Time Format

■

Time & Date

1 .

JAN .

■

Time & Date Display Position

■

Camera Title

■

Camera Title Display Position

■

Live Sequence

04 10 : 00 : 00

■

Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

■

Beep (Operation)

■

Language

DD.MMM.YY

12h

SET

L-UPPER

SETUP

R-LOWER

SETUP

AUTO

ENGLISH

LIVE

Advanced Menu

Date Format

Select a display format for the date from the following. (Ex.

April 1, 2004)

YY.MM.DD:

04.4.1

MMM.DD.YY:

APR.1.04

DD.MMM.YY:

1.APR.04

Time Format

Select a display format for the time from the following. (Ex.

3 o’ clock in the afternoon)

12h:

3:00:00 PM

24h:

15:00:00

Time & Date

Adjust the current time and date.

Enter year, month, day, hour, minute and second in order, move the cursor to "SET" and press the SET button.

Important:

Recording will stop for around 4 seconds just after setting the date and time.

Time & Date Display Position

Select a time and date display position from the following.

L-UPPER:

Displays the time at the upper left of the screen.

R-UPPER:

Displays the time at the upper right of the screen.

L-LOWER:

Displays the time at the lower left of the screen.

R-LOWER:

Displays the time at the lower right of the screen.

Notes:

• When setting the time and date to be recorded together with images, the time display will be recorded in the selected position.

• Refer to page 112 for further information about

"Embedded REC (Time & Date)".

Camera Title

Perform the settings for the camera title. It is possible to display a camera title on the monitor 1/monitor 2, and record it as a part of the recorded image (page 112). Do the following to set the camera title.

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "Display" menu.

SETUP MENU

Quick

Display

REC & Event

Network

■

Date Format

■

Time Format

■

Time & Date

1 .

JAN .

■

Time & Date Display Position

■

Camera Title

■

Camera Title Display Position

■

Live Sequence

04 10 : 00 : 00

■

Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

■

Beep (Operation)

■

Language

DD.MMM.YY

12h

SET

L-UPPER

SETUP

R-LOWER

SETUP

AUTO

ENGLISH

LIVE

Advanced Menu

z Move the cursor to "Camera Title" using the arrows button (C D) and press the SET button.

[Screenshot 2]

The "Camera Title" pop-up window will be displayed.

SETUP MENU

Quick

Camera Title

Display

REC & Event

Network

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

■

Date Format

Time Format

Time & Date

5 1 .

JAN .

CAM6 6

04 10 : 00 :

CAM7

CAM8

■

Time & Date Display Position

■

Camera Title

CAM9

■

CAM11

Camera Title Display Position

Live Sequence

CAM12 12

■

CAM15

■

Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

Beep (Operation)

Language

Advanced Menu

MMM.DD.YY

12h

SET

L-UPPER

SETUP

R-LOWER

SETUP

AUTO

ENGLISH

LIVE

x Move the cursor to "CAM1" using the arrows button.

[Screenshot 3]

The cursor moves to "CAM1".

SETUP MENU

Quick

Camera Title

Display

REC & Event

Network

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

■

Date Format

Time Format

Time & Date

5 1 .

JAN .

CAM6 6

04 10 : 00 :

CAM7

CAM8

■

Time & Date Display Position

■

Camera Title

CAM9

■

CAM11

Camera Title Display Position

Live Sequence

CAM12 12

■

CAM15

■

Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

Beep (Operation)

Language

Advanced Menu

MMM.DD.YY

12h

SET

L-UPPER

SETUP

R-LOWER

SETUP

AUTO

ENGLISH

LIVE

c Select a character to be entered by rotating the jog dial.

Up to 16 characters can be entered.

v Move the cursor to the right side of the entered character using the arrows button (B).

Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the camera title.

The available characters for a camera title are different depending on the selected language as follows.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q

R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z À Ä Â Æ Ç É Ì Ñ Ò Ö Ù Ü Ø ß à á â ä å æ ç è

é ê ë ì í î ï ñ ò ó ô ö ù ú û ü ø ? " # & ( ) * + , - . / : ; SP

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W

X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z Ä Å Ç É Ñ Ö › Ü

á à â ä ã å ç é è ê ë í ì î ï ñ ó ò ô ö õ ú ù û ü ? " # & ( )

* + , - . / : ; SP

Note:

To correct the entered characters, move the cursor to the character to be corrected and press the

STOP button to delete it. Enter a correct character after deleting.

[Screenshot 4]

The camera title is entered.

SETUP MENU

Quick

Camera Title

Display

REC & Event

Network

CAM1

CAM2

■

Date Format

■

Time Format

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

■

Time & Date

5 1 .

JAN .

CAM6 6

04 10 : 00 :

CAM7

CAM8

■

Time & Date Display Position

■

Camera Title

CAM9

■

CAM11

Camera Title Display Position

Live Sequence

CAM12 12

■

CAM15

■

Summer Time (Day Light Saving)

Beep (Operation)

Language

Advanced Menu

MMM.DD.YY

12h

SET

L-UPPER

SETUP

R-LOWER

SETUP

AUTO

ENGLISH

LIVE

b Press the SETUP/ESC button.

→ The camera title will be set and the setting window of the camera title will be closed.

Note:

It is possible to set "Camera Title [Display]" to display a camera title on monitor 2 and "Camera Title

[Embedded]" to embed/display a camera title on monitor 1 individually using a PC via a network.

Refer to the Network Setup Instruction (PDF) for further information.

Camera Title Display Position

Select a camera title display position from the following.

L-UPPER:

Displays a camera title at the upper left of the screen.

L-LOWER:

Displays a camera title at the lower left of the screen.

R-UPPER:

Displays a camera title at the upper right of the screen.

R-LOWER:

Displays a camera title at the lower right of the screen.

CENTER:

Displays a camera title at the center of the screen.

Note:

When setting the camera title to be recorded together with images, the camera title display will be embedded in the selected position.

Refer to page 112 for further information about

"Embedded REC (title)".

Live Sequence

Perform the settings for the sequential display of live images as follows.

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "Display" menu.

SETUP MENU

Quick

Display

REC & Event

Network

■

Date Format

■

Time Format

■

Time & Date

1 .

JAN .

DD.MMM.YY

12h

■

Time & Date Display Position

■

Camera Title

■

Camera Title Display Position

■

Live Sequence

10 : 00 : 00 PM

SET

L-UPPER

SETUP

R-LOWER

SETUP

■

Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

■

Beep (Operation)

■

Language

AUTO

ENGLISH

LIVE

Advanced Menu

z Move the cursor to "Live Sequence" using the arrows button (C D) and press the SET button.

[Screenshot 2]

The "Live Sequence" pop-up menu will be displayed.

SETUP MENU

Quick

Display

REC & Event

Network

■

Date Format

Time Format

■

Time & Date

1 .

JAN .

STEP CAM PRESET DWELL

1 1 --

MMM.DD.YY

2 2

: 00

-12h

SET

L-UPPER

■

Camera Title

6 6

Time & Date Display Position

8 8

■

Camera Title Display Position

Live Sequence

12 12

- SETUP

R-LOWER

SETUP

■

Beep (Operation)

■

Language

AUTO

-ON 2s

ENGLISH

-2s

Advanced Menu

Monitor 1 Monitor 2

LIVE

x Move the cursor to "CAM" of "STEP 1" using the arrows button.

[Screenshot 3]

The cursor moves to "CAM".

SETUP MENU

Quick

Display

REC & Event

Network

■

Date Format

Time Format

■

Time & Date

1 .

JAN .

STEP CAM PRESET DWELL

1 1 --

MMM.DD.YY

2 2

: 00

-12h

SET

L-UPPER

■

Camera Title

6 6

Time & Date Display Position

8 8

■

Camera Title Display Position

Live Sequence

12 12

- SETUP

R-LOWER

SETUP

■

Beep (Operation)

■

Language

AUTO

-ON 2s

ENGLISH

-2s

Advanced Menu

Monitor 1 Monitor 2

LIVE

c Select how to display images from camera channels in

"STEP 1" from the following by rotating the jog dial.

1, 2, ... , 16:

Displays an image from the selected camera channel on a single screen.

1 - 4:

Displays images from camera channels

1 - 4 on a 4-split screen.

5 - 8:

Displays images from camera channels

5 - 8 on a 4-split screen.

9 - 9 (only for the WJ-HD309A):

Displays an image from camera channel 9 on the upper left area on a

4-split screen.

9 - 12 (only for the WJ-HD316A):

Displays images from camera channels 9 - 12 on a 4-split screen.

13 - 16 (only for the WJ-HD316A):

Displays images from camera channels 13 - 16 on a 4-split screen.

1 - 9:

Displays images from camera channels 1 - 9 on a

9-split screen.

10 - 16 (only for the WJ-HD316A):

Displays images from camera channels 10 - 16 on a 9-split screen.

--:

Skips the selected step.

v When displaying images from camera channels "1 - 16" on a single screen is selected in step 3, select the camera position.

Move the cursor to "PRESET" in "STEP 1" using the arrows button.

[Screenshot 4]

The cursor moves to the "PRESET" in "STEP 1".

SETUP MENU

Quick

Monitor 1 Monitor 2

Display

STEP CAM PRESET DWELL

REC & Event

■

Date Format

Time Format

Network

■

Time & Date

1 .

JAN .

■

Time & Date Display Position

Camera Title

STEP CAM PRESET DWELL

1 1 --

MMM.DD.YY

10 :

Camera Title Display Position

Live Sequence

-2s

: 00

-12h

-2s

SET

L-UPPER

- SETUP

R-LOWER

SETUP

-2s

■

Beep (Operation)

Language

AUTO

-ON 2s

ENGLISH

-2s

LIVE

Advanced Menu

b Rotate the jog dial to select a preset position number for which image is displayed in "STEP 1" from the following.

1 - 256:

Moves to the selected preset number.

--:

Does not move to the preset position.

n Select "DWELL" in "STEP 1" using the arrows button.

[Screenshot 5]

The cursor moves to"DWELL" in "STEP 1".

SETUP MENU

Quick

Monitor 1 Monitor 2

Display

REC & Event

Network

■

Date Format

Time Format

■

Time & Date

1 .

JAN .

STEP CAM PRESET DWELL

1 1 --

MMM.DD.YY

2 2

12h 2s

2s 3

: 00

-2s

SET

L-UPPER

■

Camera Title

6 6

Time & Date Display Position

8 8

■

Camera Title Display Position

Live Sequence

- SETUP

-R-LOWER

SETUP

■

Beep (Operation)

■

Language

AUTO

-ON 2s

ENGLISH

-2s

LIVE

Advanced Menu

m Rotate the jog dial to select an interval time to go to the next sequential step from 1 - 30 seconds (in 1 second intervals).

The sequence step is skipped when "0 s" is selected.

Repeat steps 2 and 7 to set for the other sequence steps.

, Press the SETUP/ESC button.

→ The settings for the sequential display are set and the sequence setting menu closes.

Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

Select the method of switching to summer time from the following.

OUT:

Does not function.

IN:

Applies summer time.

AUTO:

Applies summer time in accordance with the setting of summer time.

Beep (Operation)

Select ON or OFF whether or not to sound the buzzer when operating the buttons.

ON:

Sounds the buzzer when operating the buttons.

OFF:

Does not sound the buzzer when operating the buttons.

Language

Select a language for the SETUP MENU from the following.

JAPANESE/ENGLISH/FRANÇIS/ESPAÑOL/DEUTSCH/

ITALIANO/RUSSIAN/CHINESE

Important:

Displaying the language of the browser used to access the unit from a PC will not be changed even though this setting is changed.

■

[REC & Event]

Perform the settings for the basic recording and the settings for event actions of each event type (motion detection, video loss, command alarm and terminal alarm.)

SETUP MENU

Quick

Display

REC & Event

Network

Advanced Menu

■

REC Type

■

REC Camera

■

Resolution

■

Manual REC

REC Rate

Quality

■

Event REC

REC Rate

Quality

Time

Operation Mode

■

Event Setup

■

Power ON Manual REC

■

VMD Setup

LIVE

QUICK

SETUP

FIELD

25ips / 16CH

FQB

25ips / 16CH

FQB

30s

ALARM

SETUP

OFF

SETUP

REC Type

Select "QUICK" or "ADVANCED" for validation of the recording settings.

QUICK:

The recording settings set on the SETUP MENU

(Quick) will be validated when recording.

ADVANCED:

The recording settings set on the SETUP

MENU (Advanced) will be validated when recording.

Note:

When "QUICK" is selected for "REC Type" of "REC &

Event", the SETUP MENU (Quick) will be displayed by pressing the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or more.

When "ADVANCED" is selected for "REC Type" of "REC

& Event", the SETUP MENU (Advanced) will be displayed by pressing the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or more.

REC Camera

Select a camera channel for manual recording/event recording.

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "REC & Event" menu.

SETUP MENU

Quick

Display

REC & Event

Network

Advanced Menu

■

REC Type

■

REC Camera

■

Resolution

■

Manual REC

REC Rate

Quality

■

Event REC

REC Rate

Quality

Time

Operation Mode

■

Event Setup

■

Power ON Manual REC

■

VMD Setup

LIVE

QUICK

SETUP

FIELD

25ips / 16CH

FQB

25ips / 16CH

FQB

30s

ALARM

SETUP

OFF

SETUP

z Move the cursor to "REC Camera" using the arrows button (C D) and press the SET button.

[Screenshot 2]

The REC Camera pop-up menu will be displayed.

SETUP MENU

Quick

Display

REC & Event

Network

Advanced Menu

■

REC Type

■

REC Camera

■

Resolution

Manual REC

REC Rate

2 3

■

Event REC

REC Rate

Quality

Time

Operation Mode

■

Event Setup

■

Power ON Manual REC

■

VMD Setup

LIVE

QUICK

SETUP

FIELD

25ips / 16CH

FQB

25ips / 16CH

FQB

30s

ALARM

SETUP

OFF

SETUP

x Select the desired camera channel for manual recording/event recording using the arrows button (C D A

B) and rotate the jog dial. It is possible to select a camera channel by pressing a camera channel selection button (1 - 16 for the WJ-HD316A, 1 - 9 for the WJ-

HD309A) on the front panel of the unit.

c Press the SETUP/ESC button.

→ The settings will be applied and the "REC camera" pop-up menu will be closed.

Resolution

Select a recording resolution from the following.

FRAME 3D ON:

High resolution (720 x 576), with camera shake compensation

FRAME 3D OFF:

High resolution (720 x 576)

FIELD:

Standard resolution (720 x 288)

SIF:

Low resolution (360 x 288)

Recording will not be performed for around 4 seconds when the SETUP MENU (Quick) was closed after changing the settings.

Note:

It is possible to minimize blurring to record fast moving objects by selecting "FRAME 3D ON".

Manual REC

Perform the recording rate (REC Rate) and the image quality (Quality) for manual recording.

The following are available for the recording rate.

OFF/2.5 ips/4.2 ips/5 ips/6.3 ips/8.3 ips/12.5 ips/25 ips/

50 ips/100 ips

Note:

The available recording rate differs depending on the selected solution.

Resolution

FRAME 3D ON/FRAME 3D OFF

FIELD

SIF

Maximum recording rate

25 ips

50 ips

100 ips

Note:

The camera channel number selected for "REC

Camera" will be displayed next to the selected recording rate.

The following are available for the image quality.

SFA/SFB:

Top quality (SUPER FINE)

FQA/FQB:

High quality (FINE)

NQA/NQB:

Standard quality (NORMAL)

EXA/EXB:

Low quality (EXTENDED)

**A is suitable for less dynamic images.

**B is suitable for more dynamic images.

Event REC

Perform the recording rate (REC Rate) and the image quality (Quality) for event recording (recording to be performed at event occurrence (motion detection, video loss, terminal/command alarm)).

The following are available for "REC Rate" (recording rate).

OFF/2.5 ips/4.2 ips/5 ips/6.3 ips/8.3 ips/12.5 ips/25 ips/

50 ips/100 ips

Note:

The camera channel number selected for "REC

Camera" will be displayed next to the selected recording rate.

Note:

The available recording rate differs depending on the selected solution.

Resolution

FRAME 3D ON/FRAME 3D OFF

FIELD

SIF

Maximum recording rate

25 ips

50 ips

100 ips

The following are available for "Quality" (image quality).

SFA/SFB:

Top quality (SUPER FINE)

FQA/FQB:

High quality (FINE)

NQA/NQB:

Standard quality (NORMAL)

EXA/EXB:

Low quality (EXTENDED)

**A is suitable for less dynamic images.

**B is suitable for more dynamic images.

The following are available for "Time" (recording duration).

1 s - 10 s (in 1 second intervals)/20 s/30 s/1 min - 10 min

(in 1 minute intervals)/20 min/30 min/ 40 min/ 50 min/

60 min

MANUAL:

Recording duration differs depending on the event type as follows;

When a motion is detected:

Recording will be performed for 8 seconds

When a video loss has occurred:

Recording will be performed while the video signal is lost.

When a terminal alarm has occurred:

Recording will be performed while the alarm signal is being supplied.

When a command alarm has occurred:

Recording will be performed for 8 seconds.

CONTINUE:

Record until the ALARM RESET button is pressed.

Note:

When "MANUAL" is selected for "Time" (recording duration), recording will be performed for at least 8 seconds at an event occurrence as long as the alarm is not canceled.

The following are available for "Operation Mode" (event action mode). Refer to page 50 for further information about each event action mode.

ACT DET (Activity Detection Mode):

Performs only recording, writing an event log and camera movement to a preset position at an event occurrence. Other event actions will not be performed.

ALARM (Alarm Mode):

Performs every event action according to the settings.

OFF:

Performs only recording of the event log. Other event actions will not be performed.

Event Setup

Perform the settings for the alarm output duration and the buzzer sound duration for each event type (motion detection, video loss, command alarm and terminal alarm).

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "REC & Event" menu.

SETUP MENU

Quick

Display

REC & Event

Network

Advanced Menu

■

REC Type

■

REC Camera

■

Resolution

■

Manual REC

REC Rate

Quality

■

Event REC

REC Rate

Quality

Time

Operation Mode

■

Event Setup

■

Power ON Manual REC

■

VMD Setup

LIVE

QUICK

SETUP

FIELD

25ips / 16CH

FQB

25ips / 16CH

FQB

30s

ALARM

SETUP

OFF

SETUP

z Move the cursor to "Event Setup" using the arrows button (C D) and press the SET button.

[Screenshot 2]

The "Event Setup" pop-up menu will be displayed.

SETUP MENU

Quick

Display

REC & Event

■

REC Type

REC Camera

Network

■

Resolution

Manual REC

■

Video Loss

Alarm Output

Buzzer

■

Event REC

Terminal/Command Alarm

Quality

Time

Operation Mode

Advanced Menu

■

Event Setup

■

Power ON Manual REC

■

VMD Setup

QUICK

SETUP

FIELD

OFF

LIVE

30s

ALARM

SETUP

OFF

SETUP

x Move the cursor to the item to be set using the arrows button (C D), and rotate the jog dial to select the parameter.

The following are available for "Alarm Output" (alarm output duration).

When OFF is selected, the alarm output will not be supplied.

(s: second, min: minute)

OFF:

No alarm output is supplied.

100

1 s - 30 s (in 1 second intervals)/40 s/50 s/1 min/

2 min/3 min/4 min/5 min

EXT:

Alarm output will continue until the ALARM RESET button is pressed.

The following are available for "Buzzer" (buzzer sound duration).

When OFF is selected, a buzzer will not sound.

(s: second, min: minute))

1 s - 30 s (in 1 second intervals)/40 s/50 s/1 min/

2 min/3 min/4 min/5 min

EXT:

The buzzer will continue until the ALARM RESET button is pressed.

OFF:

The buzzer will not sound.

c Press the SETUP/ESC button.

→ The settings for "Alarm Output" and "Buzzer" will be applied and the "Event Setup" pop-up menu will be closed.

Power ON Manual REC

Select ON or OFF to determine whether or not to start recording when the power is turned on by the connected external timer (or the switch).

ON:

Manual recording will start automatically after completing the system check.

OFF:

Manual recording will not start automatically after completing the system check.

Important:

When ON is selected, manual recording will start automatically after completing the system check.

VMD Setup

Select ON or OFF to determine whether to enable or disable the motion detection function for each camera channel.

When ON is selected, perform the settings for the motion detection area for each camera channel. Up to 4 areas can be set for a camera channel for the detection area. Refer to page 115 for further information about the motion detection function.

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "REC & Event" menu.

SETUP MENU

Quick

Display

REC & Event

Network

Advanced Menu

■

REC Type

■

REC Camera

■

Resolution

■

Manual REC

REC Rate

Quality

■

Event REC

REC Rate

Quality

Time

Operation Mode

■

Event Setup

■

Power ON Manual REC

■

VMD Setup

LIVE

QUICK

SETUP

FIELD

25ips / 16CH

FQB

25ips / 16CH

FQB

30s

ALARM

SETUP

OFF

SETUP

z Move the cursor to "VMD Setup" using the arrows button

(C D) and press the SET button.

[Screenshot 2]

The "VMD Setup" pop-up menu will be displayed.

SETUP MENU

Quick

Display

REC & Event VMD Setup

Network

■

REC Type

■

REC Camera

Resolution

Manual REC

CAM3 OFF

Quality

■

OFF

Event REC

REC Rate

CAM8

Time

OFF

Operation Mode

Advanced Menu

■

Event Setup

■

Power ON Manual REC

■

VMD Setup

CAM9

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

QUICK

SETUP

OFF

30s

ALARM

SETUP

OFF

SETUP

LIVE

x Select the camera channel to be set by using the arrows button (C D).

c Rotate the jog dial to select ON for a desired camera channel for which the motion detection function is to be applied, and press the SET button.

[Screenshot 3]

The "VMD Area Setup" window will be displayed.

v Move the cross cursor to a desired point to be set as the start point of the motion detection area using the arrows button, and press the SET button.

Note:

To set all areas on the monitor as the motion detection area, select "ALL AREAS" and press the

SET button.

[Screenshot 4]

The start point of the motion detection area is assigned.

b Move the cross cursor to a desired point to be set as the end point of the motion detection area using the arrows button (C D A B), and press the SET button.

[Screenshot 5]

The motion detection area is set with the start point and the end point as the points at opposite angles of the motion detection area.

■

[Network]

Perform the settings for the network such as the IP address and the gateway address when operating this unit a PC via a network such as a LAN.

SETUP MENU

Quick

Display

REC & Event

Network

■

Line Speed

■

HTTP Port Number

■

DHCP

■

IP Address

■

Subnet Mask

■

Gateway

LIVE

AUTO

00080

OFF

192 168 000 250

255 255 255 000

192 168 000 001

n Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set another motion detection area.

Up to 4 areas can be set. The newly created areas will be named automatically as A, B, C and D in the order of creation.

m To complete the settings, rotate the jog dial to select

"EXIT" on the status bar, and press the SET button.

[Screenshot 6]

The "VMD Setup" window will be closed and the "VMD

Setup" pop-up menu will be displayed.

SETUP MENU

Quick

Display

REC & Event

■

REC Type

REC Camera

Network

■

Resolution

Manual REC

CAM3

CAM4

■

OFF

Event REC

OFF

Time

Operation Mode

Advanced Menu

■

Event Setup

■

Power ON Manual REC

■

VMD Setup

CAM9

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

LIVE

QUICK

SETUP

OFF

30ips / 16CH

FQB

OFF

30s

ALARM

SETUP

OFF

SETUP

, Press the SETUP/ESC button.

→ The "VMD Setup" pop-up menu will be closed.

Notes:

• Refer to page 116 for descriptions of how to delete the motion detection area.

• It is possible to set the sensitivity and the detection mode (method of detection) of each detection area.

Refer to page 116 for further information.

Advanced Menu

Line Speed

The following are available for "Line Speed".

AUTO:

Line speed will be applied automatically.

10-HALF:

10 Mbps half duplex

10-FULL:

10 Mbps full duplex

100-HALF:

100 Mbps half duplex

100-FULL:

100 Mbps full duplex

Note:

When the SETUP MENU is closed after changing the line speed, the unit will automatically restart.

HTTP Port Number

Specify the HTTP port number to be used to transfer images from this unit. It is not necessary to change it for normal use.

DHCP

Select ON or OFF whether or not to use the DHCP server.

When obtaining IP addresses, net mask and a gateway address from the DHCP server, set to ON.

If not, set to OFF and enter those addresses manually.

ON:

Uses the DHCP server.

OFF:

Does not use the DHCP server.

IP Address

Enter an IP address when OFF is selected for "DHCP".

For this unit, enter 4 units from the decimal numbers (0-

254).

Subnet Mask

Enter a subnet mask according to the network configuration when OFF is selected for "DHCP".

Gateway

Enter the gateway address according to the network configuration when OFF is selected for "DHCP".

101

102

■

About the SETUP MENU (Advanced)

SETUP MENU

Advanced

REC Rate

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Quick Menu

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

CAM 1

CAM 2

CAM 3

CAM 4

CAM 5

CAM 6

CAM 7

CAM 8

CAM 9

CAM 10

CAM 11

CAM 12

CAM 13

CAM 14

CAM 15

CAM 16

MANU

AUTO

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

SCHE

1ips

PRE EVT POST EVT

1ips

EMR

1ips

LIVE

SUPER FINE

FINE

NORMAL

EXTENDED

Main menu

Live image

Main area

Submenu

Main menu:

These menus are always displayed on the SETUP MENU (Advanced).

Live image:

Live images from the camera channel that was selected just before the SETUP MENU (Advanced) was displayed, will be displayed in this area.

Submenu:

The setting items of the selected submenu will be displayed in this area.

Main area:

The submenu of the selected main menu will be displayed on the left side of the SETUP MENU (Advanced). The submenus differ depending on the selected main menu.

Notes:

• The SETUP MENU (Advanced) will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA monitor. (It is impossible to display the SETUP

MENU (Advanced) on monitor 1.)

• The same images displayed on monitor 2 will be displayed on the VGA monitor.

■

Item list of the SETUP MENU

Settings menu

System

Basic Setup

Time & Date

User Regist.

User Edit

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Recording

REC Setup

Emergency REC

Description Page

Perform the settings for the basic operation of this unit.

Perform the settings for the time adjustment and display of the time and date.

Perform the settings for the user registration and the user authentication such as user name, password and operational level.

Edit the registered user information.

Delete registered users.

Register the hosts (PCs access this unit via a network) with their information such as IP address and operational level for the host authentication.

Edit the registered hosts.

Delete the registered hosts.

Perform the settings to specify operable functions for each level.

The set contents can be saved or loaded.

106

107

108

109

110

111

Perform the basic settings for recording.

Perform the settings for emergency recording such as recording time and recording rate.

112

113

Settings menu

Event

Event Setup

VMD Setup

Alarm Setup

Terminal Setup

Schedule

Time Table

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

Switcher

Monitor1

Monitor 2

Display

OSD Setup

Monitor1

Monitor2

Comm

Camera Control

PS·Data Setup

RS485 Setup

RS232C Setup

NW Setup 1

NW Setup 2

NTP Setup

Description Page

Perform the settings for the alarm output duration and the buzzer sound when an event (motion detection, video loss, terminal/command alarm) occurs.

Perform the settings for the motion detection area, sensitivity and the detection mode for each camera channel.

Perform the settings for the alarm display duration and alarm suspension duration.

Specify the alarm terminal polarity.

115

118

119

Create timetables for each day of the week, and assign the recording action programs and event action programs to the created timetables.

Up to 4 recording programs can be created. Perform the settings for the recording actions for each program such as image quality and recording rate for each camera channel.

Up to 4 event programs can be created. Perform the settings for each program such as the event action and the auto copy function for each event type.

Assign timetables independently for special days aside from other days.

122

120

121

124

Perform the settings for the image switching on monitor 1 such as the setting of the sequential display or the screen to be displayed at login on monitor 1.

Perform the settings for the image switching on monitor 2 such as the setting of the sequential display or the screen to be displayed at login on monitor 2.

125

127

Perform the display settings such as the settings for the display position of the camera title and the time.

Perform the display settings for monitor 1 such as the camera title display on/off, the alarm display on/off and the time display on/off.

Perform the display settings for monitor 2 such as the display mode (task bar style), the camera title display position, and the camera title display on/off.

128

129

130

Set the communication type to control cameras for each camera channel.

Perform the settings for the PS·Data. It is necessary to perform these settings when connecting an external device such as a controller to the DATA port on the rear panel of this unit.

Perform the settings for the RS485. It is necessary to perform these settings when connecting an RS485 compatible camera to the RS485 (CAMERA) port on the rear panel of this unit.

Perform the settings for the SERIAL (RS232C). It is necessary to perform these settings when connecting a PC to the SERIAL connector on the rear panel of this unit.

Perform the basic network settings. It is necessary to perform these settings when operating this unit via a network such as a LAN. The settings for the user authentication and the host authentication can also be set with these settings.

Perform the network connection settings such as IP addresses and the gateway address. It is necessary to perform these settings when operating this unit via a network such as a LAN.

Perform the NTP server settings such as the NTP server address and the time zone setting. It is necessary to synchronize the clock with the NTP server.

131

132

133

134

135

103

104

Settings menu

Maintenance

REC Rate

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Description Page

Display the recording rate for each recording mode and image quality for each camera channel in list form.

Display hard disk information such as the available disk space on the built-in hard disk and the connected optional extension unit.

Display version information of the software and the hardware and the MAC address.

Set actions to be taken when the available space of the built-in hard disk or of the connected external recording device reaches a specified level.

Set to display a warning when the available space of the built-in hard disk or of the connected external recording device reaches a specified level.

Delete data stored on the hard disk, or format (initialize) the DVD-RAM disk connected to the COPY port.

Display the event log. Refer to page 50 for further information.

Display the error log such as a HDD error log.

Display the time, user name and IP addresses when logging in/out to/from this unit.

136

137

138

139

Note:

Refer to page 140 for further information about the settings using the setup menu of camera.

■

Basic Operation with the SETUP MENU (Advanced)

z Press the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or more when displaying live images.

When "QUICK" is selected for "REC Type" of "REC &

Event" (pages 98 and 112), the SETUP MENU (Quick) will be displayed. In this case, it is possible to display the SETUP MENU (Advanced) by pressing the SET button after selecting "Advanced Menu" on the SETUP

MENU (Quick) using the arrows button (C D).

[Screenshot 1]

The top page of the SETUP MENU (Advanced) will be displayed.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Basic Setup

Time & Date

User Regist.

User Edit

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Quick Menu

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

■

ADMIN Password

*****

■

PSD User

ADMIN

■

Auto Login

Auto Login User

ADMIN

■

Auto Logout

■

Priority

■

"GO TO LAST" before

■

Language

■

Beep(Operation)

■

Buzzer(Error)

■

Shutdown Time

■

Auto Copy

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

LIVE

OFF

Follow the priority.

ENGLISH

10s

OFF

v Perform the settings for each item.

Item selection:

Move the cursor using the arrows button (C D A B).

Change the setting:

Rotate the jog dial.

Pop-up display of the setting item:

Press the SET button when the setting item has the "SETUP" button next to the item name.

Turning pages of the settings menu:

When "PREV/

NEXT PAGE" is displayed on the bottom of the settings menu, move the cursor to the "PREV/NEXT

PAGE" using the arrows button, and then use the arrows button (A B) to turn the pages.

Selecting a submenu again:

Press the SET button.

The cursor will be able to select a submenu again.

Displaying the SETUP MENU (Quick):

Move the cursor to "Quick Menu" using the arrows button (C D

A B), and press the SET button.

b After completing the settings, press the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or more to apply the settings. The

SETUP MENU (Advanced) will be closed.

→ Live images will be displayed again.

x Select a main menu using the arrows button (C D A

B) and press the SET button.

[Screenshot 2]

The submenu of the selected main menu will be displayed.

Important:

If the settings are changed, all login users will be forcibly logged out.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

REC Setup

Emergency REC

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

■

REC Type

■

Recording

■

Power ON Manual REC

■

Manual Recording Channel

■

Color Mode

Embedded REC(Title)

■

Embedded REC(Time&Date)

■

REC Priority

Event

Comm

Quick Menu

■

Audio Allocation Audio1

Audio2

Audio3

Audio4

Schedule

Maintenance

QUICK

OFF

All

COLOR STD

Manual REC

Event REC

Schedule REC

LIVE

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

c Select the submenu using the arrows button (C D) and press the SET button.

When selecting the submenu by the cursor is enabled, press the SETUP/ESC button. The main menu can be selected.

[Screenshot 3]

The setting items will be displayed in the main area and the cursor will move to a setting item.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

REC Setup

Emergency REC

Quick Menu

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

■

Resolution

■

Recording Time

■

Recording Rate and Quality

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

■

Auto Copy

RATE

2.5ips

Quality

SFA

CAM9

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

FIELD

10s

RATE

2.5ips

OFF

LIVE

Quality

SFA

105

106

■

[System] Settings on System

Perform the following system settings required to operate this unit.

●

[Basic Setup] Basic system settings

Perform the following settings for basic operation.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Basic Setup

Time & Date

User Regist.

User Edit

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Quick Menu

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

■

ADMIN Password

*****

■

PSD User

ADMIN

■

Auto Login

Auto Login User

ADMIN

■

Auto Logout

■

Priority

■

"GO TO LAST" before

■

Language

■

Beep(Operation)

■

Buzzer(Error)

■

Shutdown Time

■

Auto Copy

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

LIVE

OFF

Follow the priority.

ENGLISH

10s

OFF

ADMIN Password

Set the password for an administrator.

Enter 4-8 alphanumeric characters.

The same method is used to enter, insert and delete characters as for attaching text information to images. Refer to page 60 about the characters available.

Important:

To enhance the security, change the password for an administrator periodically.

PSD User

When a user operates a controller compatible with PS·Data, operation will be restricted by the priority and operational level of the PSD user.

A PSD user should be one of the users registered in this unit.

Auto Login

Select ON and OFF whether or not to activate the auto login function.

ON:

Activates the auto login function.

OFF:

Does not activate the auto login function. It is necessary to perform the login operation every time this unit is started up.

Auto Login User

When ON is selected for "Auto Login", the user registered as an auto login user in this setting can log into the unit automatically.

An auto login user should be one of the users registered in this unit.

Auto Logout

Select ON or OFF whether or not to activate the auto logout function.

When ON is selected, auto logout will be carried out after a specified time has passed while displaying live images without operation.

OFF:

Does not activate the auto logout function.

1 min/2 min/3 min/4 min/5 min/30 min:

Activates the auto logout function when the selected time has passed after login.

Important:

• The auto logout function will not be activated when ON is selected for "Auto Login".

• Depending on the user level of the auto login user, operable functions may be different.

Priority

Assign operating priorities when multiple users access this unit simultaneously from the following.

Follow the priority:

Operation by a user with a higher priority will be performed. When the priorities of the first and the last accessed user are the same, post-priority will be applied.

Pre-priority:

Operation by the first accessed user will be performed regardless of priority.

Post-priority:

Operation by the last accessed user will be performed regardless of priority.

"GO TO LAST" before

Select time to be skipped to when the "GO TO LAST" button is pressed during playback from the following.

5 s/10 s/30 s/1 min/5 min

Language

Select a language for the SETUP MENU from the following.

JAPANESE/ENGLISH/FRANÇAIS/ESPAÑOL/DEUTSCH/

ITALIANO/RUSSIAN/CHINESE

Important:

Displaying the language of the browser used to access the unit from a PC will not be changed even though this setting is changed.

Beep (Operation)

Select ON or OFF whether or not to sound the buzzer when operating the buttons.

ON:

Sounds the buzzer when operating the buttons.

OFF:

Does not sound the buzzer when operating the buttons.

Buzzer (Error)

Select a buzzer operation when a problem has occurred from the following.

OFF:

Does not sound buzzer when a problem has occurred.

1 s - 30 s (in 1 second intervals)/40 s/50 s/1 min - 5 min

(in 1 minute intervals):

A buzzer will sound for the selected duration after a problem has occurred.

EXT:

The buzzer will sound continuously until the "ALARM

RESET" button on the front panel of the unit is pressed.

Shutdown Time

Select a waiting time before starting the internal processing against the power outage after an outage detection signal has been supplied to the unit from the following.

10 s/20 s/30 s/1 min/2 min/3 min/4 min/5 min

Auto Copy

ON or OFF whether or not to copy recorded images to the copy area on the hard disk or DVD-RAM disk automatically.

OFF:

Does not copy automatically.

COPY1:

Copies recorded images to the DVD-RAM disk connected to the COPY1 port.

COPY1 (ALT):

Copies recorded images with an alteration detection code using the viewer software to the DVD-

RAM disk connected to the COPY1 port.

COPY2:

Copies recorded images to the DVD-RAM disk connected to the COPY2 port.

COPY2 (ALT):

Copies recorded images with an alteration detection code using the viewer software to the DVD-

RAM disk connected to the COPY2 port.

HDD:

Copies recorded images to the copy area on the hard disk of this unit.

Important:

• When OFF is selected, the auto copy function at an event occurrence and emergency recording will not function.

• The auto copy will not work if a DVD-RAM disk drive is not connected even though "COPY 1" or "COPY 2" is selected.

• Images recorded (by pre-event recording) in the prerecording area in the extension unit will not be copied automatically.

• When emergency recording/event recordings are performed frequently, it may be possible that the auto copy function does not function.

• Images to be copied automatically will be 30 minute’s worth of images recorded from the start of emergency recording/event recording.

●

[Time & Date] Setting of the date and time

Perform the following settings of the time and date.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Basic Setup

Time & Date

User Regist.

User Edit

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Quick Menu

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

■

Date Format

■

Time Format

■

Time & Date

01 .

JAN .

04 12 : 00 : 00

■

Auto Adjust Time

Master Time

■

Summer Time(Day Light Savings)

■

Summer Time(Day Light Savings)Table

DD.MMM.YY

12H

SET

OFF

12 :00 AM

AUTO

SETUP

LIVE

Date Format

Select a display format for the date from the following. (Ex.

April 1, 2004)

YY.MM.DD:

04.4.1

MMM.DD.YY:

APR.1.04

DD.MMM.YY:

1.APR.04

Time Format

Select a display format for the time from the following. (Ex.

3 o’ clock in the afternoon)

12h:

3:00:00 PM

24h:

15:00:00

Time & Date

Adjust the current time and date.

Enter year, month, day, hour, minute and second in order, move the cursor to "SET" and press the SET button.

Important:

Recording will stop for around 4 seconds just after setting the date and time.

Auto Adjust Time

Select a method for auto time adjustment from the following.

When "MASTER" is selected, a signal will be supplied from the ALARM/CONTROL connector as the MASTER time (see below) at the specified time.

OFF:

Does not function.

MASTER:

A signal will be supplied from the ALARM/CON-

TROL connector on the rear and the clock of the other devices will be adjusted with reference to the time of this unit.

SLAVE:

A signal will be supplied to the ALARM/CONTROL connector on the rear and the clock of this unit will be adjusted.

Important:

Recording will not be performed for around 4 seconds when changing the present time (accurate to within ±5 seconds) using the time adjustment input (pin no.20) of the ALARM/CONTROL connector on the rear panel.

Master Time

Specify the time when supplying a signal from the

ALARM/CONTROL connector.

Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

Select the method of switching to summer time from the following.

OUT:

Does not function.

IN:

Applies summer time.

AUTO:

Applies summer time in accordance with the setting of summer time (see below).

Summer Time (Day Light Savings) Table

Do the following to specify the start time and date and the end time and date of summer time.

107

108

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "Time & Date" menu.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Basic Setup

Time & Date

User Regist.

User Edit

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Quick Menu

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

■

Date Format

■

Time Format

■

Time & Date

01 .

JAN .

04 12 : 00 : 00

■

Auto Adjust Time

Master Time

■

Summer Time(Day Light Savings)

■

Summer Time(Day Light Savings)Table

DD.MMM.YY

12H

SET

OFF

12 :00 AM

AUTO

SETUP

LIVE

z Move the cursor to "Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

Table" using the arrows button (C D) and press the

SET button.

[Screenshot 2]

The "Summer Time (Day Light Savings) Table" will be displayed.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Basic Setup

Time & Date

User Regist.

User Edit

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Quick Menu

Switcher

■

2 4

Display

D --

Date Format

Time Format

J U N

01 .

OFF

■

OFF --

2 4

D --

Auto Adjust Time

MASTER Time

ON -D

03 Y

Comm

0 1

H --

■

Summer Time(Day Light Saving)

OFF

Summer Time(Day Light Saving)Table

OFF

-M

MMM.DD.YY

OFF

SET

OFF

M 00

LIVE

ON -D -M -Y -H -M

OFF

2 4

J U N

0 1

OFF

OFF -D -M -Y -H -M

OK CANCEL

x Move the cursor to enter the ON or OFF time (year, month, date) for summer time using the arrows button

(C D A B).

[Screenshot 3]

The cursor will move to the selected cell for entry of the ON or OFF time for summer time.

Basic Setup

Time & Date

User Regist.

User Edit

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Quick Menu

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Switcher

■

Date Format

OFF

JAN .

OFF

2 4

Time Format

2 4

J U N

Display

J U N

01 .

MASTER Time

ON -D

03 Y

Comm

0 1

■

Summer Time(Day Light Saving)

M Y

H --

-M

MMM.DD.YY

OFF

LIVE

OFF -D -M -Y -H -M

OFF

2 4

J U N

0 1

OK CANCEL

c Rotate the jog dial to enter the ON or OFF time (year, month, date) for summer time.

v Move the cursor to "OK" and press the SET button.

→ The ON and OFF time for summer time will be applied and the "Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

Table" will be closed.

Notes:

• When you move the cursor to "CANCEL" in step 4 and press the SET button, the setting will be canceled and the "Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

Table" will be closed.

• It is impossible to set time for summer time if the duration between the set time for "OUT" and "IN" is less than an hour.

●

[User Regist.] Registration of a user who operates this unit

After filling out the user information, move the cursor to

"SET" at the lower right of the menu and press the SET button to complete registration.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Basic Setup

Time & Date

User Regist.

User Edit

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Quick Menu

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

■

User Name

■

User Password

■

Level

■

Priority

■

Default Screen

■

Camera Partitioning

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

View/Operate

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

LV1

CAM1

CAM9

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

View/Operate

LIVE

SET

User Name

Enter 4-14 alphanumeric characters for the user name.

The same method is used to enter, insert and delete characters as for attaching text information to images. Refer to page 69.

User Password

Enter 4-8 alphanumeric characters for the password.

The same method is used to enter, insert and delete characters as for attaching text information to images. Refer to page 69.

Important:

Set a unique password, not something that would be easily guessed by a third person. The password also should be memorable.

Level

Select a user level from the following.

Setting of operable functions in each level is described in

"User Level" (Refer to page 110).

LV1/LV2/LV3

Priority

Assign priority (1 (highest) to 16 (lowest)) to users.

Default Screen

Select a camera image to be displayed during the login procedure from the following.

CAM1 - 16:

Displays an image from the selected camera channel.

QUAD1 - 4:

Displays images from camera channels 1 - 4 on a 4-split screen.

QUAD5 - 8:

Displays images from camera channels 5 - 8 on a 4-split screen.

QUAD9 (only for the WJ-HD309A):

Displays an image from camera channel 9 on the upper left area on a 4split screen.

QUAD9 - 12 (only for the WJ-HD316A):

Displays images from camera channels 9 - 12 on a 4-split screen.

QUAD13 - 16 (only for the WJ-HD316A):

Displays images from camera channels 13 - 16 on a 4-split screen.

7SCREEN:

Displays images from camera channels 1 - 7 on a 7-split screen.

9SCREEN (only for the WJ-HD309A):

Displays an image from camera channel 1 - 9 on a 9-split screen.

9SCREEN1 - 9 (only for the WJ-HD316A):

Displays images from camera channels 1 - 9 on a 9-split screen.

9SCREEN10 - 16 (only for the WJ-HD316A):

Displays images from camera channels 10 - 16 on a 9-split screen.

10SCREEN (only for the WJ-HD316A):

Displays images from camera channels 1 - 10 on a 10-split screen.

13SCREEN (only for the WJ-HD316A):

Displays images from camera channels 1 - 13 on a 13-split screen.

16SCREEN (only for the WJ-HD316A):

Displays images from camera channels 1 - 16 on a 16-split screen.

SEQ:

Images will be displayed in the sequential display.

Camera Partitioning

Select a controllable range for each camera channel from the following.

View/Operate:

Displaying live images and operating the camera are possible.

View:

Displaying live images is possible but cameras cannot be operated.

--:

Both displaying live images and operating the camera are impossible.

●

[User Edit] Correction of the registered user information

It is possible to edit the registered user information.

Move the cursor to "User Name" and rotate the jog dial to select the user name.

The registered information will be displayed.

Editing can be performed in the same way as registration.

(Refer to page 108.)

Move the cursor to "EDIT" at the lower right on the menu and press the SET button to complete editing.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Basic Setup

Time & Date

User Regist.

User Edit

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Quick Menu

System Recording Event Schedule

Switcher

■

User Name

Display

■

User Password

■

Level

■

Priority

■

Default Screen

■

Camera Partitioning

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

View/Operate

Comm

CAM9

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

Maintenance

LV1

16 SCREEN

View

LIVE

EDIT

●

[User Delete] Deletion of a registered user

It is possible to delete a registered user.

Move the cursor to "User Name" and rotate the jog dial to select the user name. Move the cursor to "DELETE" and press the SET button.

The selected user will be deleted.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

System

Switcher

■

User Name

Recording

Display

Basic Setup

Time & Date

User Regist.

User Edit

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Quick Menu

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

LIVE

DELETE

●

[Host Regist.] Registration of PC (host) accessible to this unit

Move the cursor to "SET" at the lower right on the menu and press the SET button to complete registration.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Basic Setup

Time & Date

User Regist.

User Edit

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Quick Menu

System Recording Event Schedule

LIVE

Switcher Display

■

Host IP Address

■

Level

■

Priority

■

Default Screen

■

Camera Partitioning

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

View/Operate

Comm

CAM9

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

Maintenance

000 .

000

LV1

CAM1

View/Operate

SET

Host IP Address

Enter the IP address. Move the cursor to "Host IP Address" and rotate the jog dial to enter the IP address. For this unit, enter 4 units from the decimal numbers (0-254).

Notes:

• Entering "*" validates all numbers.

• It is impossible to register "0.0.0.0" or "*.*.*.*".

Level

Select a user level from the following.

Setting of operable functions for each level is described in

"User Level" (Refer to page 110).

LV1/LV2/LV3

Priority

Assign priority (1 (highest) to 16 (lowest)) to hosts.

Default Screen

Select a startup display to be displayed after login from the following.

CAM1 - 16 (for the WJ-HD316A)/CAM 1 - 9 (for the WJ-

HD309A):

Displays live images from the selected camera channel on a single screen.

109

110

QUAD1 - 4:

Displays live images from camera channels 1 -

4 on a 4-split screen.

QUAD5 - 8:

Displays live images from camera channels 5 -

8 on a 4-split screen.

QUAD9 (only for the WJ-HD309A):

Displays an image from camera channel 9 on the upper left area on a 4split screen.

QUAD9 - 12 (only for the WJ-HD316A):

Displays live images from camera channels 9 - 12 on a 4-split screen.

QUAD13 - 16 (only for the WJ-HD316A):

Displays live images from camera channels 13 - 16 on a 4-split screen.

9SCREEN (only for the WJ-HD309A):

Displays an image from camera channel 1 - 9 on a 9-split screen.

9SCREEN1 - 9 (for the WJ-HD316A):

Displays images from camera channels 1 - 9 on a 9-split screen.

9SCREEN10 - 16 (only for the WJ-HD316A):

Displays images from camera channels 10 - 16 on a 9-split screen.

16SCREEN (only for the WJ-HD316A):

Displays images from camera channels 1 - 16 on a 16-split screen.

SEQ:

Images will be displayed in the sequential display.

Camera Partitioning

Select a controllable range for each camera channel from the following.

View/Operate:

Displaying live images and operating the camera are possible.

View:

Displaying live images is possible but cameras cannot be operated.

--:

Both displaying live images and operating camera are impossible.

●

[Host Edit] Correction of the registered host information

It is possible to edit the registered host information.

Move the cursor to "Host IP Address" and rotate the jog dial to select the host IP address.

The registered information will be displayed.

Editing can be performed in the same way as registration.

(Refer to page 109.)

Move the cursor to "EDIT" at the lower right on the menu and press the SET button to complete editing.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Basic Setup

Time & Date

User Regist.

User Edit

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Quick Menu

System Recording Event Schedule

View

EDIT

LIVE

Switcher Display

■

Host IP Address

■

Level

■

Priority

■

Default Screen

■

Camera Partitioning

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

View/Operate

Comm

CAM9

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

Maintenance

000 .

LV1

16 SCREEN

000 .

000

●

[Host Delete] Deletion of a registered host

It is possible to delete a registered host.

Move the cursor to "Host Delete" and rotate the jog dial to select the host. Move the cursor to "DELETE" and press the

SET button.

The selected host will be deleted.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

■

Host IP Address

Basic Setup

Time & Date

User Regist.

User Edit

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Quick Menu

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

0. 0. 0. 0

DELETE

LIVE

●

[User Level] Setting of the operation level

Set operable functions at each user level (LV 1/LV 2/

LV 3).

Rotate the jog dial to display "b" to enable operation.

Leave it blank to disable operation.

Refer to the table on the next page for each function.

The default settings are shown as below.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Basic Setup

Time & Date

User Regist.

User Edit

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Quick Menu

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Setup

Setup Status

Camera Setup

Event Log Status

Access Log Status

Error Log Status

Alarm Reset

Alarm Suspended Time

Copy

Normal Recording Erase

Event Recording Erase

Manual REC Operation

Playback Operation

N/W Access

SChedule

Maintenance

LV1 LV2 LV3

LIVE

Each parameter of the user level is as follows:

LV1:

Possible to perform all the operations (Administrators)

LV2:

Possible to refer the settings of the unit and the access log, and to perform the alarm reset (Head of operators)

LV3:

Possible to monitor or play the images (Operators)

●

Functions that can be enabled/disabled

The following functions can be enabled/disabled according to the user level.

Function

Setup

Setup Status

Camera Setup

Event Log Status

Error Log Status

Access Log Status

Alarm Reset

Alarm Suspended Time

Copy

Normal Recording Erase

Event Recording Erase

Manual REC Operation

Playback Operation

N/W Access

Description

The SETUP MENU is displayed and the settings can be performed.

Only the SETUP MENU can be displayed. The settings cannot be performed.

The setting menu of the camera is displayed and the settings can be performed.

The SETUP MENU is displayed and you can refer to the event log. (Refer to page

138.) You also can refer to the network log. Refer to the Network Operating

Instructions (PDF) for further information.

The SETUP MENU is displayed and you can refer to the error log. (Refer to page

138.)

The SETUP MENU is displayed and you can refer to the access log. (Refer to page

139.)

An event operation can be canceled. (Refer to page 52.)

An event operation can be suppressed. (Refer to page 52.)

A recorded image can be manually copied. (Refer to page 53.)

Image data in the normal recording area of the hard disk can be manually deleted.

Image data in the event recording area of the hard disk can be manually deleted.

Manual recording can be started and stopped.

A recorded image can be played.

This unit can be logged into from a PC via a network.

●

[Save/Load] Saving and loading of settings of the SETUP MENU

It is possible to save the settings of the SETUP MENU in this unit.

It is also possible to call up saved settings. (Load)

Move the cursor to "SAVE" or "LOAD" and press the SET button.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Basic Setup

Time & Date

User Regist.

User Edit

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Quick Menu

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

■

User Setup Save

■

User Setup Load

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

SAVE

LOAD

LIVE

111

112

■

[Recording]

Perform the settings for the basic recording (REC Setup) and the emergency recording.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

REC Setup

Emergency REC

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

■

REC Type

■

Recording

■

Power ON Manual REC

■

Manual Recording Channel

■

Color Mode

Embedded REC(Title)

Embedded REC(Time&Date)

■

REC Priority

Event

Comm

Quick Menu

■

Audio Allocation

Audio1

Audio2

Audio3

Audio4

Schedule

Maintenance

QUICK

OFF

All

COLOR STD

Manual REC

Event REC

Schedule REC

LIVE

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

●

[REC Setup] Perform the settings for the basic recording

Perform the following settings for the basic recording.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

REC Setup

Emergency REC

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

■

REC Type

■

Recording

■

Power ON Manual REC

■

Manual Recording Channel

■

Color Mode

■

Embedded REC(Title)

■

Embedded REC(Time&Date)

■

REC Priority

Event

Comm

Quick Menu

■

Audio Allocation

Audio1

Audio2

Audio3

Audio4

Schedule

Maintenance

QUICK

OFF

All

COLOR STD

Manual REC

Event REC

Schedule REC

LIVE

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

Select "QUICK" or "ADVANCED" for validation of the recording settings.

QUICK:

The recording settings set on the SETUP MENU

(Quick) will be validated when recording.

ADVANCED:

The recording settings set on the SETUP

MENU (Advanced) will be validated when recording.

Recording

Select ON or OFF to record or not record.

ON:

Recording will be performed.

OFF:

No recording will be performed.

Important:

When OFF is selected for this setting, no recording will be performed. Select ON for normal use except when it is necessary to stop recording forcibly such as when a problem has occurred with the unit.

Power ON Manual REC

Select ON or OFF to determine whether or not to start recording when the power is turned on by the connected external timer (or the switch).

ON:

Manual recording will start automatically after completing the system check.

OFF:

Manual recording will not start automatically after completing the system check.

Important:

When ON is selected, manual recording will start automatically after completing the system check.

Manual Recording Channel

Select a camera channel for manual recording from the following. Refer to page 21 for manual recording.

MON2:

Images from the camera channel currently displayed on monitor 2 will be recorded.

ALL:

Images from all the camera channels will be recorded.

Important:

When operating on monitor 1 when "MON2" is selected for "Manual Recording Channel" on the "REC Setup" menu, all camera channels will be recorded by manual recording instead of recording the camera channel displayed on monitor 2.

When "MON2" is selected, images from a camera channel for another manual recording that has started later will be recorded regardless of the operation using the buttons on the front panel or via a network.

Color Mode

Select the color mode for recording from the following.

COLOR FINE:

Record images in a high resolution color

COLOR STD:

Record images in a standard resolution color

B/W:

Record images in black and white

Important:

When "B/W" is selected for the color mode, do not select "SFA", "FQA", "NQA" or "EXA" for the image quality. Otherwise, it may cause deterioration of the image quality.

Embedded REC (Title)

Select ON or OFF to determine whether or not to record a displayed camera title together as a part of the recorded image.

ON:

Record camera titles together as a part of the recorded image.

OFF:

Does not record camera titles.

Note:

In case that "ON" is selected for "Embedded REC

(Title)" and also "R-UPPER" or "R-LOWER" is selected for the camera title position, when playing images recorded with the resolution setting of "SIF", a part of the embedded camera title may not be displayed.

Embedded REC (Time & Date)

Select ON or OFF to determine whether or not to record the displayed time and date together.

ON:

Record the time and date together as a part of the recorded image.

OFF:

Does not record the time and date.

Important:

• It is possible to select ON or OFF to determine whether or not to display the camera title during playback even though OFF is selected. (Refer to page 130.)

• When ON is selected, it is impossible to hide the camera title and the time and date. (Refer to page 130.)

• When playing images recorded after selecting "ON" for

"Embedded REC (Time & Date)" (page 112), the embedded abbreviation of the recording mode (event recording/emergency recording) will be displayed.

The abbreviations are as follows:

EVT:

Pre-/post-event recording

EMR:

Emergency recording

The abbreviation display position differs depending on the selected time and date display position for "Time &

Date Display Position" (page 130).

L-UPPER/R-UPPER:

The abbreviation will be displayed below the time and date displayed at the upper left/right of the screen.

L-LOWER/R-LOWER:

The abbreviation will be displayed above the time and date displayed at the lower left/right of the screen.

REC Priority

Assigns priorities to recording modes. Assigns priorities 1

(highest) - 3 (lowest) to each recording mode. When two or more recordings are performed in the same period, only a recording with the highest priority will be performed.

Refer to page 21 for further information about each recording mode.

Important:

The priority of event recording will be applied for the priority of pre-/post-event recording. When pre-/postevent recording is to be performed, it is impossible to perform manual recording/schedule recording.

Audio Allocation

Allocates audio from the audio input connectors (1 - 4) on the rear panel of the unit to camera channels.

Allocate audio in accordance with the channels of the connected cameras. When OFF is selected, audio will not be heard.

Important:

• When a live image from the audio assigned camera channel is displayed on a single screen on monitor 2, audio will be heard. When displaying on a multi-screen, audio will not be heard.

• When images from the audio assigned camera channel are displayed on a single screen, recorded audio will be heard. When displaying on a multi-screen, recorded audio will not be heard.

• Audio will be recorded regardless of whether you are displaying on a single screen or a multi-screen.

• Audio will not be recorded during pre-event recording that is performed in the HDD pre-recording area.

• Audio may be recorded fragmentary occasionally.

●

[Emergency REC] Perform the settings for emergency recording

Perform the settings for emergency recording such as the recording time or recording rate for emergency recording.

Refer to page 22 for further information about emergency recording.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

REC Setup

Emergency REC

Quick Menu

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

■

Resolution

■

Recording Time

■

Recording Rate and Quality

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

■

Auto Copy

RATE

2.5ips

Quality

SFA

CAM9

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

FIELD

10s

RATE

2.5ips

OFF

LIVE

Quality

SFA

Resolution

Select a recording resolution from the following.

FRAME 3D ON:

High resolution (720 x 576), with camera shake compensation

FRAME 3D OFF:

High resolution (720 x 576)

FIELD:

Standard resolution (720 x 288)

SIF:

Low resolution (360 x 288)

Important:

• It is recommended to set the same value for the resolution of emergency recording as the resolution of manual recording, event recording and schedule recording.

• Recording will not be performed for around 4 seconds from the beginning of emergency recording when the resolution is switched.

• Recording will not be performed for around 4 seconds just after emergency recording has finished.

Recording Time

Perform the settings for the recording time and recording action for emergency recording.

The following are available for the recording time.

1 s - 10 s (in 1 second intervals)

20 s/30 s

1 min - 10 min (in 1 minute intervals)

20 min/30 min/40 min/50 min/60 min

MANUAL:

Recording will continue while the external switch is being held down.

CONTINUE:

Recording will not stop until the ALARM

RESET button on the front panel of the unit is pressed.

Recording Rate and Quality

Perform the settings for the recording rate and image quality for emergency recording.

The following are available for the recording rate.

OFF/1 ips/1.7 ips/2.5 ips/4.2 ips/5 ips/6.3 ips/8.3 ips/

12.5 ips/25 ips/50 ips

113

114

Important:

• When OFF is selected for a specified camera channel, images from a camera channel set to OFF will not be recorded.

• When "FRAME 3D ON" or "FRAME 3D OFF" is selected, the total recording rates of CAM 1 - CAM 16 (for the

WJ-HD316A) must be less than 25 ips.

• When "FIELD" is selected, the total recording rates of

CAM 1 - CAM 16 (for the WJ-HD316A) must be less than 50 ips.

• When "SIF" is selected, the total recording rates of CAM

1 - CAM 16 (for the WJ-HD316A) must be less than

100 ips.

• When "FRAME 3D ON", "FRAME 3D OFF" or "SIF" is selected, it is impossible to select 50 ips.

• When the total of the recording rates of camera channels 1 - 16 is set to the maximum (50 ips when FIELD is selected, 100 ips when SIF is selected), the recording rate of two of the camera channels to which the lowest and the second lowest recording rates are set will be lower than the set recording rate. (When the lowest recording rate is applied to three of the camera channels, this may happen to two of the three channels.)

The following are available for the image quality.

SFA/SFB:

Top quality (SUPER FINE)

FQA/FQB:

High quality (FINE)

NQA/NQB:

Standard quality (NORMAL)

EXA/EXB:

Low quality (EXTENDED)

**A is suitable for less dynamic images.

**B is suitable for more dynamic images.

Important:

When "B/W" is selected for the color mode, do not select "SFA", "FQA", "NQA" or "EXA" for the image quality. Otherwise, the image quality may become poor.

Auto Copy

Select ON or OFF to set whether or not to automatically copy images recorded by emergency recording onto the copy area on the built-in hard disk or DVD-RAM disk.

Important:

When OFF is selected for "Auto Copy" on "Basic setup" of "System", the auto copy function will not work after emergency recording even though ON is selected for this setting. Select "HDD", "COPY 1" or "COPY 2" for

"Auto Copy".

■

[Event] Function for Events

Perform the settings for event actions of each event type

(motion detection, video loss, command alarm and terminal alarm).

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Event Setup

VMD Setup

Alarm Setup

Terminal Setup

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

■

VMD

■

Video Loss

■

Terminal/Command Alarm

Schedule

Maintenance

SETUP

LIVE

Quick Menu

●

[Event Setup] Settings for the alarm output duration and the buzzer duration

Perform the settings for the alarm output duration and the buzzer sound duration for each event type (motion detection, video loss, terminal/command alarm).

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Event Setup

VMD Setup

Alarm Setup

Terminal Setup

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

■

VMD

■

Video Loss

■

Terminal/Command Alarm

Schedule

Maintenance

SETUP

LIVE

Quick Menu

The following are available for the buzzer sound duration.

When OFF is selected, a buzzer will not sound.

(s: second, m: minute)

OFF:

The buzzer will not sound.

1 s - 30 s (in 1 second intervals)

/40 s/50 s/1 min/2 min/3 min/4 min/5 min

EXT:

The buzzer will continue until the ALARM RESET button is pressed.

●

[VMD Setup] Perform the settings for the motion detection function

Select ON or OFF to determine whether to enable or disable the motion detection function for each camera channel.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Event Setup

VMD Setup

Alarm Setup

Terminal Setup

Quick Menu

System

Switcher

■

CAM1

■

CAM2

■

CAM3

■

CAM4

■

CAM5

■

CAM6

■

CAM7

■

CAM8

■

CAM9

■

CAM10

■

CAM11

■

CAM12

■

CAM13

■

CAM14

■

CAM15

■

CAM16

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

OFF

LIVE

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Event Setup

VMD Setup

Alarm Setup

Terminal Setup

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

■

VMD

■

Video Loss Setup

■

Terminal/Command Alarm Setup

■

Alarm Output

■

Buzzer

1 0 s

SETUP

LIVE

O K CANCEL

Quick Menu

The following are available for the alarm output duration.

When OFF is selected, the alarm output will not be supplied.

(s: second, m: minute)

OFF:

No alarm output is supplied.

1 s - 30 s (in 1 second intervals)/40 s/50 s/1 min/2 min/

3 min/4 min/5 min

EXT:

Alarm output will continue until the ALARM RESET button is pressed.

Important:

The alarm output duration cannot be set for video loss.

Signals will be supplied continuously from the camera error output terminal (pin no. 17) of the ALARM/CON-

TROL connector on the rear panel during the period when the video signal is lost. (Refer to page 87.)

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the camera channel selection menu of the "VMD Setup" window.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Event Setup

VMD Setup

Alarm Setup

Terminal Setup

Quick Menu

System

Switcher

■

CAM1

■

CAM2

■

CAM3

■

CAM4

■

CAM5

■

CAM6

■

CAM7

■

CAM8

■

CAM9

■

CAM10

■

CAM11

■

CAM12

■

CAM13

■

CAM14

■

CAM15

■

CAM16

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

OFF

LIVE

z Rotate the jog dial to select ON for a desired camera channel for which the motion detection function is to be applied, and press the SET button.

115

[Screenshot 2]

The "VMD Setup" window will be displayed.

●

Delete the motion detection area

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "VMD Setup" window.

x Move the cross cursor to a desired point to be set as the start point of the motion detection area using the arrows button (C D A B), and press the SET button.

Note:

To set all areas on the monitor as the motion detection area, select "ALL AREAS" and press the

SET button.

[Screenshot 3]

The start point of the motion detection area is assigned.

z Rotate the jog dial to select "DELETE AREA" on the status bar.

Note:

After selecting "DELETE ALL AREAS", pressing the SET button will delete all of the motion detection areas.

[Screenshot 2]

The cross cursor will be displayed on the "VMD Setup" window.

116 c Move the cross cursor to a desired point to be set as the end point of the motion detection area using the arrows button (C D A B), and press the SET button.

[Screenshot 4]

The motion detection area is set with the start point and the end point as the points at opposite angles of the motion detection area.

x Move the cross cursor onto an area to be deleted using the arrows button (C D A B), and press the SET button.

c To complete the settings, press the SET button after selecting "EXIT" on the status bar by rotating the jog dial.

→ The "VMD Setup" window will be closed.

Set the sensitivity

Set the sensitivity for the created motion detection area.

Sensitivity can be set for each area.

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "VMD Setup" window.

v Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set another motion detection area.

Up to 4 areas can be set. The newly created areas will be named automatically as A, B, C and D in the order of creation.

b To complete the settings, rotate the jog dial to select

"EXIT" on the status bar, and press the SET button.

→ The "VMD Setup" window will be closed.

z Press the SET button after selecting "SENSITIVITY" by rotating the jog dial.

Notes:

• Depending on the set positions of the motion detection areas, the sensitivity indications of the detection areas may be displayed overlapping each other.

• Depending on the set position of the detection area, a part of the sensitivity indication of the detection area may not be displayed.

[Screenshot 2]

The sensitivity of the selected detection area will be displayed.

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "VMD Setup" window.

z Press the SET button after selecting "VMD MODE" by rotating the jog dial.

[Screenshot 2]

The detection mode menu will be displayed.

x Move the cross cursor to select an area using the arrows button (C D A B).

c Select the sensitivity for the selected area by rotating the jog dial from the following.

OFF:

No motion will be detected in this area.

LOW:

Low sensitivity

MID:

Standard sensitivity

HIGH:

High sensitivity

Note:

When a motion is detected with the selected sensitivity, the motion detection area where the motion was detected will turn red and the buzzer will start sounding.

v Set the sensitivity for all the detection areas by repeating steps 2 and 3.

b To complete the settings, rotate the jog dial to select

"EXIT" on the status bar, and press the SET button.

→ The "VMD Setup" window will be closed.

Set the detection mode

Perform the settings of the detection mode (method of detection) in the set detection area. Specifying a method of detection in a detection area is available by setting the detection mode.

x Set the detection mode.

Move the cursor to the desired detection mode using the arrows button (C D A B).

Move the cursor on the desired detection mode using the arrows button (A B) and check the radio button next to the selected mode using the jog dial.

Refer to the following for further information about each of the detection modes.

<ANY AREA>

An event action will be performed according to the settings when "motion" is detected in any of the set motion detection areas.

<VECTOR>

Move the cursor to an area for the settings of VECTOR using the arrows button (C D A B) and select an area using jog dial. Move the cursor to the parameter box of the selected area using the arrows button (A B), and then rotate the jog dial to select an interval time for an object moving between each area from the following.

–/5 s/10 s/20 s/30 s/40 s/50 s/1 min

<DURATION>

Move the cursor to the parameter box of each area using the arrows button (C D A B) and select a moving duration for an object in each area from the following using the jog dial.

0 s/5 s/10 s/20 s/30 s/40 s/50 s/1 min c After completing the settings, press the SETUP/ESC button.

117

118 v Rotate the jog dial to select "EXIT" on the status bar, and press the SET button.

→ The "VMD Setup" window will be closed.

About the Detection mode

Perform the settings of the detection mode (method of detection) in the set detection area. Specifying a method of detection in a detection area is available by setting the detection mode.

There are three detection modes as follows.

Important:

Activating two or more detection modes simultaneously is not possible.

<ANY AREA (to detect "motion" in the area)>

An event action will be performed according to the settings when "motion" is detected in any of the set motion detection areas.

<DURATION (to detect objects that keep moving in the area)>

An event action will be performed according to the settings when an object keeps moving for the set period in the detection area. For example, in case of the following settings; 10 sec. for the areas A and B, 20 sec. for area

C and 30 sec. for area D:

An event action will be performed when an object keeps moving for 10 seconds in area A or B, or for 20 seconds in area C, or for 30 seconds in area D.

10 s

Any motion will be detected anywhere in the A, B, C, D areas.

<VECTOR (to detect object moving to a certain direction)>

An event action will be performed according to the settings when an object moves within the set time to the other detection area in the set order.

10 s

A B

20 s

C D

10 s

The following is an example.

Motion is detected in area B within 10 seconds after being detected in area A.

Motion is detected in area C within 20 seconds after being detected in area B.

Motion is detected in area D within 10 seconds after being detected in area C.

When all of the above have occurred, an event action will be performed.

20 s

30 s

●

[Alarm Setup] Perform the settings for the alarm auto reset and alarm disarm

Perform the settings for the alarm display duration. The alarm display will automatically disappear when the display duration has passed. (Alarm Auto Reset)

Perform the settings to suspend the set duration when the same type of event (motion detection, video loss, terminal alarm, command alarm) has occurred sequentially so that the event action will not be performed each time. (Alarm

Disarm)

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Event Setup

VMD Setup

Alarm Setup

Terminal Setup

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

■

Alarm Auto Reset

■

Alarm Disarm Time

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

OFF

LIVE

Quick Menu

Alarm Auto Reset

The following are possible for the alarm auto reset.

When OFF is selected, the alarm display will not automatically disappear.

To erase the alarm display, press the ALARM RESET button.

OFF/1 s - 30 s (in 1 second intervals)

40 s/50 s/1 min/2 min/3 min/4 min/5 min

Alarm Disarm Time

The following are possible for the alarm disarm.

2 s - 10 s (in 1 second intervals)

●

[Terminal Setup] Perform the settings for the alarm terminal polarity.

Select how to supply the signal to the alarm terminal.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Event Setup

VMD Setup

Alarm Setup

Terminal Setup

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

■

Terminal Setup

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

N.O.

LIVE

Quick Menu

N.O.:

Signals will be supplied when short-circuited.

(Normally Open)

N.C.:

Signals will be supplied when open-circuited.

(Normally Closed)

Note:

It is possible to set polarities for each of the alarm inputs 1-16 respectively using a PC via a network.

119

120

■

[Schedule] Settings for the recording/event action schedule

Perform the settings for the recording schedules of recording and event action by designating a day of the week and time.

A day can be divided into up to 6 time zones, and recording programs and event action programs can be assigned to each time zone to create a recording schedule.

Up to 4 normal recording programs (REC Program) and up to 4 event action programs (Event Program) can be created. Perform the settings for the REC Program: resolution and recording rate. Perform the settings for the Event

Program: action mode for each event type and auto copy.

It is possible to create special days apart from the normal schedule, and a recording program of another day of the week can be switched to a special day’s program automatically.

Flowchart on how to create a schedule

Follow the procedures below to create schedules.

Important:

• In the following cases, recording will not be performed for around 4 seconds:

• When resolution is switched such as when a different resolution is set depending on different time zones

• When the SETUP MENU is closed after changing the settings

Recording Rate and Image Quality for Each

Camera Channel

Perform the settings for recording rate, image quality and recording duration for each camera channel (The settings for recording duration can be performed only for pre-event recording and post-event recording.).

OFF/0.1 ips/0.2 ips/0.3 ips/0.4 ips/0.5 ips/1 ips/1.7 ips/

2.5 ips/4.2 ips/5 ips/6.3 ips/8.3 ips/12.5 ips/25 ips/50 ips

Create REC Program/Event Program.

(aPage 120 and 121)

Create a timetable. (aPage 122)

Assign REC Program/Event Program to a timetable.

(aPage 122)

●

[REC Program] Create a recording program

Perform the settings of resolution, and the settings of recording rate and image quality for each camera channel.

Up to 4 recording programs can be created.

Recording Program 1

SETUP MENU

■

Time Table

System

Recording Table

■

Total REC Rate

12AM

Recording

Display

SCHEDULE

FIELD

Event

6AM

Comm

PRE EVENT

12PM

QUALITY QUALITY TIME

REC Program

CAM1

RATE

2.5ips

CAM3

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

CAM9

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

Quick Menu

2.5ips

TUE

FQB

WED

FQB

THU

FQB

FRI

FQB

SAT

FQB

SUN

FQB

EVERY

FQB

EXT.

FQB

REC:

OFF

RATE

OFF

FQB

OFF

RATE

OFF

P3 P4

FQB

10s

Shedule

EVT:

O K P1

40 ips

6PM

POST EVENT

QUALITY

1ips

RATE

1ips

FQB

TIME

30s

LIVE

12AM

Important:

• When the total of the recording rate of camera channels

1 - 16 is set to the maximum (50 ips when FIELD is selected, 100 ips when SIF is selected), the recording rate of two of the camera channels to which the lowest and the second lowest recording rates are set will be lower than the set recording rate. (When the lowest recording rate is applied to three of the camera channels, this may happen to two of the three channels.)

• The maximum rate for each camera channel differs depending on the resolution as follows.

FRAME 3D ON/FRAME 3D OFF:

25 ips

FIELD:

50 ips

SIF:

25 ips

• The total of the recording rates of camera channels must be as follows.

FRAME 3D ON/FRAME 3D OFF:

25 ips or less

FIELD:

50 ips or less

SIF:

100 ips or less

When the total recording rate becomes more than the above values, the sections displaying the maximum recording rates for each camera channel will turn red, and it will be impossible to close the recording program window. In this case, lower the recording rate that has turned red to a value less than the above values.

Resolution

FRAME 3D ON:

High resolution (720 x 576) with the motion blur compensation

FRAME 3D OFF:

High resolution (720 x 576)

FIELD:

Standard resolution (720 x 288)

SIF:

Low resolution (360 x 288)

The following are available for the image quality.

SFA/SFB:

Top quality (SUPER FINE)

FQA/FQB:

High quality (FINE)

NQA/NQB:

Standard quality (NORMAL)

EXA/EXB:

Low quality (EXTENDED)

**A is suitable for less dynamic images.

**B is suitable for more dynamic images.

Note:

When "FRAME 3D ON" is selected, it is possible to record a moving object with less blurring. However, fuzzy images may sometimes be displayed.

The following are available for the recording duration (only for event pre-recording and event post-recording).

1 s - 10 s (in 1 second intervals)

20 s/30 s/1 - 10 min (in 1 minute intervals)

20 - 60 min (in 10 minutes intervals)

MAN. (MANUAL):

The recording duration will be as follows depending on the event type.

• At a motion detection: For 8 seconds

• At a video loss occurrence: During a video loss occurrence

• At a terminal alarm occurrence: During the supply of a signal

• At a command alarm: For 8 seconds

CON. (CONTINUE):

Recording will be performed continuously until the ALARM RESET button is pressed.

Notes:

• When "MAN." is selected for the recording duration, recording will be performed for 8 seconds at least at an event occurrence as long as the alarm is not canceled.

• Available recording duration for pre-event recording will differ depending on the settings of "Resolution" and

"Recording Rate and Quality" for pre-event recording as below:

SIF

1.7

2.5

4.2

6.3

8.3

12.5

Recording rate

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

6 s

4 s

3 s

2 s

30 s

10 s

7 s

1 s

FRAME 3D ON

FRAME 3D OFF

5 min

2 min

1 min

FIELD

7 s

4 s

2 s

1 s

20 s

10 s

9 s

10 min

5 min

3 min

2 min

1 min

30 s

20 s

10 s

9 s

4 s

20 min

10 min

6 min

5 min

4 min

2 min

1 min

• When a pre-recording area is created in an optional extension unit (WJ-HDE300 series), it is possible to perform pre-event recording for up to 60 minutes according to the resolution, recording rate and disk space for pre-event recording. Refer to page 148 for descriptions of how to create the pre-recording area.

• Pre-event recording for the camera channel that has the pre-recording area in the extension unit will always be performed on the pre-recording area.

• When a value that is impossible to be applied is set for the pre-event recording, the relevant value will turn red, and it will be impossible to close the recording program window. In this case, lower the recording rate that has turned red.

Recording Program 1

■

Resolution

■

Recording Table

■

Total REC Rate

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

MANUAL

RATE QUALITY

2.5ips

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM15

CAM16

2.5ips

CAM8

CAM9

2.5ips

CAM10

CAM11

CAM14

2.5ips

CAM12

2.5ips

CAM13

2.5ips

FQB

SCHEDULE

RATE QUALITY

OFF

FQB

FQB OFF

OFF

FQB

FQB OFF

OFF

FQB

FQB OFF

OFF

FQB

FIELD

50 ips

40 ips

RATE

OFF

PRE EVENT

QUALITY

FQB

OFF

FQB

TIME

10s

OFF

FQB

10s

OFF

FQB

10s

POST EVENT

RATE QUALITY TIME

1ips

FQB

30s

1ips

FQB

30s

O K CANCEL

• When the recording rate is low, images may be recorded for a longer duration than the set pre-event recording duration.

• Pre-event recording will not be performed for a camera channel whose post-event recording rate is OFF.

• Audio will be recorded up to for 16 seconds before the event occurrence. However, audio will not be recorded during pre-event recording that is being performed in the HDD pre-recording area.

• In case that the pre-event recording is to be performed, when two or more events occur continuously in a moment, the start time of the post-event recording of the second event and later will be delayed respectively.

(The actual time and date of the event occurrences will be recorded on the event log.) In this case, the start time of the pre-event recording will be delayed automatically.

When performing the pre-event recording in an environment where two or more events may occur at short times frequently, it is recommended to set the prerecording duration longer.

Important:

Pre-event recording image only just recorded will be deleted in the following cases:

• When the SETUP MENU is closed after changing the settings

• When post-event recording is newly performed

• When the time zone of a schedule switched and recording had just started

• When the date has been changed

●

[Event Program] Create event programs for an event occurrence

Perform the settings of event action for each event type

(motion detection, video loss, terminal/command alarm) or of auto copy.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Time Table

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

■

Event Program 1

■

Event Program 2

■

Event Program 3

■

Event Program 4

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

SETUP

LIVE

Quick Menu

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Time Table

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

■

Event Program 1

■

Event Program 2

■

Event Program 3

■

Event Action 4

Event Program 1

■

VMD

■

Video Loss

■

Terminal/Command Alarm

O K

Schedule

Maintenance

SETUP

CANCEL

LIVE

Quick Menu

121

122

VMD

Perform the settings of event action at a motion detection or the settings of the auto copy function.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Time Table

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

■

Event Program 1

■

Event Program 2

■

Event Program 3

■

Event Program 4

■

Operation Mode

■

Auto Copy

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

SETUP

ALARM

OFF

CANCEL

LIVE

Quick Menu

Perform the settings for the following operation mode. Refer to page 50 for further information about each operation mode.

ACT DET (Activity Detection Mode):

Performs only recording, writing an event log and camera movement to a preset position at an event occurrence. Other event actions will not be performed.

ALARM (Alarm Mode):

Performs every event action according to the settings.

OFF:

Performs only recording of the event log. Other event actions will not be performed.

Auto copy is the function to copy recorded images automatically onto the copy area of the hard disk or the DVD-

RAM disk.

Select ON or OFF to enable or disable the auto copy function.

ON:

Enable the auto copy function

OFF:

Disable the auto copy function

Important:

• When "OFF" is selected for "Auto Copy" of "Basic Setup" on "System", the auto copy function will not work even though "ON" is selected for this setting.

Select "HDD", "COPY 1" or "COPY 2" for "Auto Copy".

• Images recorded (by pre-event recording) in the prerecording area in the extension unit will not be copied automatically.

Video Loss

Perform the settings of an event action at a video loss or the settings of the auto copy function.

The contents to be set are the same as the settings for

"VMD" above.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Time Table

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

■

Event Program 1

■

Event Program 2

■

Event Program 3

■

Event Program 4

■

Operation Mode

■

Auto Copy

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

SETUP

ALARM

OFF

CANCEL

LIVE

Quick Menu

Terminal/Command alarm

Perform the settings of an event action at a terminal/command alarm occurrence or the settings of the auto copy function.

The contents to be set are the same as the settings for

"VMD" above.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Time Table

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

■

Event Program 1

■

Event Program 2

■

Event Program 3

Event Program 4

■

Operation Mode

■

Auto Copy

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

SETUP

ALARM

OFF

CANCEL

LIVE

Quick Menu

●

[Time Table] Assignment of REC Program and Event Program after setting the time zone

Create recording timetables for each day of the week, and assign REC Program and Event Program to each timetable.

Up to 6 recording programs can be created.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Time Table

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

Quick Menu

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

LIVE

12AM 6AM 12PM

MON

TUE

WED

THU

FRI

SAT

SUN

DAILY

EXT

REC

PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4

EVT

6PM 12AM

PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4

Do the following to create timetables.

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation after displaying the timetable window.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Time Table

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

Quick Menu

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

LIVE

12AM 6AM 12PM

MON

TUE

WED

THU

FRI

SAT

SUN

DAILY

EXT

REC

PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4

EVT

6PM 12AM

PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4

z Press the SET button.

[Screenshot 2]

The pop-up setting menu of the timetable for every day of the week will be displayed.

The cursor will be displayed and will move to "MON"

(Monday).

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Time Table

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

System

Switcher

MON REC

EVT

TUE

REC

EVT

WED

THU

FRI

SAT

SUN

REC

EVT

REC

EVT

REC

EVT

REC

EVT

REC

EVT

DAILY

REC

EVT

EXT

REC

EVT

Quick Menu

Recording Event Schedule

REC PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4

EVT

CANCEL

PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4

x Select a day of the week using the arrows button (C D) and press the SET button.

Note:

When a signal is supplied from the ALARM/CON-

TROL connector on the rear panel the external recording mode changeover terminal (pin no. 24) of the unit will work with the set timetable for "EXT."

[Screenshot 3]

The pop-up settings menu of the timetable for the selected day of the week will be displayed.

SETUP MENU

System Recording

Advanced

Time Table

Display

Copy the Other Time Table

New Time Table Setup

REC Program

Period 1

Period 2

12 : 00 AM

08 : 00 AM

Event Program

Special Days

Period 3

Period 4

12 : 00 PM

01 : 00 PM

Period 5

Period 6

05 : 00 PM

09 : 00 PM

Event Schedule

Comm

TUE

Maintenance

08 : 00 AM

12 : 00 PM

01 : 00 PM

05 : 00 PM

09 : 00 PM

12 : 00 AM

O K CANCEL

LIVE

Quick Menu

REC

PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4

EVT

PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4

c Select "New Time Table Setup" using the arrows button

(C D) and rotate the jog dial to check the radio button.

[Screenshot 4]

The radio button for "New Time Table Setup" is checked.

SETUP MENU

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

System Recording

Advanced

Time Table

Display

Copy the Other Time Table

New Time Table Setup

Period 1

Period 2

Period 3

Period 4

Period 5

Period 6

12 : 00 AM

08 : 00 AM

12 : 00 PM

01 : 00 PM

05 : 00 PM

09 : 00 PM

Event Schedule

Comm

TUE

Maintenance

08 : 00 AM

12 : 00 PM

01 : 00 PM

05 : 00 PM

09 : 00 PM

12 : 00 AM

O K CANCEL

LIVE

Quick Menu

REC

PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4

EVT

PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4

v Move the cursor to the start time input box for "Period 1" using the arrows button (C D A B).

b Rotate the jog dial to set the start time.

The end time can be set in the same way.

Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set for "Period 2" - "Period 6".

(It is not necessary to set for all of "Period 1" - "Period

6".) n Select OK using the arrows button (C D A B), and press the SET button.

Notes:

• The start time and end time can be set in 15 minutes intervals.

• To copy a timetable that is set for a different day of the week, select "Copy the Other Time Table" and select a day of the week by rotating the jog dial in step 3.

Then, move the cursor to the "day of the week" box, press the arrows button (B) and select a day of the week by rotating the jog dial. After selecting, move the cursor to OK and press the SET button.

• When you move the cursor to "CANCEL" in step 6 and press the SET button, the setting will be canceled and the pop-up settings menu of the timetable for the selected day of the week will close.

[Screenshot 5]

The settings are applied to the selected timetable and the timetable for all the days of the week will be displayed.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Time Table

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

System

Switcher

MON

REC

EVT

TUE

REC

EVT

WED

THU

REC

EVT

REC

EVT

FRI

SAT

SUN

REC

EVT

REC

EVT

REC

EVT

DAILY

REC

EVT

EXT

REC

EVT

Quick Menu

Recording Event Schedule

REC

PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4

EVT

CANCEL

PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4

m Move the cursor to the time zone of the day of the week to which the REC program is to be assigned using the arrows button (C D A B).

, Rotate the jog dial to select a desired REC program/

Event program.

(Rotating the jog dial changes the displayed REC program.)

REC program will be displayed with different colors.

Yellow:

REC program 1/Event program 1

Green:

REC program 2/Event program 2

Pale purple:

REC program 3/Event program 3

Indigo blue:

REC program 4/Event program 4

It is possible to display the assigned REC Program/

Event Program window (pages 120 and 121) by pressing the SET button.

Repeat steps 7 and 8 to assign REC program to other timetables.

. Move the cursor to OK using the arrows button and press the SET button.

→ The REC program/Event program will be assigned to the selected time zone and the selected timetable window will be closed.

123

124

Note:

When the SET button is pressed after moving the cursor to CANCEL in step 9, the settings will be canceled and the selected timetable window will be closed.

●

[Special Days] Perform the settings for recording programs for special days

Assign timetables to special days aside from other days of the week. Timetables for special days can be set for up to

30 days.

Perform the settings to specify dates as special days and apply the recording schedule to the special days.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Time Table

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

Quick Menu

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

DATE

MODE

SUN

DATE

MODE

LIVE

■

[Switcher] Settings for the switcher function

Perform the settings for image switching such as the sequential display setting or the waiting screen (while logging out) setting for displaying on monitors 1 and 2.

[Screenshot 2]

The "Live Sequence" pop-up menu will be displayed.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Monitor 1

Monitor 2

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

■

Live Sequence

■

Sequence Timing

■

Auto Skip

■

Login Screen

■

Secret View

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

SETUP

INT

CAM1

OFF

LIVE

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Monitor 1

Monitor 2

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

■

Live Sequence

Sequence Timing

■

Auto Skip

Login Screen

■

3 --

Secret View

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

INT

OK CANCEL

LIVE

Quick Menu

x Move the cursor to "CAM" of "STEP 1" using the arrows button (C D A B).

●

[Monitor 1] Switcher function of monitor 1

Perform the settings for the switcher function of monitor 1.

[Screenshot 3]

The cursor moves to "CAM".

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Monitor 1

Monitor 2

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

■

Live Sequence

■

Sequence Timing

■

Auto Skip

■

Login Screen

■

Secret View

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

SETUP

INT

CAM1

OFF

LIVE

Quick Menu

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Monitor 1

Monitor 2

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

■

Live Sequence

Sequence Timing

■

Auto Skip

Login Screen

■

Secret View

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

INT

OK CANCEL

Quick Menu

LIVE

Live Sequence

Perform the settings for the sequential display of live images as follows.

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "Monitor1" menu of "Switcher" on the SETUP MENU.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Monitor 1

Monitor 2

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

■

Live Sequence

■

Sequence Timing

■

Auto Skip

■

Login Screen

■

Secret View

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

SETUP

INT

CAM1

OFF

LIVE

Quick Menu

z Move the cursor to "Live Sequence" using the arrows button (C D) and press the SET button.

c Select how to display images from camera channels in

"STEP 1" from the following by rotating the jog dial.

1, 2, ... , 16:

Displays an image from the selected camera channel on a single screen.

1 - 4:

Displays images from camera channels

1 - 4 on a 4-split screen.

5 - 8:

Displays images from camera channels

5 - 8 on a 4-split screen.

9 - 9 (only for the WJ-HD309A):

Displays an image from camera channel 9 on the upper left area on a

4-split screen.

9 - 12 (only for the WJ-HD316A):

Displays images from camera channels 9 - 12 on a 4-split screen.

13 - 16 (only for the WJ-HD316A):

Displays images from camera channels 13 - 16 on a 4-split screen.

1 - 9:

Displays images from camera channels 1 - 9 on a

9-split screen.

10 - 16 (only for the WJ-HD316A):

Displays images from camera channels 10 - 16 on a 9-split screen.

--:

Skips the selected step.

v When displaying images from camera channels "1 - 16" on a single screen is selected in step 3, select the camera position.

Move the cursor to "PRESET" in "STEP 1" using the arrows button (C D A B).

125

126

[Screenshot 4]

The cursor moves to the "PRESET" in "STEP 1".

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Monitor 1

Monitor 2

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

■

Live Sequence

Sequence Timing

Auto Skip

3 64

Secret View

1-4

5-8

9-12

13-16

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

1-8

9-16

1-4

5-8

9-12

13-16

INT 2s

OFF 2s

OFF

OK CANCEL

LIVE

Quick Menu

b Rotate the jog dial to select a preset position number for which image is displayed in "STEP 1" from the following.

1 - 256:

Moves to the selected preset number.

--:

Does not move to the preset position.

n Select "DWELL" in "STEP 1" using the arrows button (C

D A B).

[Screenshot 5]

The cursor moves to"DWELL" in "STEP 1".

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Monitor 1

Monitor 2

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

■

Live Sequence

Sequence Timing

Auto Skip

Login Screen

Secret View

1-4

5-8

9-12

13-16

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

1-8

9-16

1-4

5-8

9-12

13-16

INT

OFF

OK CANCEL

LIVE

Quick Menu

m Rotate the jog dial to select an interval time to go to the next sequential step from 1 - 30 seconds (in 1 second intervals).

The sequence step is skipped when "0 s" is selected.

Repeat steps 2 and 7 to set for the other sequence steps.

, Move the cursor to "OK" using the arrows button (C D

A B), and press the SET button.

→ The settings for the sequential display are set and the sequence setting menu closes.

Note:

If you move the cursor to "CANCEL" in step 8 and press the SET button, the setting will be canceled and the sequence setting menu will be closed.

Sequence Timing

Select an image switching method from the following.

INT:

Switches images according to the settings for "Live sequence" of "Switcher".

EXT:

Switches images when receiving a signal from an external device.

MON 2:

Match with the image switching timing of the live sequence on monitor 2.

Auto Skip

Select ON of OFF to determine whether or not to skip the camera channel without supplying the video input signal because it is not connected, etc.

ON:

Skips a channel if it is not connected.

OFF:

Displays a black screen for a channel not connected.

Login Screen

Select a camera image to be displayed during the login procedure from the following.

CAM1 - 16:

Displays an image from the selected camera channel.

QUAD1 - 4:

Displays images from camera channels 1 - 4 on a 4-split screen.

QUAD5 - 8:

Displays images from camera channels 5 - 8 on a 4-split screen.

QUAD9 (only for the WJ-HD309A):

Displays an image from camera channel 9 on the upper left area on a 4split screen.

QUAD9 - 12 (only for the WJ-HD316A):

Displays images from camera channels 9 - 12 on a 4-split screen.

QUAD13 - 16 (only for the WJ-HD316A):

Displays images from camera channels 13 - 16 on a 4-split screen.

7SCREEN:

Displays images from camera channels 1 - 7 on a 7-split screen.

9SCREEN (only for the WJ-HD309A):

Displays an image from camera channel 1 - 9 on a 9-split screen.

9SCREEN1 - 9 (only for the WJ-HD316A):

Displays images from channels 1 - 9 on a 9-split screen.

9SCREEN10 - 16 (only for the WJ-HD316A):

Displays images from camera channels 10 - 16 on a 9-split screen.

10SCREEN (only for the WJ-HD316A):

Displays images from camera channels 1 - 10 on a 10-split screen.

13SCREEN (only for the WJ-HD316A):

Displays images from camera channels 1 - 13 on a 13-split screen.

16SCREEN (only for the WJ-HD316A):

Displays images from camera channels 1 - 16 on a 16-split screen.

--:

No camera image will be displayed (black screen)

Secret View

The secret view is a function to display a black screen on monitor 1 when camera images are displayed with a single screen on monitor 2. Select ON or OFF to determine whether to enable or disable the secret view function.

ON:

Enables the secret view function. (Camera images displayed with a single screen on monitor 2 will be displayed while monitor 1 has a black screen.)

OFF:

Disables the secret view function.

●

[Monitor 2] Switcher function of monitor 2

Perform the settings for the switcher function of monitor 2.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Monitor 1

Monitor 2

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

■

Live Sequence

■

Sequence Timing

■

Auto Skip

■

Login Screen

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

SETUP

INT

CAM1

LIVE

Quick Menu

Live Sequence

The settings for "Live Sequence" are the same as for

"Monitor1". Refer to page 125 for further information.

Sequence Timing

Select an image switching method from the following.

INT:

Switches images according to the settings for "Live sequence" of "Switcher".

EXT:

Switches images when receiving a signal from an external device.

Notes:

• Select "EXT" when an external device that can transmit a sequence signal is connected.

• The sequence changeover I/O (pin no.21) of the

ALARM/CONTROL connector on the rear panel will supply signals when "INT" is selected and will receive signals when "EXT" is selected.

Auto Skip

The settings for "Auto Skip" are the same as for "Monitor1".

Refer to page 126 for further information.

Login Screen

The settings for "Login Screen" are the same as for

"Monitor1". Refer to page 126 for further information.

127

128

■

[Display]

Perform the display settings for monitors 1 and 2 connected to the unit.

●

SETUP MENU

Advanced

OSD Setup

Monitor 1

Monitor 2

System Recording Event

Switcher Display Comm

■

Camera Title

■

Time & Date Display Position

■

Camera Title Display Position

■

Line Color on the Multi Screen

Schedule

Maintenance

SETUP

L-UPPER

R-LOWER

WHITE

LIVE

Quick Menu

[OSD Setup]

Perform the On Screen Display settings for monitor 1 and monitor 2 such as the settings of camera titles or the settings of the time display position.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

OSD Setup

Monitor 1

Monitor 2

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

■

Camera Title

■

Time & Date Display Position

■

Camera Title Display Position

■

Line Color on the Multi Screen

Schedule

Maintenance

SETUP

L-UPPER

R-LOWER

WHITE

LIVE

Quick Menu

Camera Title

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "OSD Setup" menu.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

OSD Setup

Monitor 1

Monitor 2

System Recording Event

Switcher Display Comm

■

Camera Title

■

Time & Date Display Position

■

Camera Title Display Position

■

Line Color on the Multi Screen

Schedule

Maintenance

SETUP

L-UPPER

R-LOWER

WHITE

LIVE

Quick Menu

z Move the cursor to "Camera Title" using the arrows button (C D) and press the SET button.

[Screenshot 2]

The camera title pop-up window will be displayed.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

OSD Setup

Monitor 1

Monitor 2

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

■

Camera Title

Time & Date Display Position

■

CAM3

Camera Title Display Position

Line Color on the Multi Screen

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

Schedule

Maintenance

SETUP

L-UPPER

R-LOWER

WHITE

OK CANCEL

Quick Menu

LIVE

x Move the cursor to "CAM1" using the arrows button (C

D A B).

[Screenshot 3]

The cursor moves to "CAM1".

SETUP MENU

Advanced

OSD Setup

Monitor 1

Monitor 2

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

■

Camera Title

Time & Date Display Position

CAM2

■

Camera Title Display Position

Line Color on the Multi Screen

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

Schedule

Maintenance

SETUP

L-UPPER

R-LOWER

WHITE

OK CANCEL

LIVE

Quick Menu

c Select a character to be entered by rotating the jog dial.

Up to 16 characters can be entered.

v Move the cursor to the right side of the entered character using the arrows button.

Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the camera title.

Notes:

• To correct the entered characters, move the cursor to the character to be corrected and press the

STOP button to delete it. Enter a correct character after deleting.

• To copy the camera title that has been set for another camera channel, follow the procedure below.

1. Move the cursor to "CAM 1" in step 2 above and press the SET button. The following screen will be displayed.

CAM2

OSD Setup

CAM3

Monitor 1

CAM4

Monitor 2

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

System Recording

Display Comm

■

CAM2

Camera Title

Time & Date Display Position

Camera Title Display Position

Line Color on the Multi Screen

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

Schedule

Maintenance

SETUP

L-UPPER

R-LOWER

WHITE

LIVE

OK CANCEL

Quick Menu

2. Select the camera channel for which the camera title is to be copied by rotating the jog dial.

3. Move the cursor to "OK" using the arrows button

(C D A B), and press the SET button. The camera title will be copied.

• The available characters for a camera title are different depending on the selected language as follows.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P

Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z À Ä Â Æ Ç É Ì Ñ Ò Ö Ù Ü Ø ß à á â ä

å æ ç è é ê ë ì í î ï ñ ò ó ô ö ù ú û ü ø ? " # & ( ) * + ,

- . / : ; SP

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U

V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z Ä Å Ç É

Ñ Ö › Ü á à â ä ã å ç é è ê ë í ì î ï ñ ó ò ô ö õ ú ù

û ü ? " # & ( ) * + , - . / : ; SP

[Screenshot 4]

The camera title is entered.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

OSD Setup

Monitor 1

Monitor 2

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

■

Camera Title

Time & Date Display Position

■

Camera Title Display Position

Line Color on the Multi Screen

CAM3

CAM4 CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

Schedule

Maintenance

SETUP

L-UPPER

R-LOWER

WHITE

OK CANCEL

LIVE

Quick Menu

SETUP MENU

Advanced

OSD Setup

Monitor 1

Monitor 2

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

■

Camera Title

■

Time & Date Display Position

■

Camera Title Display Position

Line Color on the Multi Screen

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

Schedule

Maintenance

SETUP

L-UPPER

R-LOWER

WHITE

OK CANCEL

LIVE

Quick Menu

b Press the arrows button (C D A B) to move the cursor to "OK" and press the SET button.

When the arrows button (C) is pressed while "OK" or

"CANCEL" is selected, the camera title pop-up window for CAM9 - 16 will be displayed. Repeat steps 2 - 4 to enter the camera title for CAM9 - 16.

Notes:

• If you move the cursor to "CANCEL" in step 5 and press the SET button, the setting will be canceled and the setting window of the camera title will be closed.

• It is possible to set "Camera Title [Display]" to display a camera title on monitor 2 and "Camera Title

[Embedded]" to embed/display a camera title on monitor 1 individually using a PC via a network.

Refer to the Network Setup Instruction (PDF) for further information.

Time & Date Display Position

Select a time and date display position from the following.

L-UPPER:

Displays the time at the upper left of the screen.

R-UPPER:

Displays the time at the upper right of the screen.

L-LOWER:

Displays the time at the lower left of the screen.

R-LOWER:

Displays the time at the lower right of the screen.

Notes:

• When setting the time and date to be recorded together with images, the time display will be recorded in the selected position.

• Refer to page 112 for further information about

"Embedded REC (Time & Date)".

Camera Title Display Position

Select a camera title display position from the following.

L-UPPER:

Displays a camera title at the upper left of the screen.

R-UPPER:

Displays a camera title at the upper right of the screen.

L-LOWER:

Displays a camera title at the lower left of the screen.

R-LOWER:

Displays a camera title at the lower right of the screen.

CENTER:

Displays a camera title at the center of the screen.

Note:

When setting the camera title to be recorded together with images, the camera title display will be embedded in the selected position.

Refer to page 112 for further information about

"Embedded REC (title)".

Line Color on the Multi Screen

Select a line color from the following.

WHITE:

Displays white lines.

GREY:

Displays grey lines.

BLACK:

Displays black lines.

●

[Monitor 1] Settings on monitor 1 display

Select ON and OFF whether or not to display the time, camera title and alarm display on monitor 1.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

OSD Setup

Monitor 1

Monitor 2

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

■

Time & Date Display

■

Camera Title Display

■

Alarm Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

LIVE

Quick Menu

129

130

Time & Date Display

Select ON and OFF whether or not to display the time.

ON:

Displays time.

OFF:

Does not function.

Camera Title Display

Select ON and OFF whether or not to display the camera title.

ON:

Displays the camera title.

OFF:

Does not function.

Alarm Display

Select ON and OFF whether or not to activate the alarm display at an event occurrence.

ON:

Displays the alarm display at an event occurrence.

OFF:

Does not function.

●

[Monitor2] Settings on monitor 2 display

Perform the display settings for monitor 2 such as the display mode (task bar style), time display position on/off, camera title display position, etc.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

OSD Setup

Monitor 1

Monitor 2

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

■

Display Mode

■

T&D and Status Display Position

■

Camera Title Display

MODE 1

LOWER

LIVE

Quick Menu

Display Mode

Select a display mode (task bar style) from the following.

Refer to page 13 for further information about the task bar.

MODE 1:

Select [MODE 1] for the display mode.

MODE 2:

Select [MODE 2] for the display mode.

MODE 3:

Select [MODE 3] for the display mode.

T & D and Status Display Position

When selecting MODE 1, select the position of the time and date display and the status from the following.

UPPER:

Displays them in the upper part of the screen.

LOWER:

Displays them in the lower part of the screen.

Camera Title Display

Select ON and OFF whether or not to display the camera title.

ON:

Displays the camera title.

OFF:

Does not function.

■

[Comm] Settings for communication with other devices

It is necessary to adjust the communication speed and use the same communication protocol with external devices such as a controller when connecting those external devices to the DATA port or the SERIAL connector

(RS232C).

It is also necessary to perform the settings for the network such as the IP address and the gateway address when operating this unit a PC via a network such as a LAN.

These are the descriptions of how to perform the required settings for communication with external devices.

• To prevent operation mistakes, set the unused camera channels to off.

It is possible to compensate for the video signal transmission loss from the camera when using the VIDEO IN connector 1 - 8. (cable compensation)

Perform the settings for the cable compensation according to the length of cable used.

When the length of cable used is shorter than 500 m

When the length of cable used is longer than 500 m and shorter than 900 m

When the length of cable used is longer than 900 m and shorter than 1 200 m

●

[Camera Control] Settings for the communication method and the cable compensation for camera control

Select a communication method for each camera channel to control cameras from the following.

Notes:

• Use 5C-2V cables for the cable compensation.

• Perform the settings for the cable compensation properly according to the cable length. Otherwise camera pictures may not be displayed/recorded correctly.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Camera Control

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

RS232C Setup

NW Setup 1

NW Setup 2

NTP Setup

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

■

Type of Camera Control

CAM

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

COMP

TYPE

COAX

Schedule

Maintenance

CAM

CAM9

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

LIVE

TYPE

PSD

RS485

●

[PS.DATA Setup] Settings for the PS·Data

Perform the following settings for the PS·Data.

Quick Menu

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Camera Control

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

RS232C Setup

NW Setup 1

NW Setup 2

NTP Setup

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

■

Unit Address(System)

■

Unit Address(Controller)

■

Cascade

■

Baud Rate

■

Data Bit

■

Parity

■

Stop Bit

■

Retry Timing

■

Alarm Data

■

Camera Number Setup

Schedule

Maintenance

001

OFF

9600

NONE

OFF

SETUP

LIVE

COAX:

Controls camera with the coaxial communication

(CAM 1 - 8 CH are available for the WJ-HD316A, CAM

1 - 6 CH are available for the WJ-HD309A)

PSD:

Controls camera with the PS·Data. (CAM 1 - 16 CH are available for the WJ-HD316A, CAM 1 - 9 CH are available for the WJ-HD309A)

RS485:

Controls camera with the RS485 communication.

(CAM 1 - 16 CH are available for the WJ-HD316A, CAM

1 - 9 CH are available for the WJ-HD309A)

OFF:

Does not control camera (CAM 1 - 16 CH are available)

Quick Menu

Unit Address (System)

A unit address (System) is a unique number assigning to

PS·Data devices. The addresses must be unique to identify system devices when connecting multiple devices compatible with PS·Data. Numbers, "001"-"099", are to be assigned as the unit addresses to the system devices.

Notes:

• Perform settings according to the cameras connected to this unit.

• CAM 9-16 control 4 cameras each (only for the WJ-

HD316A).

• When using the coaxial communication to control cameras, connect cameras to the VIDEO IN connectors 1 -

8 for the WJ-HD316A (1 - 6 for the WJ-HD309A) (coaxial communication compatible). When controlling cameras connected to other VIDEO IN connectors with coaxial communication, use a coaxial communication unit (WJ-MP204). In this case, select "PSD" for the communication method for the camera channels to be controlled through the coaxial communication unit.

Unit Address (Controller)

The unit address (controller) is used to control a PS·Data device connected to this unit. Numbers, "001" - "099" are to be assigned.

Cascade

Select ON or OFF whether or not to use the cascade connection.

Set this to ON when connecting two or more units in the cascade connection.

ON:

Select this when connecting units in the cascade connection.

OFF:

Does not function.

131

132

Baud Rate

Select the communication speed for data transmission with a connected device from the following.

2 400/4 800/9 600/19 200/38 400 bps

Data Bit

It is impossible to change the value for this setting.

8 bit

Parity

Select a method to check a transmission error at communication from the following.

NONE:

No parity check

EVEN:

Even parity

ODD:

Odd parity

Stop Bit

Select a stop bit from the following.

1 bit/2 bit

Retry Timing

Select a retransmission interval for when data reception is not confirmed from the following.

OFF/100 ms/200 ms/400 ms/1 000 ms

Alarm Data

Select a method to inform the connected controller of an event occurrence from the following.

OFF:

Does not function.

0 s:

Informs the controller every time an event is detected.

1 s/5 s:

Informs the controller when a specified time has passed after detecting an event.

Camera Number Setup

It is possible to assign a number to each camera channel to operate cameras using the controller compatible with

PS·Data.

Do the following to assign numbers to the camera channels.

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "PS·DATA Setup" menu.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Camera Control

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

RS232C Setup

NW Setup 1

NW Setup 2

NTP Setup

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

■

Unit Address(System)

■

Unit Address(Controller)

■

Cascade

■

Baud Rate

■

Data Bit

■

Parity

■

Stop Bit

■

Retry Timing

■

Alarm Data

■

Camera Number Setup

Schedule

Maintenance

001

OFF

9600

NONE

OFF

SETUP

LIVE

Quick Menu

z Move the cursor to "Camera Number Setup" using the arrows button (C D) and press the SET button.

[Screenshot 2]

The "Camera Number Setup" pop-up window will be displayed.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

■

Camera Number Setup

■

Unit Adress(Controller)

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

RS232C Setup

NW Setup 1

■

Cascade

Baud Rate

Data Bit

■

Parity

001

002

NW Setup 2

NTP Setup

■

Stop Bit

003

004

Retry Timing

■

Alarm Data

Camera Number Setup

007

8 008 16

Schedule

Maintenance

001

CAM NO.

9600

009

010

NONE 011

OFF

012

013

SETUP

015

016

LIVE

O K CANCEL

Quick Menu

x Move the cursor to a desired "CAM NO." of "CAM PORT" using the arrows button (C D A B).

[Screenshot 3]

The cursor will move to the selected "CAM NO." of "CAM

PORT".

SETUP MENU

Advanced

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

■

Camera Number Setup

■

Unit Adress(Controller)

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

RS232C Setup

NW Setup 1

■

Cascade

Baud Rate

Data Bit

■

Parity

001

002

NW Setup 2

NTP Setup

■

Stop Bit

003

004

Retry Timing

■

Alarm Data

Camera Number Setup

007

8 008 16

Schedule

Maintenance

001

CAM NO.

9600

009

010

NONE 011

OFF

012

013

SETUP

015

016

LIVE

O K CANCEL

Quick Menu

c Select a camera number by rotating the jog dial.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to assign camera numbers to the other CAM PORT.

v Move the cursor to "OK" using the arrows button (C D

A B) and press the SET button.

→ Camera numbers will be assigned and the "Camera

Number Setup" menu will be closed.

Note:

When you move the cursor to "CANCEL" in step 4 and press the SET button, the settings will be canceled and the "Camera Number Setup" menu will be closed.

●

[RS485 Setup] Settings for RS485

Perform the following settings for RS485.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Camera Control

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

RS232C Setup

NW Setup 1

NW Setup 2

NTP Setup

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

■

Baud Rate

■

Control Camera CH

■

Data Bit

■

Parity

■

Stop Bit

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

19200

SETUP

NONE

LIVE

Quick Menu

Baud Rate

Select the communication speed for data transmission with a connected device from the following.

4 800/9 600/19 200 bps

Control Camera CH

It is possible to assign camera channels to the RS485 ports

1 and 2 as shown below.

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "RS485 Setup" menu.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Camera Control

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

RS232C Setup

NW Setup 1

NW Setup 2

NTP Setup

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

■

Baud Rate

■

Control Camera CH

■

Data Bit

■

Parity

■

Stop Bit

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

19200

NONE

SETUP

LIVE

Quick Menu

z Move the cursor to "Control Camera CH" using the arrows button (C D) and press the SET button.

[Screenshot 2]

The "Control Camera CH" pop-up window will be displayed.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

■

PS.DATA Setup

Control Camera CH

■

Control Camera CH

RS485 Setup

RS232C Setup

■

Data Bit

Parity

■

Stop Bit

CAM3

PORT1

NW Setup 1

CAM4 PORT1

NW Setup 2

CAM5 PORT1

NTP Setup CAM6 PORT1

CAM7

CAM8

PORT1

CAMERA

CAM9

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

Schedule

Maintenance

19200

SETUP

TERM

PORT2

LIVE

O K CANCEL

Quick Menu

x Move the cursor to a desired cell in the "TERM" column using the arrows button (C D A B).

[Screenshot 3]

The cursor will move to the selected cell in the "TERM" column.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

■

PS.DATA Setup

Control Camera CH

■

Control Camera CH

RS485 Setup

RS232C Setup

■

Data Bit

Parity

■

Stop Bit

CAM3

PORT1

NW Setup 1

CAM4 PORT1

NW Setup 2

CAM5 PORT1

NTP Setup CAM6 PORT1

CAM7

CAM8

PORT1

CAMERA

CAM9

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

Schedule

Maintenance

19200

SETUP

TERM

PORT2

LIVE

O K CANCEL

Quick Menu

c Select a port by rotating the jog dial.

PORT1:

Control through the RS485 port 1.

PORT2:

Control through the RS485 port 2.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to assign other camera channels to be controlled through the RS485 ports.

v Move the cursor to "OK" using the arrows button (C D

A B), and press the SET button.

→ Camera channels and ports to be controlled will be assigned and the "Control Camera CH" menu will be closed.

Notes:

• When you move the cursor to "CANCEL" in step 4 and press the SET button, the settings will be canceled and the "Control Camera CH" menu will be closed.

• The unit number of the camera will be congruent with the camera number.

Data Bit

The data length for communication will be displayed.

It is impossible to change the value for this setting.

Parity

Methods to check a transmission error at communication will be displayed.

It is impossible to change the value for this setting.

Stop Bit

Number of stop bit will be displayed.

It is impossible to change the value for this setting.

●

[RS232C Setup] Settings for RS232C

Perform the following settings for RS232C.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Camera Control

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

RS232C Setup

NW Setup 1

NW Setup 2

NTP Setup

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

■

Unit Address(System)

■

Baud Rate

■

Data Bit

■

Parity

■

Stop Bit

■

Retry Timing

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

001

9600

NONE

OFF

LIVE

Quick Menu

Unit Address(System)

A unit address (System) is a unique number assigned to each system device. The addresses must be unique to identify system devices when connecting multiple system devices.

Numbers, "001"-"099", are to be assigned as the unit addresses for the system devices.

Baud Rate

Select the communication speed for data transmission with a connected device from the following.

9 600/19 200/38 400 bps

133

134

Data Bit

Select a data length for communication from the following.

7/8 bit

Parity

Select a method to check a transmission error at communication from the following.

NONE:

No parity check

EVEN:

Even parity

ODD:

Odd parity

Stop Bit

Select a stop bit from the following.

1/2 bit

Retry Timing

Select a retransmission interval for when data reception is not confirmed from the following.

OFF/100 ms/200 ms/400 ms/1 000 ms

●

[NW Setup 1] Basic network settings

Perform the following basic network settings to operate this unit using a PC via a network such as a LAN.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Camera Control

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

RS232C Setup

NW Setup 1

NW Setup 2

NTP Setup

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

■

HTTP Port Number

■

User Authentication

■

Host Authentication

■

Line Speed

■

Live Video Quality

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

00080

OFF

AUTO

FQB

LIVE

Quick Menu

HTTP Port Number

Specify the HTTP port number to be used to transfer images from this unit. It is not necessary to change it for normal use.

User Authentication

Select ON and OFF whether or not to activate user authentication at the time of access from a PC to this unit.

When ON is selected, the user authentication (login) window will be displayed at the time of access from a PC.

The top page will be displayed if the entered user name and password are registered.

ON:

Activates user authentication.

OFF:

Does not function.

Important:

It is recommended to select ON for the user authentication for security.

Host Authentication

Select ON or OFF whether or not to restrict access by IP addresses at the time of access from a PC to this unit.

When ON is selected, only PCs with registered IP address can access this unit

ON:

Activates host authentication.

OFF:

Does not function.

Note:

When ON is selected for both the user authentication and the host authentication, it is possible to operate the unit only from a registered host. Operable functions will differ depending on the user level setting of the authenticated user. It is impossible to operate the unit from an unregistered host.

Line Speed

The following are available for "Line Speed".

AUTO:

Line speed will be applied automatically.

10-HALF:

10 Mbps half duplex

10-FULL:

10 Mbps full duplex

100-HALF:

100 Mbps half duplex

100-FULL:

100 Mbps full duplex

Note:

When the SETUP MENU is closed after changing the line speed, the unit will automatically restart.

Live Video Quality

Image quality level for a live (FQB: high quality) will be displayed.

It is impossible to change the value for this setting.

●

[NW Setup 2] Network connection settings

Perform the following network connection settings to operate this unit using a PC via a network such as a LAN.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Camera Control

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

RS232C Setup

NW Setup 1

NW Setup 2

NTP Setup

Quick Menu

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

■

DHCP

■

IP Address

■

Subnet Mask

■

Gateway

■

DNS

Primary

Secondary

■

DDNS

User Name

User Password

Access Interval

■

Host Name

HD316

■

Domain Name localdomain

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

LIVE

OFF

192

255

192 .

MANUAL

000

OFF

000

168

255

168

000

255

000

250

000

001

000

10m

DHCP

Select ON or OFF whether or not to use the DHCP server.

When obtaining IP addresses, net mask and a gateway address from the DHCP server, set to ON.

If not, set to OFF and enter those addresses manually.

ON:

Uses the DHCP server.

OFF:

Does not use the DHCP server.

IP Address

Enter an IP address when OFF is selected for "DHCP".

For this unit, enter 4 units from the decimal numbers (0-

254).

Subnet Mask

Enter a subnet mask according to the network configuration when OFF is selected for "DHCP".

Gateway

Enter the gateway address according to the network configuration when OFF is selected for "DHCP".

DNS

Select "MANUAL" or "AUTO" to enable searching for an IP address by its host name using DNS. When "OFF" is selected for "DHCP" (no use of the DHCP server), select "MANU-

AL" and enter the domain name and the DNS server address. If "ON" is selected for "DHCP" (use of the DHCP server), select "AUTO". When DNS is not used, select "OFF".

When "MANUAL" is selected for DNS, enter the DNS server address for "Primary" and "Secondary".

DDNS

Select ON and OFF whether or not to use the DDNS

(Dynamic Domain Name System).

When "ON" is selected, perform the following.

User Name:

Enter the user name registered in "DDNS".

User Password:

Enter the password for the user entered in

"User Name".

Access Interval:

Select an interval to update DNS from the following.

10 min/30 min/1 h/6 h/24 h

Host Name

Enter the host address registered in DDNS.

Enter a host name of no more than 255 alphanumeric characters. Hyphens (-) are also available for the host name.

Domain Name

Enter the domain name of this unit.

Enter a domain name of no more than 255 alphanumeric characters. Hyphens (-) are also available for the domain name.

Note:

The first character of the host name and the domain name must be a letter (a - z). Do not begin with a number or a symbol character.

●

[NTP Setup] Time adjustment of network

Perform the following settings for time adjustment.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Camera Control

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

RS232C Setup

NW Setup 1

NW Setup 2

NTP Setup

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

■

Time Adjustment

■

Time Zone

■

NTP Server Address

■

Refresh Interval

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

OFF

LIVE

Quick Menu

Time Adjustment

Select ON and OFF whether or not to adjust the time with reference to the NTP server.

ON:

Adjusts time with reference to the NTP server.

OFF:

Does not function.

Important:

• Time adjustment will be performed automatically when the clock time is inaccurate to within ±5 seconds from the standard time of the NTP server.

• The clock will not be adjusted automatically during event recording or emergency recording.

Time Zone

Set the time zone in accordance with the place of use when using the NTP server for time adjustment.

NTP Server Address

Enter the NTP server address when using the NTP server for time adjustment.

Refresh Interval

Select an interval of time inquiry to be transmitted to the

NTP server from the following.

1 h/2 h/6 h/12 h/24 h

Important:

Recording will not be performed for around 4 seconds when changing the present time (accurate to within ±5 seconds) using "Time Adjustment".

135

136

■

[Maintenance] Functions for Maintaining

Perform the settings for the hard disk drives.

It is possible to check the histories (log) of event occurrence, error occurrence and access.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

REC Rate

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Quick Menu

System

Switcher

CAM 1

CAM 2

CAM 3

CAM 4

CAM 5

CAM 6

CAM 7

CAM 8

CAM 9

CAM 10

CAM 11

CAM 12

CAM 13

CAM 14

CAM 15

CAM 16

AUTO

MANU

AUTO

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

1ips

SCHE

1ips

PRE EVT

1ips

POST EVT

1ips

EMR

1ips

LIVE

SUPER FINE

FINE

NORMAL

EXTENDED

Notes:

• The displayed available disk space on this menu will not include the space required for data management. Therefore, the understated available disk space will be displayed.

• When CONTINUE is selected for "Disk End Mode" of

"Maintenance", available disk space will be displayed as "--".

• "**" will be displayed to refer to a disk that is not connected or a non-existent area on the disk.

●

[REC Rate] Check the recording rate and the image quality for each camera channel.

The recording rate for each recording mode for each camera (as shown below) will be displayed in list form.

Warning for Disk Life Time (hour meter warning setting)

Select the duration as the maximum active time of the hard disk from the following. A warning will be displayed when the set time have passed.

10 000 h/20 000 h/30 000 h

SETUP MENU

Advanced

REC Rate

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Quick Menu

System

Switcher

CAM 1

CAM 2

CAM 3

CAM 4

CAM 5

CAM 6

CAM 7

CAM 8

CAM 9

CAM 10

CAM 11

CAM 12

CAM 13

CAM 14

CAM 15

CAM 16

AUTO

MANU

AUTO

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

1ips

SCHE

1ips

PRE EVT

1ips

POST EVT

1ips

EMR

1ips

LIVE

SUPER FINE

FINE

NORMAL

EXTENDED

HDD Safety Mode

When maintaining (HDD replacement, installation, etc.) without turning the power of the unit off, select ON for "HDD

Safety Mode". The unit will be restarted in the HDD Safety

Mode. Refer to page 70 for further information.

(The default setting is ON.)

●

[Version Info] Check the version information

Version information of the software and the hardware, and the MAC address will be displayed.

MANU:

Manual recording

SCHE:

Schedule recording

PRE EVT:

Pre-event recording

POST EVT:

Post-event recording

EMR:

Emergency recording

SETUP MENU

Advanced

REC Rate

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

■

Software

Hardware (M)

■

(V)

Mac Address

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Quick Menu

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

LIVE

V1.00

AA-BB-CC-DD-EE-FF

●

[Disk Info] Check the available hard disk space

The available hard disk space of the following will be displayed: The built-in hard disk (normal recording area, event recording area and copy area), optional extension unit

(EXT1 - 7), DVD-RAM, CD-R and DVD-R disk drive connected to the copy port (COPY1 or COPY2).

Refer to page 26 for more details on the built-in hard disk.

It is also possible to perform the settings for the hour-meter

(the active time of the HDD) warning and for the HDD safety mode with this menu.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

REC Rate

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Quick Menu

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

2 3

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

LIVE

EXT2 160GB 160GB

15000h 15000h

EXT3 160GB 160GB

15000h 15000h

EXT7

160GB 160GB

15000h 15000h

160GB 160GB

15000h 15000h

160GB 160GB

15000h 15000h

160GB 160GB

15000h 15000h

160GB 160GB

15000h 15000h

160GB 160GB

15000h 15000h

160GB 160GB

15000h 15000h

160GB 160GB

15000h 15000h

■

Warning for Disk Life Time

HDD Safety Mode

Remaining

Normal REC Area

Event REC Area

Copy Area

COPY

(Rear)

1800GB

1200GB

1000GB

COPY 2 (Front) 1000GB

3000h

OFF

●

[Disk End Mode] Set actions to be taken when the available hard disk space has run out

Select an action from the following to be taken when the available space of the built-in hard disk (normal recording area, event recording area, copy area) or the external recording device (DVD-RAM, CD-R or DVD-R disk drive) connected to the copy port (COPY1, COPY2) is running out.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

REC Rate

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

■

HDD

Normal Recording Area

Event Recording Area

Copy Area

■

COPY1

■

COPY2

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

LIVE

CONTINUE

STOP

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Quick Menu

CONTINUE:

When the available disk space has run out, the older data will be overwritten by the newer data. In this case, the oldest data is the first to be overwritten.

STOP:

When the available disk space has run out, recording and copying will be canceled.

Important:

When changing the setting from CONTINUE to STOP during overwriting, the oldest 1 hour’s worth of recorded images will be deleted. It is impossible to recover the deleted images even if it is set to CONTINUE again.

Note:

When copying on a CD-R or DVD-R disk, copying will stop automatically when the available disk space has run out even though CONTINUE is selected.

●

[Disk Capacity] Set actions to be taken when the available disk space is running out

Select a level of the available disk space to issue a warning when the available space of the built-in hard disk (normal recording area, event recording area, copy area) or the external recording device (DVD-RAM, CD-R or DVD-R disk drive) connected to the copy port (COPY1, COPY2) reaches a specified level.

The setting range is between 1 % and 10 % (in 1 % intervals).

The warning will not be issued when OFF is selected.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

REC Rate

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

■

HDD Capacity Warning

Normal Recording Area

Event Recording Area

Copy Area

■

COPY1 Capacity Warning

■

COPY2 Capacity Warning

Schedule

Maintenance

LIVE

OFF

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Quick Menu

Important:

When "CONTINUE" is selected for "Disk End Mode", a warning will not be issued.

●

[Data Delete] Delete image data on the hard disk

Delete image data on the built-in hard disk (normal recording area/event recording area).

Auto deletion and manual deletion are available to delete image data.

It is also possible to initialize (format) a DVD-RAM disk with this menu.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

REC Rate

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

■

Auto Delete

OFF

■

Manual Delete for Normal Recording Area

Delete before 1 . . JAN .

DELETE

■

Manual Delete for Event Recording Area

Delete before 1 . . JAN . 04

DELETE

■

Disc Format of DVD

COPY1 (Rear)

COPY2 (Front)

FORMAT

LIVE

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Quick Menu

Auto Delete

It is possible to delete recorded images automatically when the set number of days has passed from the day the image was recorded. Refer to a system administrator for further information.

The number of days for the auto delete function is as follows.

The auto delete function will not work when OFF is selected.

OFF/1DAY/2DAYS/3DAYS/4DAYS/5DAYS/6DAYS/7DAYS/

8DAYS/9DAYS/10DAYS/14DAYS/30DAYS/45DAYS/

60DAYS/90DAYS/120DAYS/150DAYS/180DAYS

Note:

Images recorded on the HDD copy area will not be deleted.

Manual Delete for Normal Recording Area

By setting the time and date, images in the normal recording area of the hard disk that were recorded up until a day before the set time and date will be deleted.

Enter a 2-digit number for the year when entering the time and date.

Manual Delete for Event Recording Area

By setting the time and date, images in the event recording area of the hard disk that were recorded up until a day before the set time and date will be deleted.

Disc Format of DVD

Initialize (format) a DVD-RAM disk in the DVD-RAM drive connected to the copy port.

137

138

●

[Event Log] Check the event log

The event log (time and date at an event occurrence, details) will be displayed in list form.

Refer to page 50 for further information about each event.

●

[Error Log] Check the error log

The error log will be displayed in list form.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

REC Rate

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

System

Switcher

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Quick Menu

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

No.

Time&Date Event

001 20.AUG.04 6:29:37 PM LOSS16

002 20.AUG.04 6:28:57 PM TRM-1

003 20.AUG.04 6:28:55 PM VMD-14

004 20.AUG.04 6:28:52 PM EMR

005 20.AUG.04 6:28:44 PM COM-13

006 20.AUG.04 6:28:39 PM LOSS-15

007 20.AUG.04 6:28:20 PM TRM-12

008 20.AUG.04 6:28:17 PM VMD-4

009 20.AUG.04 6:28:15 PM EMR

010 20.AUG.04 6:28:13 PM COM-8

011 20.AUG.04 6:28:12 PM LOSS-16

012 20.AUG.04 6:28:10 PM TRM-1

013 20.AUG.04 6:28:09 PM VMD-14

014 20.AUG.04 6:28:07 PM EMR

015 20.AUG.04 6:28:07 PM COM-13

016 20.AUG.04 6:28:05 PM LOSS-15

017 20.AUG.04 6:27:58 PM TRM-12

018 20.AUG.04 6:27:51 PM VMD-4

019 20.AUG.04 6:27:49 PM EMR

020 20.AUG.04 6:27:46 PM COM-8

PREV/NEXT PAGE

LIVE

SETUP MENU

Advanced

REC Rate

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Quick Menu

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

No.

Time&Date Event

001 20.AUG.04 6:29:37 PM H.METER MAIN1-1

002 20.AUG.04 6:28:57 PM AL 1-0312312359

003 20.AUG.04 6:28:55 PM R-ERR EXT1-2

004 20.AUG.04 6:28:52 PM CAM LOSS1

005 20.AUG.04 6:28:44 PM PWR RECOVER

006 20.AUG.04 6:28:39 PM H.METER MAIN1-1

007 20.AUG.04 6:28:20 PM AL1-0312312359

008 20.AUG.04 6:28:17 PM R-ERR EXT1-2

009 20.AUG.04 6:28:15 PM CAM LOSS1

010 20.AUG.04 6:28:13 PM PWR RECOVER

011 20.AUG.04 6:28:12 PM H.METER MAIN1-1

012 20.AUG.04 6:28:10 PM AL1-0312312359

013 20.AUG.04 6:28:09 PM R-ERR EXT1-2

014 20.AUG.04 6:28:07 PM COM LOSS1

015 20.AUG.04 6:28:07 PM PWR RECOVER

016 20.AUG.04 6:28:05 PM H.METER MAIN1-1

017 20.AUG.04 6:27:58 PM AL1-0312312359

018 20.AUG.04 6:27:51 PM R-ERR EXT1-2

019 20.AUG.04 6:27:49 PM COM LOSS1

020 20.AUG.04 6:27:46 PM PWR RECOVER

PREV/NEXT PAGE

LIVE

COM:

Command alarm

EMR:

Emergency recording

LOSS:

Video loss

TRM:

Terminal alarm

VMD:

Motion detection

Note:

Up to 750 event logs can be kept. When more than

750 event logs are filed, the older event logs will be overwritten by the newer event logs. In this case, the oldest log is the first to be overwritten.

Indication

AL*-YYMMDDhhmmss

W-ERR X-Y

R-ERR X-Y

REMOVE X-Y

#-FULL

THERMAL -X

FAN X-Y

#-nn%

Notes:

• Up to 100 error logs can be kept. When more than 100 error logs are filed, the older error logs will be overwritten by the newer error logs. In this case, the oldest log is the first to be overwritten.

• When an error of the same type as the latest error occurs, only the time and date of the latest error log will be renewed.

Description

Asterisk (*) indicates the camera channel number

YYDDMMhhmmss indicates the played time when the alteration was detected.

Cause

Detects alteration

Failed to write data on the HDD X indicates the unit/unit number that has the hard disk error

Y indicates the disk number in the unit

(unit number)

X indicates the unit/unit number that has the hard disk error

Y indicates the disk number in the unit

(unit number)

Failed to read data on the HDD

X indicates the unit/unit number that has the hard disk that has been removed from the subject for recording.

Y indicates the disk number in the unit/unit number

Auto removal of the link

# indicates the partition name/external recording device port number

No available disk space

X indicates the unit/unit number in which the thermal error occurred

Thermal error

X indicates the unit/unit number

Y indicates the fan number (1-4)

Y will be left out if the malfunctioning fan is in the extension unit

# indicates the partition name of the hard disk/external recording device nn indicates the available disk space

The fan is malfunctioning

Warning that the disk space is running out

SMART X-Y

Indication

PWR LOSS

H.METER X-Y

PROTECT -#

NO DISK -#

MEDIUM -#

UNFORMATTED -#

W-ERR (MEDIUM-#)

PWR RECOVER

HDD-ERROR

M-FAIL MAIN-#

R-FAIL #

NO DATA-#

NO DRIVE-#

R-ERR (MEDIUM-#)

Description

X indicates the unit/unit number that has the hard disk error

Y indicates the unit/unit number

Cause

HDD SMART error

Detects a power outage

X indicates the unit/unit number that has the hard disk error

Y indicates the unit/unit number

# indicates the port number to which the external recording device is connected

Hour-meter warning

Disk has a write protection

Disk is not inserted

Incompatible disk

Unformatted disk

Failed to write data on the disk (CD-R,

DVD-RAM and DVD-R)

Recover from a power outage

HDD error

Mirroring recovery failure # indicates disk number

# indicates extension unit number RAID recovery failure

# indicates the port number to which the external recording device is connected

Manual copy settings error (No image in the designated time range)

Copy drive is not connected

Failed to read the medium of the copy drive

●

[Access Log] Check the access log

The time, user name and IP addresses when logging in/out to/from this unit will be displayed in list form.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

REC Rate

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Quick Menu

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

Maintenance

LIVE

No.

Time&Date Event

001 5.AUG.04 2:28:25 PM 192.168.100.100 IN

002 3.AUG.04 10:05:26 AM 1234567890123456789012345678901 OUT

003 29.JUL.04 3:18:39 PM tshimi IN

004 29.JUL.04 3:18:39 PM tshimi OUT

005 29.JUL.04 3:00:42 PM 123.123.123.123 OUT

006 29.JUL.04 3:00:42 PM 192.168.100.100 IN

007 29.JUL.04 2:59:08 PM 1234567890123456789012345678901 OUT

008 29.JUL.04 2:48:49 PM tshimi IN

009 29.JUL.04 1:57:24 PM tshimi OUT

010 29.JUL.04 10:01:50 PM 123.123.123.123 OUT

011 29.JUL.04 10:12:03 PM 192.168 100.100 IN

012 29.JUL.04 10:58:07 PM 1234567890123456789012345678901 OUT

013 29.JUL.04 2:59:56 PM tshimi IN

014 29.JUL.04 7:01:30 PM tshimi OUT

015 29.JUL.04 2:01:42 PM 123.123.123.123 OUT

016 29.JUL.04 1:58:44 PM 192.168.100.100 IN

017 29.JUL.04 12:01:10 PM 1234567890123456789012345678901 OUT

018 29.JUL.04 11:35:02 PM tshimi IN

019 29.JUL.04 7:22:16 PM tshimi OUT

020 29.JUL.04 5:24:55 PM 123.123.123.123 OUT

PREV/NEXT PAGE

**IN:

The user name or the IP address displayed before IN indicates the user/host logged in.

**OUT:

The user name or the IP address displayed before

OUT indicates the user/host logged out.

**: A user name or host name will be displayed.

Note:

Up to 100 access logs can be kept. When more than

100 access logs are filed, the older access logs will be overwritten by the newer access logs. In this case, the oldest log is the first to be overwritten.

139

140

DISPLAY SETUP MENU OF CAMERA

For operating the camera connected to this unit, it is necessary to set the camera functions in advance.

Setup of the camera functions can be performed on the setup menu of the connected camera.

You can operate the camera setup menu by calling up it from this unit. Contents of the camera setting menu and operations vary according to the connected cameras. For further information, refer to the operating instructions of the camera.

The following are the descriptions of how to display the camera setting menu.

z Press the camera selection button for a desired camera channel and the SET button simultaneously.

→The camera setup menu will be displayed.

Use the following buttons on the front panel to perform the settings of the camera setup menu.

To move the cursor

To change the selected parameter

To determine the selected parameter

To display the submenu

To return to the previous menu

Arrows button (C D)

Arrows button (A B)

SET button

SETUP/ESC button x Press any one of the PAN/TILT button, the ZOOM/FOCUS button, the IRIS button, the PRESET/AUTO button and the camera selection buttons 4 - 16 for the WJ-HD316A (4 - 9 for the WJ-HD309A) to complete the camera setting.

Notes:

• To display the special menu of the camera setup menu, press the camera selection button 2 after moving the cursor to

SPECIAL on the camera setup menu.

• To reset the settings of the camera setup menu to the default settings, do the following:

1. Display the SPECIAL menu of the camera setup menu by pressing the camera selection button 2 after moving the cursor to SPECIAL on the camera setup menu.

2. Press the camera selection button 3 after moving the cursor to CAMERA RESET on the camera setup menu.

3. Press any of the PAN/TILT, ZOOM/FOCUS, IRIS, PRESET/AUTO or the camera selection buttons 4 -16.

• To go back to the previously displayed window from the SPECIAL menu, press the SET/ESC button.

• Depending on the models of the connected cameras, the operation method and menu items are different. Refer to the operating instructions of the connected camera.

DISK MANAGEMENT

■

Notes on the hard disk

Camera images are recorded into the built-in hard disk of this unit.

There are two hard disks in this unit. In case one of them malfunctions during recording, it is possible to keep recording with the other hard disk (mirror function).

The internal hard disk of this unit is virtually divided into 3 areas to manage the hard disk.

Normal recording area:

An area into which images are recorded at times other than an event occurrence such as manual recording.

Event recording area:

An area into which images are recorded at an event occurrence.

Copy area:

An area into which copy data is stored.

It is possible to check the available disk space for each area on "Disk Info" of "Maintenance" on the SETUP MENU.

(Refer to page 136.)

• When connecting an optional extension unit (WJ-

HDE300 series), it is possible to create a pre-recording area to perform pre-event recording (page 148) for up to 60 minutes.

Operations for the hard disk drive such as initialization (formatting) of the hard disk drive in the unit or the optional extension unit, or mirroring, etc., can be performed in the

"HDD DISK MENU". (Refer to page 144.)

Note:

It is necessary to create either the normal recording area or the event record area. If the normal recording area is not created, manual recording images and schedule recording images are recorded into the event recording area. If the event recording area is not created, event recording images and emergency recording images are recorded into the normal recording area.

■

How to replace the built-in hard disk

It is possible to replace the hard disk drive regardless of whether the power of the unit is on/off.

However, the procedures for replacement are different.

Refer to the operating instructions for the optional extension unit when replacing the hard disk in the extension unit.

When replacing the hard disk drive after turning off the power of the unit.

z Turn off the power of the unit and detach the power plug from the outlet.

x Do the following to replace the hard disk drive.

1. Open the connectors cover on the front panel and remove the fixing screws.

Detach the front panel by sliding it after removing the screws.

Screw

Connectors cover

Important:

• Do not detach the cable connecting the unit and the front panel while the HDD status indicators are still lit or until 30 seconds have passed since the HDD status indicators went off.

• Protect the hard disk drives from static electricity.

• Do not stack them, or keep them upright.

• Do not use an electric screwdriver to fix them.

(Tightening torque: Approx. 0.49 N · m (5 k gf · cm))

• Avoid rapid changes in the temperature/humidity to prevent condensation. (Acceptable change: within 15

°C/h (59 °F/h))

141

2. Remove the cable from the front panel.

Front panel connector

3. Remove the screws fixing the mounting unit, and then pull the hard disk drive mounting angle toward you.

5. Detach the flat cable and the power supply cable from the hard disk drive. Detach the flat cable only from the hard disk drive. (Do not detach the flat cable from the circuit board.)

When pulling the flat cable to detach from the hard disk drive, hold the pull-ring on the connector, not cable.

Otherwise, it may cause breaking of wire.

After detaching the cables, remove the screw on point

Then, remove the four screws fixing the lower hard disk drive.

When removing, hold the hard disk drive securely to prevent it from falling.

After removing the four screws, detach the hard disk drive from the hard disk drive mounting angle.

Screw removed from point A

Hold these tabs and pull

Connector of the power supply cable

Screw removed from point A

Screws

SSD

Only the upper and lower holes on both sides will be used when fixing by screws even though there are 3 holes each on both sides.

4. Remove the four screws fixing the upper hard disk drive.

When removing, hold the hard disk drive securely to prevent it from falling.

Then, detach the flat cable from the hard disk drive and detach the hard disk drive from the hard disk mounting angle.

Jumper pin

Pull-ring

Power supply cable

Flat cable

SSD

Screws for the lower hard disk drive

(4 screws: 2 screws each on the both sides)

Hard disk drive mounting angle

6. Install the new hard disk drive in the reverse order used for detaching the hard disk drive.

Confirm that the hard disk drive is set as master using the jumper connector.

Important:

• When installing, confirm that there is no dust around the connectors. Adhesion of dust may cause malfunction.

• The jumper connector setting differs depending on the models or the manufacturers. Refer to the indication label or the operating instructions of the used hard disk drive.

• Attach the connector and the screws firmly. Otherwise, it may cause problems.

142

Screws for the upper hard disk drive

(4 screws: 2 screws each on the both sides)

Hard disk drive mounting angle

c After replacing the hard disk drive, insert the power plug into the outlet and turn on the power of the unit.

→ The "HDD DISK MENU" will be displayed automatically after the restart.

When replacing the hard disk drive without turning off the power of the unit.

z Close the SETUP MENU after selecting "ON" for "HDD

Safety Mode" of "Disk Info" on the "Maintenance" menu.

→ The HDD SAFETY MODE window will be displayed.

●

When replacing the built-in hard disk of the extension unit

With displaying the HDD SAFETY MODE window, start replacing the built-in hard disk of the optional extension unit.

Refer to the operating instructions of the optional extension unit for the descriptions of how to replace the hard disk.

c After completing the replacement of the hard disk, move the cursor to "OFF" using the arrows button and press the SET button.

→ The unit will restart and the HDD DISK MENU will be displayed automatically.

v Perform the settings for the disk according to your needs. Refer to page 148 for further information.

x The procedures are different between the replacement of the hard disk of the unit and the replacement of the hard disk of the optional extension unit.

When replacing the built-in hard disk of the unit

Move the cursor to "REMOVE" using the arrows button and press the SET button.

The OPERATE indicator on the front panel will go off.

The power supply to the front panel will be cut and the unit cannot be operated with the front panel.

Detach the cable from the front panel and start replacing the built-in hard disk.

Start from step 2 on page 141 to replace the built-in hard disk.

Important:

Detach the cable from the front panel after confirming that the OPERATE indicator on the front panel is not lit.

Otherwise, it may cause malfunction.

The OPERATE indicator on the front panel will light by attaching the cable to the front panel. The power will be supplied to the front panel and the unit can be operated with the front panel.

143

■

About the HDD DISK MENU

The operations regarding the hard disk can be performed by displaying the "HDD DISK MENU" on monitor 2.

The "HDD DISK MENU" will be displayed when the SET button is pressed while displaying the system check complete window.

The "HDD DISK MENU" will also be displayed automatically after replacing or removing the hard disk.

The following operations can be performed on the "HDD DISK MENU".

Setting item

FORMAT

MIRROR ON

MIRROR OFF

REMOVE

RESTART

EXIT

Description

Formats (initializes) the hard disk. It can also change the setting values for the recording area respectively. Mirroring can also be started on this menu.

Recovers the mirrored hard disk.

Cancels mirroring.

Removes the hard disk drive from the system logically.

Restarts this unit.

Closes the "HDD DISK MENU".

Page

146

151

152

–

144

■

Display of the HDD DISK MENU

Information of the hard disk drive of the unit or the optional extension unit will be displayed on the "HDD DISK MENU".

Main unit/optional extension unit

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

TOP MENU

FORMAT

MAIN

EXT1

EXT2

EXT3

EXT4

EXT5

EXT6

EXT7

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF REMOVE LINK RESTART

160GB

*(160GB)

160GB

*(ERROR)

ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR)

160GB

LOST

160GB

Information of recording areas : [SETUP/ESC] OK : [SET]

EXIT

Information about hard disk located in the main unit and optional extension unit

160GB:

Indicates the hard disk capacity (disk existed when last started up)

160GB M:

Indicates the hard disk capacity (mirrored disk existed when last started up)

ADD (160GB):

Indicates that this hard disk is newly mounted at this startup, but that it was not mounted last time.

Those parenthesized numbers indicate the capacity of the hard disk.

ADD (ERROR):

Indicates that this hard disk is newly mounted at this startup, but that it was not mounted last time. Then, an error is detected on the hard disk.

* (160GB):

Indicates that a different hard disk from the one that existed at the last startup is mounted. Those parenthesized numbers indicate the capacity of the hard disk.

* (ERROR):

Indicates that a different hard disk from the one that existed at the last startup is mounted, and an error has been detected on the hard disk.

LOST:

Indicates that a position where a hard disk was mounted at the last startup has no hard disk.

–:

Indicates that a hard disk is not mounted this time nor was it at the last startup.

ERROR:

Indicates that the hard disk has failed to be initialized.

Important:

• It is impossible to operate the unit when there is a hard disk with indications of * (capacity), * (ERROR), LOST or ERROR. In this case, remove the relevant hard disk.

(Refer to page 152.)

• Hard disks with ADD (capacity) indication are not initialized yet.

First, initialize them. It is impossible to record images on it or to use it as a copy destination without initialization.

Note:

The displayed available disk space on this menu will not include the space required for data management.

Therefore, the understated available disk space will be displayed.

It is possible to display information about the recording area (allocated disk size for normal recording area, event recording area and copy area) by pressing the

SETUP/ESC button while displaying the "TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU".

■

RAID 5 Function of the Extension Unit

Summary of the RAID 5 function (Redundant

Arrays for Independent Disks, independent data disks with distributed parity blocks)

●

Setup/cancel the RAID 5 function

Do the following to set or cancel the RAID 5 function with an optional extension unit.

Refer to the operating instructions of the extension unit for further information.

It is possible to use the RAID 5 function with an optional extension unit.

RAID level 5 regards 3 or more drives as one drive, and it is possible to read data by attaching error correction data even though one of the drives is broken automatically. (It is impossible to recover data if two drives are simultaneously damaged or the second drive fails during the data recovery process.)

RAID level 5 requires a minimum of 3 drives to implement.

When using the RAID function, the logical disk size of the extension unit will be as below.

Logical disk size = Smallest size of the disk among the disks in the extension unit x (Number of the disks in the extension unit - 1) z Make sure that the power of this unit and all of the extension units to be connected is OFF.

x To set the RAID 5 function, set the mode switch of the extension unit to "RAID 5".

To cancel the RAID 5 function, set the mode switch of the extension unit to "SINGLE".

c Make sure that the HDD POWER switch of the extension unit is "ON".

v Turn the power of the extension unit on.

Note:

Depending on the model of a hard disk drive, the logical disk size may be a few percent smaller than the size resulting from the formula above.

b Turn the power of this unit on.

→ The "HDD DISK MENU" will be displayed automatically after the system check when the hard disk configuration has been changed such as when an extension unit is newly connected.

Important:

• When connecting two extension units or more with this unit, it is impossible to connect the extension unit with the RAID 5 function and the one without the RAID 5 function at the same time.

• When the RAID 5 function is used, it is impossible to use two hard disks in this unit. The recorded pictures in those disks will not be deleted.

Important:

• When the RAID 5 function is set or canceled, all data on each hard disk of the extension unit will be deleted.

• When turning the power on, turn on the power of the extension unit first, and then turn the power of this unit on. Otherwise, the extension unit may not work correctly.

145

146

■

Formatting (Initialization) the

Hard Disk

It is necessary to initialize the hard disk in the following cases.

• When replacing the hard disk of this unit

• When operating the unit for the first time after connecting the optional extension unit to this unit

Important:

When the hard disk is formatted (initialized), all of the recorded images will be deleted.

●

Formatting (initialization) all hard disks (unit)

All hard disks including the built-in hard disks and the hard disks in the extension units will be initialized. All units will be initialized when the RAID 5 function is set.

z Turn on the power of any peripheral devices such as an extension unit connected to this unit.

x Turn on the power of this unit and press the SET button after completing the system check.

Note:

When the hard disk is replaced or removed, the

"TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be automatically displayed.

[Screenshot 1]

The "TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

TOP MENU

FORMAT

MAIN

EXT1

MIRROR ON

160GB

MIRROR OFF REMOVE LINK RESTART

EXT2

EXT3

160GB

*(160GB)

EXT4

EXT5

EXT6

ADD (160GB)

160GB

EXT7 LOST

160GB

*(ERROR)

ADD (ERROR)

160GB

Information of recording areas : [SETUP/ESC] OK : [SET]

EXIT

c Move the cursor to "FORMAT" using the arrows button

(A B) and press the SET button.

[Screenshot 2]

The password entry window will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

TOP MENU

FORMAT MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF REMOVE LINK RESTART

MAIN

EXT1

EXT2

EXT3

EXT4

EXT5

160GB M

160GB

*(160GB)

ADD (160GB)

EXT6

EXT7

160GB

LOST

160GB

*(ERROR)

160GB

160GB M

Enter the password.

160GB 160GB

160GB

Information of recording areas : [SETUP/ESC] OK : [SET]

EXIT

v Enter the password for an administrator by rotating the jog dial.

The camera selection buttons ([1] - [10/0] for the WJ-

HD316A, [1] - [9], [0] for the WJ-HD309A) are available to enter numbers for password.

The same method is used to enter, insert and delete characters as for attaching text information to images.

Refer to page 59.

b Move the cursor to "EXECUTE" using the arrows button

(C D) and press the SET button.

[Screenshot 3]

The "THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT" menu will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

TOP MENU THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT

ALL FORMAT SELECTED DISC MIRROR FORMAT

MAIN

EXT1

EXT2

EXT3

EXT4

160GB

*(160GB)

EXT5

EXT6

EXT7

ADD (160GB)

160GB

LOST

160GB

*(ERROR)

ADD (ERROR)

160GB

RETURN: [SETUP/ESC] OK : [SET]

160GB

n Move the cursor to "ALL UNITS" using the arrows button

(A B) and press the SET button.

Select "ALL UNITS" when using the RAID 5 function.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

TOP MENU THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT

ALL UNIT ONE UNIT

MAIN

EXT1

EXT2

EXT3

EXT4

EXT5

EXT6

EXT7

480GB

*(480GB)

ADD (480GB)

480GB

LOST

RETURN: [SETUP/ESC] OK : [SET]

<Screen displayed when using the RAID 5 function>

[Screenshot 4]

The "RECORDING AREA SETUP OF ALL DISKS" will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT RECORDING AREA SETUP OF ALL DISK

Normal area

90GB

Event area

1800GB

Copy area

450GB

Free area

450GB

HDD Total capacity : 2790GB

RETURN: [SETUP/ESC] OK : [SET]

m Select a recording area using the arrows button (A B) and rotate the jog dial to set the capacity for the selected recording area.

Repeat this operation to set the capacity for the other recording areas.

, Press the SET button after setting.

[Screenshot 5]

The confirmation dialog window will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT RECORDING AREA SETUP OF ALL DISK

Normal area

90GB

Event area Copy area

Starting format of all HDDs, and all of data in HDDs are going to be erased.

Free area

450GB

RETURN: [SETUP/ESC] OK : [SET]

. Move the cursor to "EXECUTE" using the arrows button

(A B) and press the SET button.

→ Formatting will start and the format result dialog window will be displayed. The "TOP MENU" of the

"HDD DISK MENU" will be displayed automatically after displaying the format result dialog window.

●

Formatting (initialization) the selected hard disk (unit)

Do the following to format the selected hard disk (the selected unit when using the RAID 5 function).

z Turn on the power of any peripheral devices such as an extension unit connected to this unit.

x Turn on the power of this unit.

An image saying that the system check has been completed will be displayed.

Press the SET button after the image is displayed.

Note:

When the hard disk is replaced or removed, the

"TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be displayed automatically.

[Screenshot 1]

The "TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

TOP MENU

FORMAT

MAIN

EXT1

EXT2

EXT3

EXT4

EXT5

EXT6

EXT7

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF REMOVE LINK RESTART

160GB

*(160GB)

ADD (160GB)

*(ERROR)

ADD (ERROR)

160GB

LOST

160GB

Information of recording areas : [SETUP/ESC] OK : [SET]

EXIT

c Move the cursor to "FORMAT" using the arrows button

(A B) and press the SET button.

[Screenshot 2]

The password entry window will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

TOP MENU

FORMAT MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF REMOVE LINK RESTART

MAIN

EXT1

160GB M

160GB

EXT2

EXT3

EXT4

160GB

*(160GB)

160GB

*(ERROR)

160GB

EXT5

EXT6

EXT7

ADD (160GB)

160GB

LOST

ADD (ERROR) 160GB

160GB

Information of recording areas : [SETUP/ESC] OK : [SET]

EXIT

v Rotate the jog dial to enter the password for an administrator.

The camera selection buttons ([1] - [10/0] for the WJ-

HD316A, [1] - [9], [0] for the WJ-HD309A) are available to enter numbers for password.

The same method is used to enter, insert and delete characters as for attaching text information to images.

Refer to page 59.

b Move the cursor to "OK" using the arrows button (C D) and press the SET button.

[Screenshot 3]

The "THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT" menu will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

TOP MENU THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT

MAIN

EXT1

EXT2

EXT3

EXT4

EXT5

EXT6

EXT7

ALL FORMAT SELECTED DISC MIRROR FORMAT

160GB

*(160GB)

ADD (160GB)

*(ERROR)

ADD (ERROR)

160GB

LOST

160GB

3 4

160GB

RETURN: [SETUP/ESC] OK : [SET]

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

TOP MENU THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT

ALL UNIT ONE UNIT

MAIN

EXT1

EXT2

EXT3

EXT4

EXT5

EXT6

EXT7

480GB

*(480GB)

ADD (480GB)

480GB

LOST

RETURN: [SETUP/ESC] OK : [SET]

<Screen displayed when using the RAID 5 function>

n Move the cursor to "SELECTED DISK" using the arrows button (A B) and press the SET button.

When using the RAID 5 function, select "ONE UNIT" on

"THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT" menu.

147

148

[Screenshot 4]

The "DISK SELECT" menu will be displayed.

When using the RAID 5 function, the "UNIT SELECTION" menu will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT DISK SELECT

MAIN

Select HDD to be formatted,and press [SET]key.

160GB

EXT1

EXT2

EXT3

EXT4

EXT5

EXT6

160GB

*(160GB)

ADD (160GB)

160GB

EXT7

LOST

1 2

160GB

*(ERROR)

ADD (ERROR)

160GB

RETURN: [SETUP/ESC] OK : [SET]

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT UNIT SELECTION

Select HDD to be formatted,and press [SET] key.

MAIN

EXT1

EXT2

480GB

EXT3

EXT4

EXT5

*(480GB)

ADD (480GB)

EXT6

EXT7

480GB

LOST

RETURN: [SETUP/ESC] OK : [SET]

<Screen displayed when using the RAID 5 function>

m Move the cursor to a desired hard disk (unit) to be formatted (initialized) using the arrows button (C D A

B) and press the SET button.

[Screenshot 5]

"THE SETTING METHOD" menu will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

DISK SELECT THE SETTING METHOD

MAIN

EXT1

EXT2

Auto Setup All Copy Area All Pre REC Area Detailed Setup

160GB

EXT3

EXT4

EXT5

*(160GB)

ADD (160GB)

EXT6

EXT7

160GB

LOST

160GB

*(ERROR)

ADD (ERROR)

160GB

RETURN: [SETUP/ESC] OK : [SET]

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

DISK SELECT THE SETTING METHOD

Auto Setup All Copy Area All Pre REC Area Detailed Setup

MAIN -

EXT1

EXT2

480GB

EXT3

EXT4

EXT5

*(480GB)

ADD (480GB)

EXT6

EXT7

480GB

LOST

RETURN: [SETUP/ESC] OK : [SET]

<Screen displayed when using the RAID 5 function>

, Select a setting method for each recording area from the following using the arrows button (A B) and press the SET button.

Auto Setup:

Assigns the same proportion for each recording area as the proportion of the existing hard disks. (

→ step 9)

All Copy Area:

Sets the whole selected hard disk (unit) as the copy area. (

→ step 9)

All Pre REC Area:

Sets the whole selected hard disk

(extension unit) as the pre-recording area. (

→ step

10)

Detailed Setup:

Sets each recording area individually.

(

→ step 11)

Important:

When the built-in hard disk of this unit is selected, "All

Pre REC Area" is not available.

[Screenshot 6]

The confirmation menu of the set recording area will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

DISK SETTING METHOD AUTO SETUP

Normal area

119GB

Event area

0GB

Copy area

0GB

Free area

0GB

HDD Total capacity:119GB

RETURN: [SETUP/ESC] OK : [SET]

<Screen displayed when selecting "AUTO SETUP">

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

DISK SETTING METHOD ALL COPY AREA

Normal area

0GB

Event area

0GB

Copy area

160GB

Free area

0GB

HDD Total capacity:160GB

RETURN: [SETUP/ESC] OK : [SET]

<Screen displayed when selecting "ALL COPY AREA">

. Confirm the capacity of the set recording area and press the SET button.

→ The confirmation dialog window will be displayed.

(

→ step 13)

[Screenshot 7]

The "PRE RECORDING AREAS" menu will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

DISK SETTING METHOD PRE RECORDING AREAS

1CH

0GB

9CH

0GB

2CH

0GB

3CH

0GB

4CH

0GB

10CH

0GB

11CH

0GB

12CH

0GB

5CH

0GB

6CH

0GB

7CH

0GB

13CH

0GB

14CH

0GB

15CH

0GB

8CH

0GB

16CH

0GB

HDD Total capacity:160GB

FREE

0GB

RETURN: [SETUP/ESC] OK : [SET]

⁄0 Select the camera channel for pre-event recording using the arrows button (C D A B) and assign the disk space to the selected pre-recording area by rotating the jog dial.

Repeat this operation to assign disk space to two or more camera channels.

Press the SET button after setting.

→ The confirmation dialog window will be displayed.

(

→ step 13)

Important:

It is impossible to select the camera channel to which the pre-recording area on another hard disk (extension unit) is already assigned.

[Screenshot 8]

The "DETAILED SETUP" menu will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

DISK SETTING METHOD DETAILED SETUP

Normal area

119GB

Event area

0GB

Copy area

0GB

Free area

50GB

HDD Total capacity:119GB

RETURN: [SETUP/ESC] OK : [SET]

⁄1 Select the recording area using the arrows button (A

B) and assign the disk space to the selected recording area by rotating the jog dial.

Repeat this operation to assign disk space to two or more recording areas.

⁄2 Press the SET button after setting.

[Screenshot 9]

The confirmation dialog window will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

DISK SETTING METHOD DETAILED SETUP

Normal area

110GB

Event area Copy area Free area

0GB 30GB

All of contents in the disk is erased.

RETURN: [SETUP/ESC] OK : [SET]

⁄3 Move the cursor to "EXECUTE" using the arrows button

(A B) and press the SET button.

→ Formatting will start and the "TOP MENU" of the

"HDD DISK MENU" will be displayed.

149

150

■

Setting for Mirroring

Mirroring is the function that records camera images onto two hard disks simultaneously. In case one hard disk has a problem, image data will be stored on the other hard disk.

The credibility of the disk can be enhanced.

It is recommended to activate the mirroring function for the first use of this unit.

When the mirroring function is activated with remaining recorded images in the hard disk, those recorded images in the hard disk will be deleted.

Important:

• The mirroring function can be configured only by two of the built-in hard disks.

• The size of the two hard disks used for the mirroring function must be the same.

• When using the RAID 5 function, it is impossible to activate the mirroring function.

●

Start mirroring

Do the following to activate the mirroring function.

z Turn on the power of this unit.

An image saying that the system check has been completed will be displayed.

Press the SET button after the image is displayed.

Note:

When the hard disk is replaced or removed, the

"TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be automatically displayed.

[Screenshot 1]

The "TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

TOP MENU

FORMAT MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF REMOVE LINK RESTART

MAIN

EXT1

EXT2

EXT3

EXT4

160GB

*(160GB)

EXT5

EXT6

EXT7

ADD (160GB)

160GB

LOST

160GB

*(ERROR)

ADD (ERROR)

160GB

Information of recording areas : [SETUP/ESC] OK : [SET]

EXIT

x Move the cursor to "FORMAT" using the arrows button

(A B) and press the SET button.

[Screenshot 2]

The password entry window will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

TOP MENU

FORMAT MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF REMOVE LINK RESTART

MAIN

EXT1

EXT2

EXT3

EXT4

EXT5

160GB M

160GB

*(160GB)

ADD (160GB)

EXT6

EXT7

160GB

LOST

2 3

160GB M

Enter the password.

160GB 160GB

160GB

*(ERROR)

160GB

Information of recording areas : [SETUP/ESC] OK : [SET]

EXIT

c Enter the password for an administrator by rotating the jog dial.

The camera selection buttons ([1] - [10/0] for the WJ-

HD316A, [1] - [9], [0] for the WJ-HD309A) are available to enter numbers for the password.

The same method is used to enter, insert and delete characters as for attaching text information to images.

Refer to page 59.

v Move the cursor to "EXECUTE" using the arrows button

(C D) and press the SET button.

[Screenshot 3]

The confirmation dialog window will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

TOP MENU THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT

ALL FORMAT SELECTED DISC MIRROR FORMAT

MAIN

EXT1

EXT2

EXT3

EXT4

160GB

*(160GB)

EXT5

EXT6

EXT7

ADD (160GB)

160GB

LOST

160GB

*(ERROR)

ADD (ERROR)

160GB

3 4

160GB

RETURN: [SETUP/ESC] OK : [SET]

b Move the cursor to "MIRROR FORMAT" using the arrows button (C D) and press the SET button.

[Screenshot 4]

The "MIRROR AREA SETUP" menu will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

DISK SETTING METHOD MIRROR AREA SETUP

Normal area

10GB

Event area

90GB

Copy area

30GB

Free area

30GB

HDD Total capacity:160GB

RETURN: [SETUP/ESC] OK : [SET]

n Select a recording area using the arrows button (C D

A B), and assign the disk space to the selected recording area by rotating the jog dial.

Repeat this operation to assign disk space to two or more recording areas.

m Press the SET button after setting.

[Screenshot 5]

The confirmation dialog window will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

DISK CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT MIRROR AREA SETUP

Normal area

110GB

Event area Copy area

Starting mirror format of HDDs

00GB

Free area

30GB in HDDs are going to be erased.

RETURN: [SETUP/ESC] OK : [SET]

, Move the cursor to "EXECUTE" using the arrows button

(A B) and press the SET button.

→ Mirroring will start and the "TOP MENU" of the "HDD

DISK MENU" will be displayed.

●

Cancel mirroring (MIRROR OFF)

Do the following to cancel the mirroring function.

z Turn on the power of this unit.

An image saying that the system check has been completed will be displayed.

Press the SET button after the image is displayed.

Note:

When the hard disk is replaced or removed, the

"TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be automatically displayed.

[Screenshot 1]

The "TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

TOP MENU

FORMAT

MAIN

EXT1

EXT2

EXT3

EXT4

EXT5

EXT6

EXT7

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF REMOVE LINK RESTART

160GB

LOST

160GB

*(160GB)

ADD (160GB)

*(ERROR)

ADD (ERROR)

160GB 160GB

160GB

Information of recording areas : [SETUP/ESC] OK : [SET]

EXIT

x Move the cursor to "MIRROR OFF" using the arrows button (A B) and press the SET button.

[Screenshot 2]

The password entry window will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

TOP MENU

FORMAT MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF REMOVE LINK RESTART

MAIN

EXT1

160GB M

160GB

EXT2

EXT3

EXT4

160GB

*(160GB)

160GB

*(ERROR)

160GB

EXT5

EXT6

EXT7

ADD (160GB)

160GB

LOST

ADD (ERROR) 160GB

160GB

Information of recording areas : [SETUP/ESC] OK : [SET]

EXIT

c Enter the password for an administrator by rotating the jog dial.

The camera selection buttons ([1] - [10/0] for the WJ-

HD316A, [1] - [9], [0] for the WJ-HD309A) are available to enter numbers for password.

The same method is used to enter, insert and delete characters as for attaching text information to images.

Refer to page 59.

v Move the cursor to "EXECUTE" using the arrows button

(C D) and press the SET button.

[Screenshot 3]

The confirmation dialog window will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

TOP MENU

FORMAT

MAIN

EXT1

EXT2

EXT3

EXT4

EXT5

EXT6

EXT7

MIRROR ON

160GB M

160GB

*(160GB)

MIRROR OFF REMOVE LINK RESTART

160GB M

160GB

ADD (160GB)

160GB

ADD (ERROR)

160GB

LOST

160GB

Information of recording areas : [SETUP/ESC] OK : [SET]

EXIT

b Move the cursor to "OK" using the arrows button (A B) and press the SET button.

→ Mirroring will be canceled.

Note:

One of the two hard disks involved in mirroring will be indicated as "ADD (capacity)" on the "TOP

MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" after canceling the mirroring function.

●

Hard disk recovery (MIRROR ON)

Do the following to recover the hard disk when one of the hard disks involved in mirroring is damaged while mirroring, or when one of the hard disks is replaced.

By completing the following procedures, recovery of the hard disk will start when the unit is in operation after the

HDD DISK MENU is closed.

z Turn on the power of this unit.

An image saying that the system check has been completed will be displayed.

Press the SET button after the image is displayed.

151

152

Note:

When the hard disk is replaced or removed, the

"TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be automatically displayed.

[Screenshot 1]

The "TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

TOP MENU

FORMAT MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF REMOVE LINK RESTART

MAIN

EXT1

EXT2

EXT3

EXT4

EXT5

EXT6

160GB

*(160GB)

ADD (160GB)

160GB

EXT7 LOST

160GB

*(ERROR)

ADD (ERROR)

160GB

Information of recording areas : [SETUP/ESC] OK : [SET]

EXIT

x Move the cursor to "MIRROR ON" using the arrows button (A B) and press the SET button.

Note:

When it is impossible to recover the hard disk

(mirror on) such in case that the hard disk size to be recovered is too small, it is impossible to select

"MIRROR ON".

[Screenshot 2]

The password entry window will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

TOP MENU

FORMAT MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF REMOVE LINK RESTART

MAIN

EXT1

EXT2

EXT3

EXT4

EXT5

EXT6

160GB M

160GB

*(160GB)

ADD (160GB)

160GB

EXT7

LOST -

160GB

*(ERROR)

160GB

Information of recording areas : [SETUP/ESC] OK : [SET]

160GB

EXIT

c Enter the password for an administrator by rotating the jog dial.

The camera selection buttons ([1] - [10/0] for the WJ-

HD316A, [1] - [9], [0] for the WJ-HD309A) are available to enter numbers for password.

The same method is used to enter, insert and delete characters as for attaching text information to images.

Refer to page 59.

v Move the cursor to "EXECUTE" using the arrows button

(C D) and press the SET button.

[Screenshot 3]

The confirmation dialog window will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

TOP MENU

FORMAT

MAIN

EXT1

EXT2

EXT3

EXT4

EXT5

EXT6

EXT7

MIRROR ON

160GB M

160GB

MIRROR OFF REMOVE LINK RESTART

160GB M

160GB

LOST

160GB

*(160GB)

ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR)

160GB 160GB

160GB

Information of recording areas : [SETUP/ESC] OK : [SET]

EXIT

b Move the cursor to "OK" using the arrows button (A B) and press the SET button.

→ Recovery of the hard disk will start when the unit is in operation after the "HDD DISK MENU" is closed.

●

Remove the Hard Disk Logically and

Reconfigure it (REMOVE LINK)

It is possible to remove the hard disk logically (unmount) without uninstalling (detaching) the hard disk physically. It is recommended to remove the hard disk logically when the hard disk of the unit or an extension unit is having trouble

(hard disk indicated with "*", "LOST" or "ERROR") and it is necessary to remove it temporarily but not to stop operation.

Do the following to remove the hard disk logically.

z Turn on the power of this unit.

An image saying that the system check has been completed will be displayed.

Press the SET button after the image is displayed.

Note:

When the hard disk is replaced or removed, the

"TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be automatically displayed.

[Screenshot 1]

The "TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

TOP MENU

FORMAT MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF REMOVE LINK RESTART

MAIN

EXT1

160GB

EXT2

EXT3

EXT4

EXT5

160GB

*(160GB)

ADD (160GB)

EXT6

EXT7

160GB

LOST

160GB

*(ERROR)

ADD (ERROR)

160GB

Information of recording areas : [SETUP/ESC] OK : [SET]

EXIT

x Move the cursor to "REMOVE LINK" using the arrows button (A B) and press the SET button.

[Screenshot 2]

The password entry window will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

TOP MENU

FORMAT

MAIN

EXT1

EXT2

EXT3

EXT4

EXT5

EXT6

EXT7

MIRROR ON

160GB M

160GB

*(160GB)

160GB

LOST

MIRROR OFF REMOVE LINK RESTART

160GB

*(ERROR)

160GB

ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

160GB

Information of recording areas : [SETUP/ESC] OK : [SET]

EXIT

c Enter the password for an administrator by rotating the jog dial.

The camera selection buttons ([1] - [10/0] for the WJ-

HD316A, [1] - [9], [0] for the WJ-HD309A) are available to enter numbers for password.

The same method is used to enter, insert and delete characters as for attaching text information to images.

Refer to page 59.

[Screenshot 3]

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

TOP MENU

FORMAT

MAIN

EXT1

EXT2

EXT3

EXT4

EXT5

EXT6

EXT7

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF REMOVE LINK RESTART

160GB M

160GB

*(160GB)

2 3 4

160GB M

Removing all"*" and lost links

160GB 160GB 160GB

160GB

ADD (160GB)

160GB

ADD (ERROR)

160GB

LOST

*(ERROR)

160GB

Information of recording areas : [SETUP/ESC] OK : [SET]

EXIT

v Move the cursor to "EXECUTE" using the arrows button

(D C), and press the SET button.

b Move the cursor to "EXECUTE" using the arrows button

(A B), and press the SET button.

→ The hard disk will be removed logically and the confirmation dialog window will be displayed.

[Screenshot 4]

The confirmation dialog window will be displayed after logical remove of the hard disk is started.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A

HDD DISK MENU

TOP MENU REMOVING

REMOVING

MAIN : REMOVED OK

EXT1–4 : REMOVED OK

EXT2–1 : REMOVED OK

EXT2–2 : REMOVED OK

EXT5–3 : REMOVED OK

EXT6–1 : REMOVED OK

EXT6–2 : REMOVED OK

EXT6–3 : REMOVED OK

EXT6–4 : REMOVED OK

EXT7–1 : REMOVED OK

n The "TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be displayed when logical remove has been completed.

153

SERIAL (RS232C) CONNECTOR COMMAND REFERENCE

■

SERIAL (RS232C) Communication Protocol

With the SERIAL (RS232C) interface, you can control functions of this unit by transferring the specified commands from a personal computer (PC) to this unit.

Notes:

• This unit does not support the communication converted between the SERIAL (RS232C) and USB interface.

• When controlling the unit with the SERIAL (RS232C) interface, the following parameters should be identical between the communication devices.

The setting is available in "SETUP MENU" – "Comm" – "RS232C Setup".

Baud Rate

Data Bit

Parity

Stop Bit

154

■

Command Format

The following pages detail how to write the commands.

1. The following details how to write the commands

Code

ASCII

[STX] AD [Unit address of this unit] [Transmission Command] : [p] [ETX]

(02H) – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – (03H)

STX:

This shows the data start. STX (ASCII code: 02h) is always prefixed to data. h shows hexadecimal digit.

Unit address of the unit:

Designate the unit address set for "RS232C" of "Comm" on the SETUP MENU.

Transmission command:

A command shown in the Command List is designated.

ETX:

This shows the data end. ETX (ASCII code: 03h) is always prefixed to data.

The character code is ASCII.

When a command needs a parameter, a colon (:) is used for dividing the command and parameter. The following shows how to write the commands when two or more commands are specified.

Code [STX] AD [Unit address of this unit] [Transmission Command] : [p1] : [p2] [ETX]

2. Response Command (from the Unit to the PC)

The unit sends back the response command for the transmission command from the PC.

• When the reception was completed successfully

The response command differs between when an ANSWER command (sending back the status or data) is required or when not required.

• When no ANSWER command is required

The unit sends back the same identifier as that in the transmission command, as shown in the figure.

Transmission command (

→

The unit)

[STX] OPL [ETX]

Response command (

←

The unit)

[STX] OPL [ETX]

Same identifier

• When an ANSWER command is required

The unit sends back the status or data, as shown in the figure.

Transmission command (

→

The unit)

[STX] QSR [ETX]

Status inquiry command

Response command (

←

The unit)

[STX] OPL [ETX]

Status information command

Transmission command (

→

The unit)

[STX] QRV [ETX]

Version inquiry command

Response command (

←

The unit)

[STX] QRV:1.01:1.01:1.00:1.10

[ETX]

Sends back data.

• About ACK code

After receiving a command from the PC, the unit sends back the ACK code to the PC in 20 ms or less.

[ACK] = Reception succeeded (ASCII code: 06H)

After the ACK code has been sent back and the command processing has been completed, the unit sends back the response command to the PC.

Example:

These are examples for the following operations.

1. Login with the user name of "ADMIN" and with password of "12345".

2. Display images from camera channel 1 on monitor 2.

3. Start playback from the point of January 1 2003, 3:00 p.m.

4. Logout

(1) (PC -> This unit) Login

[STX]AD001;OLI:ADMIN[SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP]

[SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP]:12345[SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP]

[SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP][ETX]

When receiving the command above, this unit will start the login procession of the user name of "ADMIN".

(2) (This unit -> PC) Response against (1).

[STX]AD001;OLI:1[ETX]

(3) (PC -> This unit) Select the monitor 2

[STX]AD001;OMS:0002[ETX]

(4) (This unit -> PC) Response against (3).

[STX]AD001;OMS:0002[ETX]

(5) (PC -> This unit) Display images from the camera channel 1.

[STX]AD001;OCS:00001[ETX]

(6) (This unit - > PC) Response against (5).

[STX]AD001;OCS:00001[ETX]

(7) (PC -> This unit) Playback from the designated time point.

[STX]AD001;ZTP:20030101150000[ETX]

When receiving the command above, this unit will start playback from the point of January 1 2003, 3:00 p.m.

(8) (This unit - > PC) Response against (7).

[STX]AD001;ZTP: 20030101150000[ETX]

155

156

(9) (PC -> This unit) Logout.

[STX]AD001;OLO [ETX]

When receiving the command above, the user logged in via SERIAL (RS232C) (ADMIN) will log out.

(10) (This unit - > PC) Response against (9).

[STX]AD001;OLO[ETX]

Note:

The character code of [STX], [ETX] and [SP] are as follows.

[STX]: 02h

[ETX]: 03h

[SP] (space): 20h

3. Reception Error

The response command differs between the reception error and parameter error.

• Communication error (Reception error)

When the unit cannot properly receive the command due to the communication error, the unit immediately sends back the

NACK code to the PC. After clearing the receive buffer, the unit enters the wait state until receiving the following [STX] command.

[NCK] = Reception failed (ASCII code: 15H)

Reason for the communication error

1: Parity error (ASCII code: 31H)

2: Framing error (ASCII code: 33H)

3: Overrun error (ASCII code: 34H)

• Parameter error

When the unit cannot properly process the received command, the unit sends back an error code to the PC. After clearing the receive buffer, the unit enters the wait state until receiving the following [STX] command.

ER [ETX] =Error

Reason for the error

001: Command invalid (There is no associated command.)

002: Parameter invalid (The number, digit, or range of the command parameters is incorrect.)

301: Command invalid (The unit does not support the operation mode.)

E: Command error (ASCII code: 45H)

• If the unit receives another command during the response, the unit will respond to the command after processing the current response.

• If the unit received the [STX] command again before receiving the [ETX] command, the unit will clear the internal buffer.

Then, the unit will process the data following to the [STX] command. (The commands received before the second [STX] command will be canceled.)

• The internal buffer will be cleared when it fills up.*

4. PC Connection Example

An RS232C crossing cable is used for connection between the unit and PC. (Refer to the following for the pin array of the SERI-

AL connector and a cable connection sample.)

D-sub Pin 9

(Female)

3 1

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

15 14

SERIAL ALARM

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

13 12 11

MONITOR (VGA)

10 9

ALARM/CONTROL

8 7

OUT

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

VIDEO

8 7 6

MODE

2 1

COPY 1

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

4 3

10/100BASE-T

EXT STORAGE

5 4 3 2 1

This unit

SIGNAL GND

POWER

AC IN

D-sub Pin 9

(Female)

5 1

9 6

As viewed from the rear of the

WJ-HD316A/WJ-HD309A

Pin No.

Signal Name I/O

1 CD IN

RXD

TXD

DTR

OUT

–

DSR

RTS

CTS

OUT

7 (RTS)

Cross cable connection example

7 (RTS)

8 (CTS)

3 (TXD)

5 (GND)

2 (RXD)

8 (CTS)

3 (TXD)

5 (GND)

2 (RXD)

WJ-HD316A/WJ-HD309A

PC or another device

157

158

●

Command Table

Basic Operation

Item

Forward a field

Rewind a field

Pause during playback

Play

Manual recording

Manual recording with text

Stop

Transmission command (ASCII)

OVF

OVR

OPA

OPL

ORC

ZMR:nn:ddd...ddd

Response command (ASCII)

OVF

OVR

OPA

OPL

ORC

ZMR:nn

OSP:n OSP

Skip & play forward OSF:n OSF

Skip&play reversely OSR:n

Record No. Search and playback

Time & date search and playback

Record skip

ZPR:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr:mm

ZTP:yyyymmddhhnnss

OSK:dnn

LISTED Playback

Playback latest image

A - B repeat playback

ZLT:n

ZPM

ZRP:n

Display COPY SETUP

Display text

Multi-screen switching

ZPD:n

ZDT:n

OTC:m

Monitor selection

Camera selection

OMS:nnnn

OCS:ccccc

OSR

ZPR:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr

ZTP:yyyymmddhhnnss

OSK

ZLT:n

ZPM

ZRP:n:yyyymmddhhnnss

ZPD:n

ZDT:n

OTC:m

OMS:nnnn

OCS:ccccc

Parameter (ASCII)

nn=01~99 (Sequence number) ddd...ddd: text (200 bytes or less) n=P: Stops PLAY n=R: Stops REC no parameter stops PLAY and REC n=0F Normal speed n=1F x2 speed n=2F x5 speed n=3F x10 speed n=4F x20 speed n=5F x50 speed n=6F x100 speed n=0S Normal speed n=1S 1/2 speed n=0F Normal speed n=1F x2 speed n=2F x5 speed n=3F x10 speed n=4F x20 speed n=5F x50 speed n=6F x100 speed n=0S Normal speed n=1S 1/2 speed rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr Record No.

yyyymmddhhnnss:Time & date of playback image d=+ Forward

– Backward nn=01 Number of skipped records: Fixed n=0 OFF n=1 ON n=0 A - B repeat playback OFF n=1 Set repeat start point (A point) n=2 Set repeat end point (B point) yyyymmddhhnnss: Date and time of A/B point n=0 COPY SETUP MENU OFF n=1 COPY SETUP MENU ON n=0 Text display OFF n=1 Text display ON m=0 4-split screen m=1 7-split screen m=2 9-split screen m=3 10-split screen m=4 13-split screen m=5 16-split screen nnnn=0001 Select MON 1 nnnn=0002 Select MON 2 ccccc: Camera CH

Item

Electronic zooming

Start sequence

Stop sequence

Disk selection

Transmission command (ASCII)

OZM:m

Response command (ASCII)

OZM:n

OQT:01F

OQS:0

ZDS:k

OQT:01F:010

OQS

ZDS:k

Parameter (ASCII)

m=0 Electronic zooming OFF m=1 Electronic zooming ON m=> Switch x2 -> x4 m=< Switch x4 -> x2 m=+ Switch Electronic zooming OFF -> x2 -> x4 -> Electronic zooming OFF -> ...

m=- Switch x4 -> x2 -> Electronic zooming OFF

-> x4 -> ...

n=0 Electronic zooming OFF n=2 x2 n=4 x4 k=0 HDD normal/event recording sector k=1 HDD copy sector k=2 Disk connected to COPY 1 k=3 Disk connected to COPY 2

Marking

Alarm Control

Item

Alarm input

Alarm input with text

ZMP

Alarm reset

Alarm suspension

Alarm change information

(LED indication)

–

OAL:n

MAD:n

Alarm change information –

ZMP

Transmission command (ASCII)

OAI:b

1 b

2 b

3 a

1 a

2 a

3 a

Response command (ASCII)

OAI

ZAI:b

1 b

2 b

3 a

1 a

2 a

3 a

: nn:ddd...ddd

ZAI:nn

OAL

MAD:n

ALD:n

ALM: b

1 b

2 b

3 a

1 a

2 a

3 a

Setup Control

Item

Display SETUP MENU

Move cursor

Transmission command (ASCII)

MSU:n

Response command (ASCII)

MSU:n

DCR:n1n2 DCR

Parameter (ASCII)

1 b

2 b

: Head alarm CH information (binary) a

1 a

2 a

3 a

: Alarm CH information (binary) b

1 a

1 b

2 b a

2 a

: Head alarm CH information (binary) a

: Alarm CH information (binary) nn=01 - 99 (Sequence No) ddd...ddd: text (200 bytes or less) n=0 Alarm all reset n=1 Alarm reset n=0 Alarm suspension OFF n=1 Alarm suspension ON n=0 LED OFF n=1 LED ON n=2 LED Blinking b1b2b3: Head alarm CH information (binary) a1a2a3a4: Alarm CH information (binary)

Date & Time setup

Summer time setup

Recording mode setup

TSU:yyyymmddhhnn

MST:n

MRM:n

TSU

MST

MRM

Parameter (ASCII)

n=0 SETUP MENU OFF n=1 SETUP MENU ON n1n2=A1 Right n1n2=C1 Upward n1n2=E1 Left n1n2=G1 Downward n1n2=+1 Increment parameter (+) n1n2=-1 Decrement parameter (–) n1n2=PD Move to virtual menu (SET) n1n2=P+ Go to the next page (FWD) n1n2=P- Go back to the previous page (BACK) n1n2=PU Move to upper layer (ESC) yyyymmddhhnn: Date and time n=0 Standard time n=1 Summer time n=0 Normal recording mode n=2 Continuous (External timer) recording mode

Login/Logout

Item

Logout

Transmission command (ASCII)

OLI:uuu...uuu: ppp...ppp

Response command (ASCII)

OLI:n

Parameter (ASCII)

uuu...uuu: User name (32-byte fixed length) ppp...ppp: Password (32-byte fixed length) n=0 Error in user name/password n=1 Login succeeded n=2 Login failed

OLO OLO

159

160

Data Control

Item

Copy by specifying record

Copy by specifying date

& time

Data copy completed

Cancel data copy

Erase log

Log data total number inquiry

Log readout

Record list acquisition

Text acquisition

Text writing

Transmission command (ASCII)

ZCR:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr:m

ZCT:y

1 y

1 m

1 d

1 h

1 n

2 y

2 m

2 d

–

2 d

ZDC h

ZLC:k

2 h

2 n

:nnnnnnnn

2 n

:s:ccc:m

ZLQ:k:y

1 y

1 m

1 d

1 h

1 n

2 y

2 m

2 d

2 h

2 n

ZLR:yyyymmdd hhnn:mmmmmmmm

ZGR:yyyymmddnn

ZGT:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr

ZPT:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr: <TEXT>

Response command (ASCII)

ZCR

ZCT

ZEC:y h y n

2 h y n

ZDC y n y

2 m

2 d

:s:ccc:m

ZLC:k

1 n y

: y

1 y

1 m

1 d

ZLQ:k:y

1 y

1 m

1 d

1 h

1 n

1 y

2 y

2 m

2 d

2 h

2 n

:dddddddd

ZGT:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr: <TEXT>

ZPT:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr d

ZLR:k:<Log Data

1>s1:<Log Data

2>s2:...:<Log Data n>sn

ZGR<Log Data

1>s1:<Log Data h

2 h

2>s2:...:<Log Data n>sn

Parameter (ASCII)

rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr: Record No.

m=0 Copy to HDD copy sector m=1 Copy to media connected to COPY 1 m=2 Copy to media connected to COPY 2 y

1 y

1 m

1 d data copy

1 d

1 h

1 n

: Start date & time of y

2 y

2 m

2 d data copy

2 d

2 h

2 n

: End date & time of s=0 Format to specify the camera CH. Fixed to

0 ccc: Camera CH No. of target for data copy m=0 Copy to HDD copy sector m=1 Copy to media connected to COPY 1 m=2 Copy to media connected to COPY 2 y

1 y

1 m

1 d data copy

1 d

1 h

1 n

: Start date & time of y

2 y

2 m

2 d data copy

2 d

2 h

2 n

: End date & time of s=0 Format to specify the camera CH. Fixed to

0 ccc: Camera CH No. of target for data copy m=0 Copy to HDD copy sector m=1 Copy to media connected to COPY 1 m=2 Copy to media connected to COPY 2 k=1 Event input log k=2 Error log k=3 Access log k=0 Record list k=1 Event input log k=2 Error log k=3 (Access log) y

1 y

1 m

1 d inquiry range

1 d

1 h

1 n

: Start date & time of y

2 y

2 m

2 d inquiry range

2 d

2 h

2 n

: End date & time of dddddddd: Log data total number k=1 (Event input log) k=2 (Error log) k=3 (Access log) yyyymmddhhnn Start date & time of readout logs mmmmmmmm: Total number of acquired logs

(00000000 - 00000050)

<Log Data n>: Log data sn: 0-9 Cyclic number yyyymmddhhnn: Start date & time of readout list mmmmmmmm: Total record number in the acquired list (00000001 - 00000050)

<Log Data n>: Log data sn: 0-9 Cyclic number rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr: Record No.

<TEXT>: text data rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr: Record No.

<TEXT>: text data 200 bytes or less

Disk End Notification

Item

Disk end auto-notification setting

Disk end auto-notification

Transmission command (ASCII)

MDE:n

Response command (ASCII)

MDE:n

HDE:– HDE:p

Parameter (ASCII)

n=0 (Auto-notification OFF) n=1 (Auto-notification ON) p=1 (Normal recording sector) p=2 (Event recording sector) p=3 (Copy sector)

Search Operation

Item

Display the search window

Transmission command (ASCII)

ZTL:n

Response command (ASCII)

ZTL:n

Parameter (ASCII)

n=0 (Display the search window) n=1 (Display the recording event list) n=2 (Display the recording event thumbnail) n=3 (Display the VMD search list) n=4 (Display the VMD search thumbnail) n=5 (Display the marking search list) n=6 (Display the marking search thumbnail) n=7 (Display the menu for playback by designating time and date)

Display Operation

Item

Switch display

Inquiry

Item

Available disk space inquiry

Transmission command (ASCII)

DIN:n

Response command (ASCII)

DIN

Transmission command (ASCII)

QHR:p

Response command (ASCII)

QHR:p:sss

Parameter (ASCII)

n=+

Parameter (ASCII)

p=1 HDD normal recording sector p=2 HDD event recording sector p=3 HDD copy sector p=4 Disk connected to COPY 1 p=5 Disk connected to COPY 2 sss: Available disk space (%)

ID request

Interface ID request

QID

QIB

Production category request

Alarm information request

QIC

QLD:0

Software version inquiry

Status inquiry

QRV

QSR

QID:WJ-HD309A or

QID:WJ-HD316A

QIB:WJ-HD309A or

QIB:WJ-HD316A

QIC:2

QLD:n

QRV:n.nn

QSR:Status 1:Status 2...

n=0 (No alarm) n=1 (Alarm end) n=2 (Under alarm operation) n.nn: Software version

Following response commands are sends back for "Status 1:Status 2..." msu:0 Under normal operation msu:1 Under setting oms:0001 Monitor 1 oms:0002 Monitor 2 ocs:ccccc ccccc: Camera number otc:n Multiscreen segment display pattern n=0: 4 segments n=1: 7segments n=2: 9 segments n=3: 10 segments n=4: 13 segments n=5: 16 segments oqt: 01F Sequence activated ozm: 0 Zoom OFF ozm: 2 x2 zoom ozm: 4 x4 zoom opa: Currently playback is being paused opl: Currently playback is being performed orc: Currently recording is being performed osf:n: Currently fast playback is being performed osp:p: Currently playback is being stopped osp:r: Currently recording is being stopped osr:n: Currently fast reverse playback is being performed mad: 0 Alarm suspension OFF mad: 1 Alarm suspension ON

161

162

Item

Recording mode inquiry

Monitor status inquiry

Recording status inquiry

Record number information

Camera SYNC status inquiry

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

QRM

ZQM

ZQS

–

QSY:a

1 b

2 b

3 a

2 a

3 b

4 b

5 a

4 a

Parameter (ASCII)

ztl:n Search editing area ON n=0 Search editing area OFF n=1 Recording event search list ON n=2 Recording event search thumbnail

ON n=3 VMD search list ON n=4 VMD search thumbnail ON n=5 Marking search list ON n=6 Marking search thumbnail ON n=7 Search playback display ON zdt:0 Text display OFF zdt:1 Text display ON

QRM:n

ZQM:m:a

ZRN:sss:nn:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr

:nnyyyymmddhhnnss: ccc:x;yyy:t a

2 a

3 mmddhhnnss a

:yyyy

ZQS:1 CH recording activated:

2 CH recording activated...16

CH recording activated

QSY:a

1 b

2 b

3 a

2 a

3 a

4 a

5 b

4 b

1 s

2 s

...sm

n=0 Normal recording mode n=2 Continuous (External timer) recording mode m=0 Live m=1 Live sequence m=2 Playback m=3 Other statuses a

1 a

2 a

3 a

: Camera CH information (binary) yyyymmddhhnnss: Playback time

Recording status nn=00 (Recording stop) nn=01 (Manual recording activated) nn=02 (Event recording activated) nn=03 (Schedule recording activated) nn=04 (Emergency recording activated) sss: Unit address nn=Sequence number rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr: Record number yyyymmddhhnnss: Recording event date and time ccc: Camera CH x=0 Manual recording x=1 Schedule recording x=2 VMD recording x=3 Alarm port recording x=4 Command alarm recording x=5 VIDEO LOSS recording x=6 Emergency recording yyy: Event-activated CH t=0 Text included t=1 Text not included nn=Sequence number a

1 a

2 a

3 a

4 a

- b

1 b

2 b

3 b

4 to inquire SYNC status b

: Range of camera CH s

1 s m s

(s m s

...sm: SYNC status of each camera

=0: SYNC status not found

=1: SYNC status found)

Item

Record information inquiry

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

ZGP:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr ZGP:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr: ccc:q:nnnn:yyyymmdd hhnnss:nnss:t:ssssss

Parameter (ASCII)

rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr: Record number ccc: Camera CH q: picture quality (0 (Super Fine), 1 (Fine), 2

(Normal), 3 (Extended)) nnnn: Recording rate yyyymmddhhnnss: Recording start date and time nnss: Recording total time t=0 Text included t=1 Text not included ssssss: Record size [KB]

Communication

Item

Communication check

Transmission command (ASCII)

RCK

Response command (ASCII)

RCK

Parameter (ASCII)

163

164

FLOWCHART OF THE SETUP MENU

Display REC & Event Network Advanced Menu

SETUP MENU (Quick)

System

User Level

System

Save/Load

Switcher

Monitor 1

Switcher

Monitor 2

System

Basic Setup

Recording

REC Setup

System

Time & Date

System

User Regist.

Time & Date

Summer Time

(Day Light Savings)

Table

Recording

Emergency REC

System

User Edit

System

User Delete

System

Host Regist.

System

Host Edit

System

Host Delete

Monitor 1

Live Sequence

Monitor 2

Live Sequence

Display

OSD Setup

Display

Monitor 1

Display

Monitor 2

Event

Event Setup

Event

VMD Setup

Event

Alarm Setup

Event

Terminal Setup

SETUP MENU (Advanced)

Schedule

Time Table

Event Setup

VMD

Event Setup

Video Loss

Schedule

REC PROGRAM

Recording Program

Event Setup

Terminal/Command

Alarm

Schedule

EVENT PROGRAM

Event Program

VMD Area Setup

For each camera

Event Program

VMD

Event Program

Video Loss

Event Program

Terminal/Command

Alarm

Schedule

Special Days

OSD Setup

Camera Title

Comm

Camera Control

Maintenance

REC Rate

Comm

PS·Data Setup

Camera Number Setup

Comm

RS485 Setup

Control Camera CH

Comm

RS232C Setup

Maintenance

Disk Info

Maintenance

Version info

Maintenance

Disk End Mode

Comm

NW Setup 1

Comm

NW Setup 2

Comm

NTP Setup

Maintenance

Disk Capacity

Maintenance

Disk Delete

Maintenance

Event Log

Maintenance

Error Log

Maintenance

Access Log

PARAMETERS AND THE DEFAULT SETTINGS OF THE SETUP MENU

These are the setting parameters and the default settings of the items on the SETUP MENU.

Refer to these as reference.

SETUP MENU (Quick)

Setup Menu

Display

REC & Event

Setup Item Parameter Default Setting

Date Format

Time Format

YY.MM.DD/MMM.DD.YY/DD.MMM.YY

24h/12h

Time & Date -

Time & Date Display Position L-UPPER/L-LOWER/R-UPPER/R-LOWER

Camera Title –

Camera Title Display Position L-UPPER/L-LOWER/R-UPPER/R-LOWER/

CENTER

Live Sequence [Operating with the buttons of the unit]

WJ-HD316A:

1/2/.../16/1-4/5-8/9-12/13-16/1-9/10-16/--

WJ-HD309A:

1/2/.../9/1-4/5-8/9-9/1-9/--

[Operating via a network]

WJ-HD316A:

CAM1/CAM2/.../CAM16/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9-12/QUAD13-16/9SCREEN1-9/

9SCREEN10-16/--

WJ-HD309A:

CAM1/CAM2/.../CAM9/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9/9SCREEN/--

1/2/.../256/--

1 s/2 s/.../30 s

Summer Time

(Day Light Savings)

IN/OUT/AUTO

Beep (Operation)

Language

ON/OFF

JAPANESE/ENGLISH/FRANÇAIS/ESPAÑOL/

DEUTSCH/ITALIANO/RUSSIAN/CHINESE

DD.MMM.YY

24h

L-UPPER

–

R-UPPER

HD316A: Step1: CAM1,

Step2: CAM2, ...... Step16: CAM16

HD309A: Step1: CAM1,

Step2: CAM2, ...... Step9:CAM9

2 s

OUT

OFF

ENGLISH

REC Type

Resolution

Manual REC

REC Rate

QUICK/ADVANCED

FRAME 3D ON/FRAME 3D OFF/FIELD/SIF

OFF/2.5 ips/4.2 ips/5 ips/6.3 ips/

8.3 ips/12.5 ips/25 ips/50 ips

SFA/SFB/FQA/FQB/NQA/NQB/EXA/EXB Quality

Event REC

REC Rate

Quality

Time

OFF/2.5 ips/4.2 ips/5 ips/6.3 ips/

8.3 ips/12.5 ips/25 ips/50 ips

SFA/SFB/FQA/FQB/NQA/NQB/EXA/EXB

1 s/2 s/3 s/4 s/5 s/...../10 s/20 s/30 s/1 min/

2 min/...../10 min/20 min/30 min/...../60 min/

MANUAL/CONTINUE

Operation Mode

Event Setup

ALARM/ACT DET/OFF

VMD: Alarm output/Buzzer 1 s/2 s/...../30 s/40 s/50 s/1 min/2 min/...../5 min/

EXT/OFF

Video Loss: Alarm Output/ 1 s/2 s/...../30 s/40 s/50 s/1 min/2 min/...../5 min/

Buzzer EXT/OFF

Terminal/Command Alarm: 1 s/2 s/...../30 s/40 s/50 s/1 min/2 min/...../5 min/

Alarm Output/Buzzer EXT/OFF

QUICK

FIELD

50 ips

FQB

50 ips

FQB

30 s

ALARM

OFF

2 s

165

166

Setup Menu

Network

Setup Item

Power ON Manual REC

VMD Setup

(SETUP AREA)

(SETUP ALL AREA)

(DELETE AREA)

(DELETE ALL AREA)

(SENSITIVITY)

(VMD MODE)

(EXIT)

Line Speed

HTTP Port Number

DHCP

IP Address

Subnet mask

Gateway

Parameter

ON/OFF

LOW/MID/HIGH/OFF

ANY AREA/VECTOR/DURATION

AUTO/10-HALF/10-FULL/100-HALF/100-FULL

ON/OFF

192.168.000.250

255.255.255.000

192.168.000.001

Default Setting

OFF

ANY AREA

AUTO

OFF

192.168.000.250

255.255.255.000

192.168.000.001

SETUP MENU (Advanced)

Setup Menu

System

Basic Setup

Time & Date

*1: N: Available only using PC via a network, U: Available only operating the unit directly, Blank: Available either of using PC via a network or operating the unit directly

Default Setting *1 Setup Item Parameter

ADMIN Password

PSD User

Auto Login

Auto Login User

Auto Logout

Priority

"GO TO LAST" before

Language

Beep (Operation)

Buzzer (Error)

Shutdown Time

Auto Copy

Date Format

Time Format

Auto Adjust Time

ON/OFF

Follow the priority./Pre-priority/Post-priority

5 s/10 s/30 s/1 min/5 min

12345

ADMIN

OFF

Follow the priority.

5 s

JAPANESE/ENGLISH/FRANÇAIS/ESPAÑOL/

DEUTSCH/ITALIANO/RUSSIAN/CHINESE

ON/OFF

ENGLISH

OFF

OFF/1 s/...../30 s/40 s/50 s/1 min/...../5 min/EXT 2 s

10 s/20 s/30 s/1 min/2 min/3 min/4 min/5 min 10 s

OFF/COPY1/COPY1 (ALT)/COPY2/

COPY2 (ALT)

YY.MM.DD/MMM.DD.YY/DD.MMM.YY

24 h/12 h

ON/OFF

Master Time 0:00/1:00/...../23:00

Summer Time(Day Light Savings) IN/OUT/AUTO

Summer Time(Day Light Savings)

Table

OFF

DD.MMM.YY

24 h

OFF

0:00

OUT

IN: Last Sunday of March at 2:00 a.m.

OUT: Last Sunday of October at 2:00 a.m.

Setup Menu

User Regist.

User Edit

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Host Delete

User Level

Recording

REC Setup

Setup Item

User Name

User Password

Level

Priority

Default Screen

Camera Partitioning

Host IP Address

Level

Priority

Default Screen

Camera Partitioning

Setup

Setup Status

Camera Setup

Event Log Status

Access Log Status

Error Log Status

Alarm Reset

Alarm Suspended Time

Copy

Normal Recording Erase

Event Recording Erase

Manual REC Operation

Playback Operation

N/W Access

REC Type

Recording

Power ON Manual REC

Manual Recording Channel

QUICK/ADVANCED

ON/OFF

MON2/ALL

Color Mode

Embedded REC(Title)

COLOR FINE/COLOR STD/B/W

ON/OFF

Embedded REC(Time&Date) ON/OFF

REC Priority Manual REC/Schedule REC/Event REC

Audio Allocation

Parameter

LV1/LV2/LV3

1/2/...../16

WJ-HD316A

CAM1/CAM2/.../CAM16/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9-12/QUAD13-16/9SCREEN1-9/

9SCREEN10-16/16SCREEN/SEQ

WJ-HD309A

CAM1/CAM2/.../CAM9/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9/7SCREEN/9SCREEN/SEQ

1/2/3

1/2/...../16

WJ-HD316A

CAM1/CAM2/.../CAM16/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9-12/QUAD13-16/7SCREEN/9SCREEN1-9/

9SCREEN10-16/10SCREEN/13SCREEN/

16SCREEN/SEQ

WJ-HD309A

CAM1/CAM2/.../CAM9/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9/7SCREEN/9SCREEN/SEQ CAM1

--/View/View/Operate

(--/View/View&Operate: when using PC via a network)

View/Operate

(View&Operate: when using PC via a network)

LV1

--/View/View/Operate

(--/View/View&Operate: when using PC via a network)

LV1,LV2,LV3

HD316A: OFF/CAM1/CAM2.....CAM16

HD309A: OFF/CAM1/.....CAM9

Default Setting

LV1

CAM1

View/Operate

(View&Operate: when using PC via a network)

LV1

LV1,LV2

LV1

LV1,LV2

LV1,LV2,LV3

QUICK

OFF

ALL

COLOR STD

1: Event REC

2: Manual REC

3: Schedule REC

AUDIO1 to 4: OFF

167

168

Setup Menu Setup Item

Emergency REC Resolution

Recording Time

Recording Rate and Quality

Auto Copy

Parameter Default Setting

FRAME 3D ON/FRAME 3D OFF/FIELD/SIF

1 s/2 s/..../10 s/20 s/30 s/1 min/2 min/..../10 min/

20 min/30 min40 min/50 min/60 min/MANUAL/

CONTINUE

Recording rate: 1 ips/1.7 ips/2.5 ips/4.2 ips/

5 ips/6.3 ips/8.3 ips/12.5 ips/25 ips/50 ips

Quality: SFA/SFB/FQA/FQB/NQA/NQB/

EXA/EXB

OFF/ON

FIELD

10 s

2.5 ips

SFB

OFF

Event

Event Setup Alarm Output

VMD Setup

Alarm Setup

Terminal Setup

Schedule

Time Table

Output Terminal

Buzzer

Monitor1 Action

Monitor2 Action

(SETUP AREA)

(SETUP ALL AREA)

(DELETE AREA)

(DELETE ALL AREA)

(SENSITIVITY)

(VMD MODE)

(EXIT)

Alarm Auto Reset

Alarm Disarm Time

Terminal Setup

Period 12:00AM to 12:00AM

OFF/1 s/2 s/...../30 s/40 s/50 s/1 min/

2 min/...../5 min/EXT

HD316A: TRM1/TRM2/...../TRM16

HD309A: TRM1/TRM2/...../TRM9

VMD: OFF

Video Loss: --

Terminal/Command Alarm: 2 s

HD316A: CAM1: TRM1, CAM2: TRM2,

.....CAM16: TRM16

HD309A: CAM1: TRM1, CAM2: TRM2, N

.....CAM9: TRM9

(This setting is available only for

"VMD" and "Terminal Alarm".)

OFF/1 s/2 s/...../30 s/40 s/50 s/1 min/

2 min/...../5 min/EXT

HD316A: OFF/CAM1/CAM2/...../CAM16

HD309A: OFF/CAM1/CAM2/...../CAM9

HD316A: OFF/CAM1/CAM2/...../CAM16

HD309A: OFF/CAM1/CAM2/...../CAM9

LOW/MID/HIGH/OFF

OFF

ANY AREA/VECTOR/DURATION

ANY AREA

OFF/1 s/2 s/...../30 s/40 s/50 s/1 min/2 min/3 min/ OFF

4 min/5 min

2 s/3 s/...../10 s 2 s

N.O./N.C.

N.O.

VMD: OFF

Video Loss: 2 s

Terminal/Command Alarm: 2 s

VMD: OFF

Video Loss: Camera channel with a video loss occurrence

Terminal/Command Alarm: Same number for camera channel number and alarm number

VMD: OFF

Video Loss: Camera channel with a video loss occurrence

Terminal/Command Alarm: Same number for camera channel number and alarm number

REC PROGRAM

EVENT PROGRAM

FTP SEND BY PERIODIC

TIMER

ERROR REPORT MAIL

PROG1/PROG2/PROG3/PROG4

ON/OFF

WARNING REPORT MAIL ON/OFF

NW BANDWIDTH CONTROL OFF/32kbps/64kbps/128kbps/256kbps/

512kbps/1024kbps/2Mbps/5Mbps/10Mbps

12:00AM to 12:00AM (Everyday/Time zone1)

--:-- to --:-- (Except above)

PROG1

OFF

Setup Menu

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

Setup Item Parameter Default Setting *1

Resolution

RATE

FRAME 3D ON/FRAME 3D OFF/FIELD/FRAME FIELD

OFF/0.1 ips/0.2 ips/0.3 ips/0.4 ips/

0.5 ips/1 ips/1.7 ips/2.5 ips/4.2 ips/5 ips/

6.3 ips/8.3 ips/12.5 ips/25 ips/50 ips

MANUAL: 2.5 ips

SCHEDULE: OFF

EVENT (PRE): OFF

EVENT (POST): 2.5 ips

QUALITY SFA/SFB/FQA/FQB/NQA/NQB/EXA/EXB FQB

DURATION (TIME for the unit) 1 s/2 s/...../10 s/20 s/30 s/1 min/2 min,/...../ EVENT (PRE): 10 s

10 min/20 min/...../60 min/MANUAL/CONTINUE EVENT (POST): 30 s

ALARM/ACT DET/OFF Operation Mode

(Mode: when using PC via a network)

Video Loss, Terminal/Command Alarm:

ALARM

VMD: ACT DET

REC CH ON/OFF ON N

Auto Copy

Preset Position

Serial Notice

Alarm Mail Notice

FTP Alarm Sending

DATE

Mode

ON/OFF

--/1/2/...../256

ON/OFF

1/1 to 12/31

MON/TUE/WED/THU/FRI/SAT/SUN

OFF

Switcher

Monitor1 Live Sequence

Sequence Timing

Auto Skip

Secret View

[Operating with the buttons of the unit]

WJ-HD316A:

1/2/.../16/1-4/5-8/9-12/13-16/1-9/10-16/--

WJ-HD309A:

1/2/.../9/1-4/5-8/9-9/1-9/--

[Operating via a network]

WJ-HD316A:

CAM1/CAM2/.../CAM16/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9-12/QUAD13-16/9SCREEN1-9/

9SCREEN10-16/--

WJ-HD309A:

CAM1/CAM2/.../CAM9/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9/9SCREEN/--

1/2/.../256/--

1 s/2 s/.../30 s

INT/EXT/MON2

ON/OFF

HD316A: STEP1: CAM1,

2 s

INT

STEP2: CAM2, ...... STEP16: CAM16

HD309A: STEP1: CAM1,

STEP2: CAM2, ...... STEP9:CAM9

WJ-HD316A:

CAM1/CAM2/.../CAM16/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9-12/QUAD13-16/7SCREEN/9SCREEN1-9/

9SCREEN10-16/10SCREEN/13SCREEN/

16SCREEN/SEQ/--

WJ-HD309A:

CAM1/CAM2/.../CAM9/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9/7SCREEN/9SCREEN/SEQ/--

16SCREEN

ON/OFF OFF

169

170

Setup Menu

Monitor2

Setup Item

Live Sequence

Sequence Timing

Auto Skip

Parameter Default Setting

[Operating with the buttons of the unit]

WJ-HD316A:

1/2/.../16/1-4/5-8/9-12/13-16/1-9/10-16/--

WJ-HD309A:

1/2/.../9/1-4/5-8/9-9/1-9/--

[Operating via a network]

WJ-HD316A:

CAM1/CAM2/.../CAM16/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9-12/QUAD13-16/9SCREEN1-9/

9SCREEN10-16/--

WJ-HD309A:

CAM1/CAM2/.../CAM9/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9/9SCREEN/--

1/2/.../256/--

1 s/2 s/.../30 s

INT/EXT

HD316A: STEP1: CAM1,

2 s

INT

STEP2: CAM2, .....STEP16:CAM16

HD309A: STEP1: CAM1,

STEP2: CAM2, ..... STEP9:CAM9

ON/OFF ON

WJ-HD316A:

CAM1/CAM2/.../CAM16/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9-12/QUAD13-16/7SCREEN/9SCREEN1-9/

9SCREEN10-16/10SCREEN/13SCREEN/

16SCREEN/SEQ/--

WJ-HD309A:

CAM1/CAM2/.../CAM9/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9/7SCREEN/9SCREEN/SEQ/--

QUAD1-4

Display

OSD Setup

Monitor1

Monitor2

Time & Date Display Position L-UPPER/R-UPPER/L-LOWER/R-LOWER

Camera Title Display Position L-UPPER/R-UPPER/L-LOWER/R-LOWER/

CENTER

Line Color on the Multi Screen WHITE/GRAY/BLACK

Time & Date Display ON/OFF

Camera Title Display

Alarm Display

Display Mode

T&D and Status Display

Position

ON/OFF

MODE1/MODE2/MODE3

UPPER/LOWER

Camera Title Display ON/OFF

Comm

Camera Control COMP

TYPE

PS·Data Setup Unit Address(System)

Unit Address(Controller)

Cascade

Baud Rate

Data Bit

Parity

Stop Bit

Retry Timing

Alarm Data

Camera Number Setup

L-UPPER

R-UPPER

WHITE

MODE1

LOWER

S/M/L HD316A: CAM1to CAM8: S

HD309A: CAM1 to CAM6: S

HD316A: CAM1 to CAM8: COAX/RS485/OFF/ HD316A: CAM1 to CAM8: COAX,

PSD,

CAM9 to CAM12: RS485/PSD/OFF,

CAM13 to CAM16: RS485/PSD/OFF

CAM9 to CAM12: PSD,

CAM13 to CAM16: PSD

HD309A: CAM1 to CAM6: COAX/RS485/OFF/ HD309A: CAM1 to CAM6: COAX,

PSD,

CAM7 to CAM9: RS485/PSD/OFF CAM7 to CAM9: PSD

001 to 099

ON/OFF

001

OFF

2 400/4 800/9 600/19 200/38 400

NONE/EVEN/ODD

1/2

OFF/100 ms/200 ms/400 ms/1000 ms

OFF/0 s/1 s/5 s

001 to 255

9 600

NONE

OFF

1 s

HD316A: 1: 001 to 16: 016

HD309A: 1: 001 to 9: 009

Setup Menu

RS485 Setup

Setup Item

Baud Rate

Control Camera CH

RS232C Setup

NW Setup 1

NW Setup 2

Data Bit

Parity

Stop Bit

Unit Address(System)

Baud Rate

Data Bit

Parity

Stop Bit

Retry Timing

HTTP Port Number

User Authentication

Host Authentication

Line Speed

Live Video Quality

Video Rate

DHCP

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway

DNS

Primary

Secondary

DDNS

User Name

User Password

Access Interval

Host Name

Domain Name

Network SNMP COMMUNITY

Setup

CONTACT

SYSTEM NAME

LOCATION

NTP Setup Time Adjustment

Time Zone

NTP Server Address

Refresh Interval

Parameter Default Setting

4 800/9 600/19 200

PORT1/PORT2

NONE

001 to 099

9 600/19 200/38 400

7/8

NONE/EVEN/ODD

1/2

OFF/100 ms/200 ms/400 ms/1000 ms

00000 to 65535

ON/OFF

AUTO/10-HALF/10-FULL/100-HALF/100-FULL AUTO

FQB FQB

FAST/MIDDLE/SLOW/VERY SLOW

ON/OFF

FAST

OFF

9 600

ODD

OFF

00080

OFF

9 600

HD316A: CAM1 to CAM8: PORT1,

CAM9 to CAM16: PORT2

HD309A: CAM1 to CAM8: PORT1,

CAM9: PORT2

NONE

001

000.000.000.000 to 254.254.254.254

000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255

000.000.000.000 to 254.254.254.254

ON/OFF

000.000.000.000 to 254.254.254.254

ON/OFF

10 min/30 min/1 h/6 h/24 h

192.168.0.250

255.255.255.000

192.168.000.001

OFF

000.000.000.000

OFF

1 h

HD316A: HD316A

HD309A: HD309A localdomain

ON/OFF

GMT-12:00/GMT-11:00/...../GMT-4:00/

GMT-3:30/GMT-3:00/...../GMT-1:00/GMT/

GMT+1:00/GMT+2:00/GMT+3:00/GMT+3:30/

GMT+4:00/GMT+4:30/GMT+5:00/GMT+5:30/

GMT+5:45/GMT+6:00/GMT+6:30/GMT+7:00/

GMT+8:00/GMT+9:00/GMT+9:30/GMT+10:00/

GMT+11:00/...../GMT+13:00

1 h/2 h/6 h/12 h/24 h

OFF

GMT-0:00

6 h

171

172

Setup Menu Setup Item

Network FTP Setup FTP Server Address

User Name

User Password

Mode

Server Directory

File Name

Interval

Channel to Send

Server Directory

File Name

Duration-Pre

Duration-Post

Alter Detect

Network Mail Setup Attach Alarm Image

Mail Server Address

Send to

Address1

Address2

Address3

Address4

From Address

POP before SMTP

POP Server Address

User Name

User Password

Maintenance

Disk Info

(Disk Information: when using PC via a network)

Warning for Disk Life Time

Disk End Mode

HDD Safety Mode

Normal Recording Area

Event Recording Area

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

Copy Area

COPY1

COPY2

Normal Recording Area

Event Recording Area

Copy Area

COPY1

COPY2

Auto Delete

Parameter

SEQUENTIAL/PASSIVE

TIME & DATE BASE/SERIAL NUMBER

HD316A: CAM1 to CAM16

HD309A: CAM1 to CAM9

TIME & DATE BASE/SERIAL NUMBER

OFF/1 s/2 s/3 s/4 s/5 s/6 s/7 s/8 s/9 s/10 s

ON/OFF

10 000 h/20 000 h/30 000 h

ON/OFF

CONTINUE/STOP

OFF/1 %/2 %/···/10 %

OFF/1DAY/2DAYS/···.../10DAYS/14DAYS/

30DAYS/45DAYS/60DAYS/90DAYS/

120DAYS/150DAYS/180DAYS

Default Setting

SEQUENTIAL

TIME & DATE BASE

01 s

OFF

TIME & DATE BASE

OFF

5 s

OFF

20 000 h

OFF

CONTINUE

STOP

10 %

OFF

TROUBLESHOOTING

Check the following before requesting repair.

Contact your dealer if a problem cannot be solved even after checking and trying the solution or a problem is not described below, and when having a problem with installations.

Problem

Check item/Remedy Page

• Check if the power plug is properly connected to the AC outlet.

–

Power is not turned on.

• Check if the power cord is properly inserted into the power socket of the unit.

–

The HDD SAFETY MODE window is displayed after turning on the power of the unit.

• The HDD SAFETY MODE is set to ON.

In this case, set the HDD SAFETY MODE to OFF.

Refer to p. 70.

No camera image is displayed on MON 1, MON 2, and the

VGA monitor.

• Check if the lens covers of the cameras have been removed.

• Check if the power is supplied to cameras and connected devices.

–

• Check if the cable connections are correct.

Refer to p. 73.

• Check the brightness and contrast settings of the monitors.

• Can the users display camera images on the monitors?

Check the level settings of the users logging in.

This is not a malfunction. Images may not fit in the screen of some monitor models because of their resolutions.

–

Refer to p. 108 and 111.

–

Displayed image does not fit in the screen.

The log-in menu does not appear even if you press the button of the unit.

The camera image is dim.

• Check if any user has logged in with the system controller.

–

Cannot open SETUP MENU.

• Check if dust may be sticking to the camera lens.

–

• Can the users display the SETUP MENU on the monitors?

Check the level settings of the users logging in.

Refer to p. 108 and 111.

• Check if monitor 1 is used to display the SETUP MENU.

The SETUP MENU cannot be displayed on monitor 1.

Refer to page

12.

173

174

Problem

Cannot start recording.

Cannot record or display the

SETUP MENU of a matrix switcher.

Cannot playback images.

Cannot control cameras.

Check item/Remedy

• Check if the HDD has any available disk space.

• Check if the recording setup is set to ON.

• Check the schedule settings.

• Check the recording priority settings.

• When the setting menu of a matrix switcher is displayed by a non-interlace signal, the setting menu may be unable to function normally.

Since the setting menu of the matrix switcher is displayed by a non-interlace signal, recording or displaying the setup menu of a matrix switcher with this unit may be impossible.

Page

Refer to p. 137.

Refer to p. 112.

Refer to p. 120.

Refer to p. 113.

–

• Check if images have been recorded on the HDD.

Refer to p. 29.

• Can the users record images?

Check the level settings of the users logging in.

• Can the users display camera images on the monitors?

Check the level settings of the users logging in.

Refer to p. 108 and 111.

• Check the connection of the camera you are going to control. Coaxial communication control is available for cameras connected to VIDEO IN 1 to 8 for the WJ-HD316A (1 to 6 for the WJ-HD309A).

Refer to p. 74.

• Check if the camera you are going to control is a combination camera.

Refer to p. 74.

• Check the camera control settings.

Refer to p. 131.

• Can the users control the cameras?

Check the level settings of the users logging in.

Refer to p. 108 and 111.

• Check the BUSY indicator. When the indicator is lighting, a higher-priority user is controlling the cameras. You cannot control the cameras until the indicator goes out.

Refer to p. 10.

Alarm operations are not activated.

"THERMAL" appears on the monitor.

The clock does not keep correct time.

Problem

"VIDEO LOSS" appears on the monitor.

When you turn on the power of the unit, the HDD DISK MENU is displayed.

Check item/Remedy

• Check if alarm input signals are properly input to the

ALARM or ALARM/CONTROL at the rear panel.

• Check the settings of the ALARM connector.

• Check if the operation mode is set to ALARM (alarm mode).

Page

Refer to p. 87 and 91.

Refer to p. 91.

Refer to p. 121 and 122.

• Check the camera connections.

• If the camera connections are proper, refer to the dealer.

Cable wires may be snapped or the unit may have some trouble.

Refer to p. 74.

–

• Check if the ambient operating temperature is between

+5 °C and +45 °C (41 °F - 113 °F).

• When the inside of unit exceeds 45 °C (113 °F), "THER-

MAL" may appear even within the ambient temperature mentioned above.

• If "THERMAL" frequently appear on monitors, refer to the dealer. The unit may have some trouble.

Refer to p. 5 and 16.

• Check if the built-in backup battery has been charged enough. If not so, supply power to the unit for 48 hours or more to recharge the battery.

Refer to p. 5.

• Check if the built-in backup battery has been worn out.

The battery life is approx. 5 years. (The battery lifetime may differ depending on the condition of the environment.)

Refer to p. 5.

• Check if HDDs were added or removed. If so, the HDD

DISK MENU will be displayed automatically.

• If the HDD DISK MENU is displayed even though no

HDDs were added or removed, refer to the dealer. The

HDD may have some trouble.

Refer to p. 143.

–

175

Problem

The available disk space of

HDD is not displayed.

Check item/Remedy

• Check if "Disk End Mode" is set to STOP.

• Check if there is a partition in the HDD.

Page

Refer to p. 137.

–

• Check if the "Disk End Mode" is set to STOP.

Refer to p. 137.

The available disk space of

HDD is not displayed on the right bar.

• Check if there is a partition in the HDD.

–

Cannot establish a connection via the network.

• Check the network settings of the unit and PC.

Refer to the

Network Setup

Instructions (PDF).

• Check the host registration setting. When host authentication is set to ON, you cannot establish the connection from computers other than the PC registered as the host.

Refer to p. 109 and 134.

176

Response or Image update takes time.

• Check if the network is crowded.

Rebooting of the unit occurs while displaying the splash startup screen.

When the unit fails to find all of the connected extension units

(WJ-HDE300 series) previously mounted for the following reasons, it may take time to start up because the unit will be restarted while displaying the splash startup screen. They are normal operations.

• When dedicated cables connecting the unit and the extension units are not firmly connected or detached

• When all of the extension units previously mounted are disconnected

Inspect the power cord, power plug and connectors periodically.

The power cord insulation is damaged.

The power cord, plug and connectors get hot during use.

The power cord gets hot when bent or stretched.

–

• The power cord, plug and connectors are worn out. This may result in electric shock or a fire. Unplug the power plug from the AC outlet immediately, and refer to qualified service personnel.

SPECIFICATION

General

Power source:

Power consumption

Ambient operating temperature

Ambient operating humidity

Dimensions

Weight

Input/Output

Video

Audio

Others

220 V -240 V AC, 50 Hz

75 W

+5 °C to +45 °C (41 °F - 113 °F)

Less than 85 %

420 mm (W) X 88 mm (H) X 350 mm (D) [16-9/16" (W) X 3-7/16" (H) X

13-3/4" (D)] (excluding rubber feet and projections)

9 k g (19.8 lbs.)

Video input connectors

Cascade input connector

Video output connectors

Monitor output connectors

Monitor output connector

(VGA)

S-video output connector

WJ-HD316A: 1 V [P-P] / 75

Ω, vertical timing pulse multiplexed, x8 (1 to 8 CH) (BNC)

WJ-HD309A: 1 V [P-P] / 75

Ω, vertical timing pulse multiplexed, x6 (1 to 6 CH) (BNC)

WJ-HD316A: 1 V [P-P] / 75

Ω, with auto-termination loop-thru, x8 (9 to 16 CH) (BNC)

WJ-HD309A: 1 V [P-P] / 75

Ω, with auto-termination loop-thru, x3 (7 to 9 CH) (BNC)

1 V [P-P] / 75

Ω (BNC)

WJ-HD316A: 1 V [P-P] / 75

Ω, active loop-thru output, x8 (1 to 8 CH)

(BNC)* 1

1 V [P-P] / 75

Ω, loop-thru output, x8 (9 to 16 CH) (BNC)

WJ-HD309A: 1 V [P-P] / 75

Ω, active loop-thru output, x8 (1 to 8 CH)

(BNC)* 1

1 V [P-P] / 75

Ω, loop-thru output, x1 (9 CH) (BNC)

1 V [P-P] / 75

Ω, x2 (BNC)

RGB output, x1 (15-pin D-sub)

Y = 1 V [P-P] / 75

Ω, C=0.3 V [P-P] / 75 Ω, x1 (S-video output connector)

1 V [P-P] / 75

Ω, x1 (RCA pin)

Video output connector

(front panel)

Audio input connectors

Audio output connectors

Expansion connector

Copy connectors

Control connectors

Alarm port

–10 dBv, 10 K

–10 dBv, 600

Ω, unbalanced, x4 (RCA pin)

Ω, unbalanced, x2 (RCA pin)

High-speed serial interface, 480 Mbps (theoretical value), x1

High-speed serial interface, 480 Mbps (theoretical value), x2

Emergency recording input*

, available space warning output*

(for devices connected to copy connectors), HDD trouble output*

, camera trouble output*

, trouble output*

, electricity failure recovery completion output*

, time adjust input/output*

, sequence switching input/output*

, electricity failure detection input*

(25-pin D-sub) , +5 V output *

, external recording mode switching*

WJ-HD316A: 1 to 16 CH alarm input*

, 1 to 16 alarm output*

, alarm recovery input*

, alarm suspension input*

(25-pin D-sub)

WJ-HD309A: 1 to 9 CH alarm input*

, 1 to 9 alarm output*

, alarm recovery input*

, alarm suspension input*

(25-pin D-sub)

177

178

Others RS-485 ports

DATA ports

SERIAL connector

Ethernet port

RS-485 (full duplex/half duplex*

), x2 (RJ-11)

RS-485, x2 (RJ-11)

RS-232C, x1 (9-pin D-sub)

10 Base-T/100 Base-Tx (RJ-45)

When power is not supplied, the video output signal was not sent from the unit even if a video input signal is supplied.

Non-voltage N.O. Contact, 50 k

Ω, +5 V pull-up

Open collector output, maximum under conditions of 24 V DC and 100 mA or less

High (+12 V, 6.3 mA)

Either of *2 or *3 above (depending on the settings).

200 mA at maximum

Changeable with the mode switch

STANDARD ACCESSORIES

CD-ROM* ............................................................................ 1

Operating Instructions (this manual) .................................. 1

The following are for installation:

Power Cord ......................................................................... 1

Rack Mounting Bracket ...................................................... 2

Screw for Rack Mounting Bracket ...................................... 4

Hard Disk Drive Fixing Screw ............................................. 4

*The following are included on the CD-ROM:

Viewer software

Plug-in software

Network Operating Instructions (PDF)

Network Setup Instructions (PDF)

Operation Using The System Controllers (PDF)

Administrator Console (Software)

Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.

Osaka, Japan http://www.panasonic.co.jp/global/

N0904-1114 3TR003184BAA Printed in Japan

Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Clover TFT1904DVR Setup Manual

Panasonic WJ-HD309A Manual de usuario

Panasonic WJHD309A - DIGITAL DISK RECORDER Network Set Instructions

Setup Instructions PRELIMINARY

Panasonic WJ-HDE300 Datasheet

Panasonic WJ-HDE300/G Instructions Manual

Panasonic WJHD316 Operating Instructions

WJ-SX650 Series Operating Instructions Matrix Switcher 650

Panasonic WJ-HDE300 Instruction Manual

Panasonic WJ-HD316/6500 Series 16 Channel Digital Video Recorders (WJHD3166500, WJ HD316 6500, PAN W

Panasonic WJ-HD316A Specification Sheet

WJ-HD316A

Panasonic WJ-HDE400 Installation Guide

Panasonic WJ-RT416V User manual

3TR001883GDA_WJ-HDE300P (1201 Кб)

i-PRO i PRO WJ-NX200K-G Network Disk Recorder Installation Guide

Digital Disk Recorder Operating Instructions

Brigade AC-24-12(006) (4719) Camera Monitor System Owner's Manual

Panasonic WJ-HD309 DVD Recorder User manual

Panasonic WJ

Panasonic WJHD309 - DIGITAL DISK RECORDER, WJHD316 - DIGITAL DISK RECORDER Operating Instructions Manual

Download PDF

WJ-HD309A

Digital Disk Recorders

Operating Instructions

CAUTION

LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

PRECAUTIONS

TRADEMARKS AND REGISTERED TRADEMARKS

ABOUT THESE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

CONTENTS

PREFACE

FEATURES

Various Recording Functions

Frame Switcher Function

Remote Operation via Network

Security Function and Reliability

Transmission with Coaxial Cable, PS·Data and

RS485 Compatible

MAJOR OPERATING CONTROLS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS

Front View

[WJ-HD316A]

[WJ-HD309A]

Rear View

[WJ-HD309A]

[WJ-HD316A]

IMPORTANT

On Monitor 1 (To display only live image)

On Monitor 2 (To display live or recorded images)

IMPORTANT

Status on the Task Bar

• On the Main Bar

• On the Left Bar

• On the Right Bar

STARTUP

Insert the power plug to an outlet (AC 220 V -

240 V, 50 Hz)

Turn on the power switch on the rear panel.

Enter a user name and password.

Display a live image.

CLOCK ADJUSTMENT

Press the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or more.

Move the cursor to "SET" and press the SET button.

Press the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or more.

Move the cursor to "Time & Date" using the arrows button (

), and set the time

(Day, Month, Year, Time) using the jog dial.

SHUTDOWN

RECORDING (Manual Recording)

Start recording.

Stop recording.

316

Recording Mode and Priority

RECORDING (Emergency Recording)

Press the external switch.

Recording duration of emergency recording

316

Stop recording.

PLAYBACK

Start playback.

Stop playback.

Select the camera respective to the recorded images to be played. (Go to step 2 if not necessary)

Available functions during playback

+

PLAYBACK IMAGE ON A DESIGNATED DISK

[WJ-HD316A]

[WJ-HD309A]

Press the SHIFT button.

Press the camera selection button 9 (7 for the

WJ-HD309A) (DISK SELECT).

Select a disk to be played using the jog dial and move the cursor to "OK" using the arrows button. Press the SET button to determine the selection.

Rotate the jog dial to select a desired recorded image to be played.

316

Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to play the selected recorded image.

To stop playback, press the STOP button.

PLAYBACK FROM A DESIGNATED TIME AND DATE

Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.

Press the STOP button.

316

Press the SEARCH button repeatedly until the time and date designation window is displayed.